You are on page 1of 511

ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL

(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)

FOR

ARIANE REAL ESTATE


AT

AL ERKYAH, LUSAIL, QATAR

VOLUME 3 ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

COVER-1/4
0 Tender Issue
Rev. Date of Issue Purpose of Issue

PROJECT :

Erkyah Residential Building


(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
OWNER :

Ariane Real Estate


SITE :
Al Erkyah, Lusail, Qatar
JOB NO. : DATE :
Erkyah Residential 30 DEC 2015
PREPARED BY : CHECKED AND VERIFIED BY : APPROVED BY :
Haytham Hanafy Uday Kumar

COVER-2/4
This specification document is part of overall Tender Documentation and is to be read in
conjunction with the other parts, including the General Conditions of the Contract, The
particular conditions of the Contract, the Drawings, and other Referred Documents of these
Specifications. The Tenderer should ensure that they have been fully comprehended and
included in the Scope of Works under this Contract.

COVER-3/4
TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section 19 Plumbing Installation

1. General
2. Materials
3. Irrigation
4. SNG System

Section 20 Drainage Installation

1. General
2. System Network

Section 21 Electrical Installation

1. General
2. Electrical Supply and Distribution
3. Fire Alarm & Voice Evacuation

Section 22 Air Conditioning Installation

1. Commercial Specification
2. Technical Specifications

Section 23 Fire Fighting Installation

1. General
2. Products
3. Execution

COVER-4/4
SECTION 19

PLUMBING, SNG & IRRIGATION INSTALLATION


AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

SL NO. TITLE OF SPECIFICATIONS

19.1.00 PLUMBING GENERAL

19.1.01 Site

19.1.02 Site Conditions

19.1.03 Definitions

19.1.04 Scope of Works

19.1.05 Compliance with Specifications and Regulations

19.1.06 Plumbing System

19.1.07 Programme

19.1.08 Contract Drawings

19.1.09 Working Drawings

19.1.10 Co-ordination of Drawings

19.1.11 Material Submittals

19.1.12 Material Inspections

19.1.13 Alternative Materials

19.1.14 Setting Out of Works

19.1.15 Safety

19.1.16 Contractors License

19.1.17 Service Connection and Permits

19.1.18 Damage to Plant and Materials

19.1.19 Protective Finishes

19.1.20 Works Test and Inspection


19.1.21 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
19.1.22 As Built Drawings
19.1.23 Period of Maintenance
19.1.24 Label and identification of pipes
19.1.25 Civil Works / Builder Works

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-19-1/30


PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

19.2.00 PLUMBING MATERIALS

19.2.01 General

19.2.02 Installation, Storage and Protection

19.2.03 Pipe Supports, Brackets and Hangers

19.2.04 Pipe Sleeves

19.2.05 Valves and Stop Cocks

19.2.06 Strainers and Drain Cocks

19.2.07 Float Ball Valves

19.2.08 Trench Excavation

19.2.09 Under Ground Cold Water Services

19.2.10 Pipework Insulations

19.2.11 Cold Water Storage Tanks

19.2.12 Hot Water Service Heaters

19.2.13 Water Filters

19.2.14 Cold Water Pump Sets

19.2.15 Pressure Reducing Valve

19.2.16 Swimming pool

19.2.17 Sterilization of Water Services

19.2.18 Testing and Commissioning

19.2.19 Schedule of Approved Manufacturers

19.3.00 IRRIGATION SYSTEM

19.4.00 SNG SYSTEM

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-19-2/30


PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

19.1.01 SITE

Lusail AL ERKYAH, Lusail, Qatar

19.1.02 SITE CONDITIONS

Unless otherwise specified, all the Plumbing Materials and Equipments shall be
capable of withstanding the following site conditions:

Maximum Ambient Temperature: 50 Deg.C (Dry Bulb) in summer


& 8 Deg.C (Dry Bulb) in winter

Altitude : Sea Level

Maximum Relative Humidity : 95 %

Maximum Wind Velocity : 140 Kms. per Hour

Prevailing Wind : North and North Westerly

Storms : Dusty Sporadic and Irregular

Annual Rainfall : 50mm between January & April

19.1.03 DEFINITIONS

The following terms and abbreviations used in these specifications / drawings shall
mean:

Site : The Locations where the works are to be carried out.

Contractor : The Main Contractor

KAHRAMAA : Qatar General Electric and Water Corporation

QCS : Qatar Construction Specification

BS : British Standard Specifications

CP : British Standard Code of Practice

Tender Drawing : The Drawing on which the tender is based and the
schedules therein.

Working Drawings : The Drawings prepared by the Contractor for the


purpose of execution of work at site.

As Built Drawings : This is the true record of the actual work carried- out at
site.

Works : To include the provisions for al the materials and works

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-19-3/30


PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

to be carried out by the contractor as per these


specifications and for the satisfactory completion of the
installation.

Approved : Shall mean APPROVED by the Engineer in writing.

Submitted : Shall mean SUBMITTED to the Engineer in writing.

Accepted : Shall mean ACCEPTED by the Engineer in writing.

Provide : Shall mean, supply, install, test and commission.

Install : Shall mean install, test and commission.

Furnish : Shall mean supply only.

Concealed : Shall mean hidden from normal sight in the shafts,


ceiling spaces, walls, slabs or partitions.

Exposed : Shall mean visible to building occupants in spaces,


which may be reached without the use ladders or any
other temporary means of access.

19.1.04 SCOPE OF WORKS

The scope of works under this contract includes the supply, installation testing and
commissioning of the Plumbing materials, fixtures and equipment as per
specifications drafted in these sections and drawings. The contractor shall provide
complete installation of the project and other associated works such as supporting
structures, ancillary works etc. Brief descriptions of plumbing works are as follows:

1. Potable water storage and distribution.


2. External services works

19.1.05 COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFICATIONS AND REGULATIONS

Project Specification to be followed as applicable and shall also to comply with QCS.
All materials used shall be as per approved materials, any changes shall have a
written approval by the Engineer.

The installation of the works covered in this section shall be in accordance with this
specification and with the requirements of the relevant authorities, KAHRAMAA
(Water Division) and fire department and to the relevant B.S specification.

i. The equipments shall conform to the British Standard specifications & codes of
practice (current editions including all amendments).

ii. If the Contractor wishes to use materials of installations or equipments other than
the specified ones and conforming to different standards, then a written approval
from the Engineer shall be obtained. However the Engineer reserves the right
for such approval/s.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-19-4/30


PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

iii. Any apparatus, appliance, material or work not shown on the contract drawings
but mentioned in the specification or vice versa, or any incidental accessories or
work necessary to make the work complete and perfect in all respects and ready
for operation, even if not particularly specified shall be supplied and installed or
carried out by the contractor without any additional costs.

iv. Clarification shall be obtained from the Consultant in writing for any such cases
at the tendering stage. In case of any discrepancy arises afterwards during the
construction, the consultants decision shall be final and binding on all such
matters.

v. In case of any ambiguity or discrepancy in the project specification, the


government published specifications (QCS) shall be adapted.

vi. It is the responsibility of contractor to study the specification in detail and clear all
doubts or issues that need clarification in order to execute the job. The tender
drawings are guide lines and the contractor must prepare the detailed shop
drawings and get approval from consultant prior to the execution of job at the
site, No delay or any compromise on the specification or quality of work is
accepted on any account.

Any apparatus, appliance, material or work not shown on the contract drawings but
mentioned in the specification or vice versa, or any incidental accessories or work
necessary to make the work complete and perfect in all respects and ready for
operation, even if not particularly specified shall be supplied and installed or carried
out by the contractor without any additional costs.

Clarification shall be obtained from the Engineer in writing for any such cases at the
tendering stage. In case of any discrepancy arises afterwards during the
construction, the Engineers decision shall be final and binding on all such matters.

19.1.06 PLUMBING SYSTEM

WATER SUPPLY

a. Cold Water System

The cold water system shall consist of concrete water tank located at the 2nd
basement, which act as the main storage tank fed from Municipality water for the
entire building. Lift pump will be available to transfer water from main storage tank to
roof tanks. Dedicated water supply booster systems with pressure vessel will
distribute domestic water passing thru multimedia water filters. A complete pipe
works shall feed the internal cold water supply distribution network in the building as
shown in the tender drawings.

b. Hot Water System

The Hot water supply to the various sanitary fixtures shall be through Individual
electric water heaters as shown on the tender drawings.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-19-5/30


PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

19.1.07 PROGRAMME

The Contractor shall produce the work program based on CPM (Critical Path Method
or Bar chart, indicating the time required for various activities and operations to
complete the project in time. The following points shall be highlighted in the
Program:

1. Mobilization
2. Drawings and Material Submittals
3. Approvals
4. Equipment Deliveries
5. First Fix
6. Main and Sub-Main Piping Works
7. Second Fix
8. Fixing of Accessories
9. Testing
10. Commissioning and Handing Over

19.1.08 CONTRACT DRAWINGS

The Plumbing tender drawings related to this project have been listed in the
Schedule of Drawings enclosed with the specifications. The tender drawings have
been prepared to show the tenderer the principal equipment and general
arrangement required for the project.

Drawings do not indicate every detail of the work. It is the Contractors responsibility
to check the positions / locations at site. All dimensions are tentative and shall be
checked with the Architectural and Structural drawings. Any discrepancy shall be
brought to the attention of the Engineer in writing at the time of tender.

Particular attention shall be paid to the positioning of draw offs, valves, and other
accessories, in relation to the Interior finishes and locations of various appliances.
The Contractor is deemed to have studied the services drawings based on all the
local regulations and have included in his prices for all builders work associated with
these drawings.

19.1.09 WORKING DRAWINGS

The contractor shall prepare the working drawings in a scale of 1:50 for plans, 1:5 for
details and 1:200 for site plan, and submit them for the Engineers approval. The
contractor shall project the following in the above drawings:

i. Actual pipework routes boxes indicating the sizes of all branches, bends and
other accessories and fittings.

ii Typical connection details of the various Plumbing requirements of appliances,


like Water Closets, Wash Basins, Faucets, Bidets, Sinks etc.,

iii Sections and Elevations of Installations with co-ordination details in respect to


the other services Installations like, Electricals, Air-conditioning & Ventilation and
Drainage.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-19-6/30


PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

iv Levels, Center lines of the pipework installations and the details of supports.

19.1.10 CO-ORDINATION OF DRAWINGS

The Main contractor shall produce working drawings for building works required for
the services showing the integration of all the services i.e., Electrical, Mechanical
and Drainage systems.

The Main contractor shall ensure that all the working drawings are properly
coordinated before submitting to the Engineer for approval. All the services shall be
installed in such a manner so as to avoid conflict with each other and maintain the
clearances required between each of them as per the prevailing regulations.

19.1.11 MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

The materials offered for approval shall be strictly in accordance with the
specifications and tender drawings.

The contractor shall submit in triplicate, the technical literature for each item of the
equipment, he intends to use for the project, to the consultant for the necessary
review and approval.

If in case the technical literature is not available, then a sample shall be submitted:
in the absence of either of these, typed technical data shall be submitted duly
supported by telex / letter of the manufacturer for confirmation.

In case of items involving aesthetic, sink taps, Showers, Draw offs etc., samples
must be submitted for approval along with the materials submittals.
Each copy of the submittals shall be numbered and signed with the technical
literature clearly highlighted, indicating the model, type and capacity of the
equipment offered. The consultant shall retain two for copies and return one, either
Approved or Not Approved, to the contractor.

The contractor shall maintain and submit a status report every month, of all the
Materials submittals of the Plumbing Materials & Equipments in the following
proforma to the consultant:

i. Submittal Number
ii. Type of Material
iii. Manufacturer / Local Agent
iv. Date of Approval
v. Date of Order / Order Number
vi. Mode of Delivery ( Air, Land or Sea )
vii. ETA on Site
viii. Status as on date of Report

a. Equipment Supply

All the equipments for the project shall be procured only through the appointed local
agent in Qatar, who shall be the authorized agent and be able to supply the spare

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-19-7/30


PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

parts etc., for the items anytime in the future. The contractor shall mark the same
clearly on the submittals (item No. iii. above).

In case of any item/s required to be purchased abroad directly, for valid reasons,
then the contractor shall mention the same in the submittal and obtain approval from
the Engineer specifically.

b. Equipment Size and Delivery

Each item of equipment shall be delivered to site in sections suitable for installations
in position designated, bearing in mind the location, type of structure, construction
program and the method of access.

c. Design References

Any design, for any of the systems, detailed on the Tender drawings, which requires
amendment or differs from that available at the time of construction, due to the
change in the manufacturers range of production or availability etc., The contractor
shall discuss the matter and obtain a readily available alternative from the Engineer.
Accordingly, the contractor shall make a fresh submittal based on the Engineers
advise and obtain approval to provide the revised system.

In such cases, no cost consideration will be applicable, as the contractor is deemed


to have studied the drawings and specifications thoroughly as well as obtained
clarifications during the tender stage, before submitting his quotation for the
execution.

19.1.12 MATERIAL INSPECTIONS

The contractor shall inform the Engineer within one week upon receipt of all the
materials at the site and arrange for the inspection of the same. Any material used
at site which is not approved earlier specifically shall stand rejected without notice.

Any item on supply differs from the one shown on the submittal catalogue copy or
the sample submitted will also be rejected at site. In such cases, the contractor shall
make a fresh submittal for the item and obtain approval from the Engineer. Any time
delay caused due to the above shall be on the Contractors account.

The contractor will have to remove the rejected materials from the site and replace
with approved materials at his own expenses. In the event the contractor fails to do
so, the client will have the liberty to carry out such works from other agencies and
debit the ensuing amount to the Contractor.

Materials Storage

The contractor shall be responsible for the safe keeping and storage of the materials
at site and provision of such covering as may be necessary to ensure that on
completion, all items are handed over in sound condition with all protective finishes
undamaged.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-19-8/30


PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

19.1.13 ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS

Equipments and Materials used as the basis for the design are listed in the Schedule
of Manufacturers. The tenderer shall submit alternative proposals for any of the
equipment or material for the consultants consideration. Only in case if the specified
item/s are not available due to valid reasons. Only in such cases, the alternatives
will be considered by the consultant, before the tender is accepted and the
consultants decision will be final regarding the matter.

In case the alternatives are accepted, the acceptance of the same will be confirmed
in writing by the consultant. During the execution of the contract, no alternative
equipment, materials or fittings will be permitted other than the approved and the
contractor is fore-warned that any item provided by him which is not up to the
specification, must be replaced at his own expense. In cases where time will not
permit, then such replacements shall be at the clients convenience, but nevertheless
at the Contractors expenses etc.

19.1.14 SETTING OUT OF WORKS

The locations of Sink taps, showers, draw offs and their piping routes, etc., as
indicated on the tender drawings is tentative and may require some variation to suit
the site requirements. The exact positions must be checked and shown on the
detailed working drawings as indicated on the detailed Architectural drawings and
co-ordinated with furnishing and other services.

19.1.15 SAFETY

The contractor shall maintain all the safety procedures at site to protect man-power
and machinery. The Main Contractor shall provide all the means to achieve the
Safety standards required and protect the manpower, materials and equipments at
any point of time.

19.1.16 CONTRACTORS LICENSE

The Main contractor shall ensure that the Sub-Contractor appointed for Plumbing
works shall be one of the approved to carryout and maintain such work.

The Contractor shall submit the qualifications and experience particulars of the
Mechanical Engineer, Foreman and technicians (plumbers) to be employed on the
project and obtain approval from the Engineer. Once the approval is obtained, the
contractor shall not replace the staff from site. In case the same becomes
necessary, re-approval should be obtained and the new staff shall continue with the
old staff for a minimum period of 30 days before the later is withdrawn from the site.
In such cases, the proposed replacement personnel shall have a minimum of 5 years
local experience. Any application with less than 5 years of experience will be
rejected by the Engineer.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-19-9/30


PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

19.1.17 SERVICE CONNECTION AND PERMITS

The contractor shall obtain all necessary permits prior to commencement of work
and obtain current record drawings of existing services already installed. All
applications for permits etc., shall be made in writing to the authorities, a minimum of
7 days prior to the execution of the work. The Contractor is fully responsible for
obtaining the necessary permits from the authorities for his work site as well as for
any connected works to others.

All statutory permits from Fire, Water and Sewerage Department are secured by the
consultant. The plumbing contractor shall however coordinate all inspection works
and liaise with the State departments regarding all pipework and payment of fees,
etc., when connecting city water mains connections to the mains. The contractor is
required to produce certificates of approval of all materials and equipment by the
relevant authorities when requested by the consultant.

The plumbing contractor shall coordinate connection works of water/sewer and fire to
the city mains with relevant local authorities of works.

19.1.18 DAMAGE TO PLANT AND MATERIALS

Any plant or material which is damaged by any means whatsoever shall not be used
in the works.

Should the contractor wish to rectify such damage in order to utilize the plant or
materials in the permanent works, the matter shall be brought to the attention of the
Engineer, who in turn shall conduct a proper survey after which the necessary
instructions will be issued. Only after obtaining a written permission from the
Engineer, shall any remedial work be carried out.

Any damaged Plant or Material allegedly brought to a as-new condition following


such a procedure, shall only be accepted after the technical appraisal & discretion of
the Engineer, whose decision in such matters shall be final and binding.

19.1.19 PROTECTIVE FINISHES

The protective finishes must be provided on all materials and Equipments used in
this contract to ensure that no deterioration is caused by the interaction of local
climatic conditions. All materials shall be inspected by the contractor or his
representative before shipment to ensure that finishes are in accordance with the
specifications.

19.1.20 WORKS TEST AND INSPECTION

Provision shall be made by the contractor for the consultant or consultants


representative to witness hydraulic tests as specified elsewhere, of major pipe work
executed by the contractor.

The consultant will advise the contractor at the time of commencement of the
contract the list of works that are to be inspected and the contractor shall give the

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-19-10/30


PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

consultant the required notice in the required Inspection form, of the date on which
the plant or work will be ready for testing.

The consultant will signify his intention to attend the tests or accept the contractor's
test sheets. The contractor shall supply all the Inspection Forms and Test
certificates in original to the consultant / Client at the time of handing over the
project.

19.1.21 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

The contractor shall provide Three copies in the form of bound documents the
operating instructions and maintenance manuals indicating the following :

a. Step by step operating procedures.


b. Preventive maintenance schedule.
c. Technical literature.
d. Spare parts list
e. Manufacturer's name, address, telex no., Fax no. telephone no., and contact
person.- Local as well as overseas.
f. Work test certificates if any, Test reports carried out at site.
g. Guarantee

19.1.22 AS BUILT DRAWINGS

After the working drawings have been approved, no alteration to the drawings shall
be carried out without the consent of the consultant. These changes shall be
supported by sketches and incorporated on the AS-BUILT drawings which are to
be submitted to the consultant within one month of completion of the project.

Two sets of drawing CDs along with three sets of drawings printout shall be
submitted after approval of the consultant for onward submission to the client.

19.1.23 PERIOD OF MAINTENANCE

The contractor shall guarantee the entire Plumbing System installed against Faulty /
improper materials and or workmanship for the period of maintenance of 400 days
(Four Hundred) from the date, the installation is tested, commissioned and accepted
by the Engineer. Also where longer guarantee or warranty periods are otherwise
declared, for any equipment or materials such longer terms shall apply.

Materials, workmanship and performance guarantee shall start from the date of the
successful handing over.

The Contractor shall submit a single guarantee for whole of the works, which states
that all parts of the work are in accordance with the contract documents during the
period of maintenance, the contractor shall repair any deficiencies, within 24 hours of
notification at no additional cost to the contract.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-19-11/30


PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

In case if the Contractor fails to attend to any such faults as mentioned above within
the specified time, then the client shall make own arrangements to rectify the fault
but nevertheless at the Contractors expense.

19.1.24 LABEL AND IDENTIFICATION OF PIPES

IDENTIFICATION

A. Valves

1. Valve identification to comply with MSSSP-25.


2. Attach a 50mm round brass tag stamped with designating numbers 25mm high
filled in with black enamel to each valve, except those on fixtures.

3. Securely fasten valve tag to valve spindle or handle with a brass chain.

B. Motor Control Identification

1. Mount black lamacoid nameplates on each motor controller identifying primary


control function and individual position indication such as Pump No. 1, etc.
Nameplates to be cut through to white background and have beveled edges.
Mounted with chromium plated acorn head screws

C. Schedule and Charts

1. Furnish to the Architect three (3) complete framed plastic laminated valve tag
schedules. Schedule to indicate tag number, valve location by floor and nearest
column number, valve size and service controlled.

D. Piping Identification and Coding

1. Apply color coded Polyvinyl Chloride pipe bands identifying pipe contents and
direction of flow.

2. On exposed piping, apply bands on 10 meters centers of straight runs, at valve


locations, at point where piping enters and leaves a partition, wall, floor or ceiling.

3. On concealed piping installed above removable ceiling construction, apply bands


in manner described for exposed piping.

4. On concealed piping installed above non-removable ceiling construction, or in


pipe shafts, apply bands at valve or other devices that are made accessible by
means of access doors or panels.

5. Apply bands at exit and entrance points to each vessel, tank or piece of
equipment.

6. Band widths to be 200mm for pipes up to 300mm diameter. Letter heights stating
service to be preprinted on band, 20mm high for 200mm bands.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-19-12/30


PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

7. For insulated pipes, apply bands after insulation and painting work has been
completed.

8. Colors to conform to ASA Standard A13.1. Provide 24 additional bands of each


type for future use by owner's personnel.

9. Follow manufacturer's instructions for application procedures using non-


combustible materials and contact adhesives.

10. Pipe background color coding shall be as follows:


a. Fire standpipe - red
b. Sprinkler - green
c. Domestic Cold Water Piping - blue
d. Domestic Hot Water Piping - yellow

19.1.25 CIVIL WORKS / BUILDERS WORK

The Contractor shall carry out the cutting of holes and making them good where
pipes, conduits, cable and cable trays are passing through the walls, floor and roof
slabs as measured in the Bill of Quantities.

The Contractor shall provide cross-over bridges as shown on the drawings. Bridges
details shall be agreed with the Architect and Engineer.

Two sets of builders work drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for his
approval.

19.2.00 MATERIALS

DOMESTIC HOT AND COLD WATER SERVICES

19.2.01 GENERAL

Hot and Cold water services within the building shall comply with British Standard
code of practice BS 6700: 1987 CP 342 : Part 2 : 1974.

All hot water pipes shall be insulated with manufacturer sleeves and sizes to be same
as the pipe size of PP-R pipes.

All pipe identification, colour coding of flow arrows shall be provided as per ANSI
standards.

All pipe work fittings, valves and other components forming the piping installation
shall be erected such that they can be dismantled and are accessible for repair and
replacement. Where valves and equipment are fitted, unions and flanges shall be
provided as appropriate for the diameter pipe work in order to allow valves and
equipment removal.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-19-13/30


PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

All pipe work shall be erected such that it may be vented and drained satisfactorily.
All low points in the system shall have drain cocks fitted and high points shall have air
bottles or automatic air vents.

All cold and hot water pipes exposed to the sun at roof or inside shafts shall be
insulated with 25mm thick & 64 kg/m3 density fibreglass, weather proof / sun proof
insulation and protective material - aluminium cladding (thickness: 0.85mm).
Contractor to carry out thermal expansion for PP-R pipes subject to temperature
difference.

a. Copper Pipes

All exposed pipe work on roof, basements and inside shafts as well as below ground
piping from the main KAHRAMAA meter valves up to the storage tank shall be
copper pipe to British Standard BS 2871 Part 1 : 1971 Table "X" and all fittings shall
be copper or copper alloy to BS 864 : Part 2 : 1971 and All tube and fittings shall be
stamped with the British Standard kite mark and copper alloy fittings shall carry a CR
mark. The jointing of copper pipe work shall be by means of dezincification resistant
integral solder ring fittings.

b. Polypropylene PP-R Pipe & fittings

All pipes inside the toilets shall be PP-R polypropylene type with authoritys approval
and to be as per standards.

Fittings shall be both welding fittings and metal fittings. All metal inserts shall be in
dezincification resistant brass. Joining between pipes and fittings shall be made by
melting the parts. Locations where pipe is to be connected to equipment, PP-R
fittings with metal insert shall be used.

Polypropylene valves shall be used where available with manufacturers in their


product range. All the components inside the valve in contract with water shall be
dezincification resistant brass. For those valves (type and sizes) which are not
available in the PP-R pipe manufacturer range, shall be made dezincification
resistant brass as described in clause b below.

All components of polypropylene pipe systems shall be suitable for a working


pressure of 6 bars at 70 C for 50 years life expectancy. The whole polypropylene
piping installation including supports shall be carried out strictly in accordance with
manufacturers recommendations. The contractor shall make allowance for
expansion in the pipework. The whole PP-R installation shall be guaranteed for a
period of 5 years.

PIPING SPECIALITIES

A. Water Hammer arresters: Bellows type with stainless steel casing and bellows
pressure rated for 250 PSI tested and certified in accordance with PDI WH 201

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-19-14/30


PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

B. Relief valves: Provide proper size for relief valves in accordance with ASME
Boiler and pressure vessel codes, for indicated capacity of the appliances for
which installed.

19.2.02 INSTALLATION, STORAGE AND PROTECTION

All pipework, fittings and accessories shall be installed strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and due allowance made for thermal movement.

All pipework, fittings and accessories shall be obtained from one manufacturer only,
who shall be nominated by the contractor in writing and approved by the Engineer
prior to ordering any materials. Materials from different manufacturers shall not be
incorporated into the system. All pipework, fittings and accessories shall be stored in
properly ventilated well supported racked storage sheds.

All pipework shall be erected to present a neat and orderly appearance arranged to
or at right-angles to the structural member of the building, giving maximum
headroom and not obstructing window or doorways. Pipes shall bend round piers,
projections and into recesses forming part of the structural works whether so
indicated on the drawings or not. Pipework shall be erected such that there is a
minimum of 50mm clear below to the finished floor level and at least 25 mm clear to
the finished wall face.

All pipework which is to be insulated shall allow space for each pipe to be insulated
around its whole circumference. Adequate clearance shall be provided between
insulated pipework running together and adjacent to walls and floors. Clearances
between insulation and floor and insulation and wall shall be as for bare pipework.

No joints shall be formed in the thickness of walls, floor slabs or roof slabs. No
pipework shall be chased into floor slabs, roof slabs or walls. During the installation
period open ends of pipework shall be capped off using purpose-made plugs or
blank counter flanges. Pipework shall be kept free of dirt and other foreign debris at
all times.

All pipework fittings, valves and other components forming the piping installation
shall be erected such that they can be dismantled and are accessible for repair and
replacement. Where valves and equipment are fitted, unions and flanges shall be
provided as appropriate for the diameter pipework in order to allow valves and
equipment removal.

All pipework shall be erected such that it may be vented and drained satisfactorily.
All low points in the system shall have drain cocks fitted and high points shall have
air bottles or automatic air vents.

19.2.03 PIPE SUPPORTS, BRACKETS AND HANGERS

All pipework shall be adequately supported in such a manner as to permit free


movement due to expansion, contractions, vibration or other changes in the system.
Supports shall be arranged as near as possible to joints and changes of direction.
Spacing of supports shall comply with Table 13 contained in British Standard BS
5572 : 1978. Vertical rising pipes particularly in shafts shall be adequately supported

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-19-15/30


PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

at the base to withstand the total weight of the riser. Under no circumstances shall
branches from vertical rising pipes be the means of support for the vertical pipework.

Pipework up to and including 65 mm diameter shall be supported clear of the


structure with cast brass brackets. Where exposed to view, bright finish brass
hospital brackets shall be used with brawl plugs and brass screws.

All multi runs of pipework within false ceilings or service shafts shall be supported on
purpose designed proprietary brackets suitable for carrying more than one pipe run,
and shall be secured using expanding plugs or other purpose designed fixing
devices. Softwood plugs shall not be allowed. All purpose designed proprietary
brackets shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to ordering.

All Steel hangers and supporting brackets shall be painted with one coat of red oxide
and one coat of Galvanizing paint. The spacing of supports where not specified
must not exceed the spacing given in the following schedules. Where one support
carries more than one pipe diameter the spacing shall be that specified for the
smallest diameter.

Maximum Spacing of Supports (Copper pipes)

Nominal Size Support Spacing


of Pipes Vertical Pipes Horizontal Pipes

159 mm 4.2 m 3.6 m


133 mm 3.6 m 3.0 m
108 mm 3.6 m 3.0 m
76 mm 3.6 m 3.0 m
67 mm 3.0m 2.7 m
54 mm 3.0 m 2.7 m
42 mm 3.0 m 2.4 m
35 mm 3.0 m 2.4 m
28 mm 2.4 m 1.8 m
22 mm 2.4 m 1.8 m
15 mm 1.8 m 1.2 m

Maximum Spacing of Supports (Polyethylene and polypropylene)

Nominal Size Support Spacing


of Pipes Vertical Pipes Horizontal Pipes

110 mm 1.4 m 0.70 m


90 mm 1.2 m 0.70 m
75 mm 1.1 m 0.60 m
63 mm 1.1 m 0.55 m
50 mm 0.9 m 0.55 m
40 mm 0.9 m 0.45 m
32 mm 0.8 m 0.40 m
25 mm 0.8 m 0.40 m
20 mm 0.8 m 0.40 m

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-19-16/30


PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

19.2.04 PIPE SLEEVES

Pipe sleeves shall be supplied where pipework passes through walls, floors, footings
and waterproofed membranes. Sleeves shall be built in the correct locations at the
time required by the main contractor. The inside diameter of all sleeves shall not be
less than 15 mm larger than the outside diameter of the pipe passing through.
Where pipes pass through buried walls or footings, sleeves shall be 25 mm larger
than the outside diameter of the pipe passing through. The space between the pipe
sleeve shall be neatly packed using asbestos string or rope to prevent the passage
of noise, vermin or smoke . Sleeves shall not protrude beyond the finished surface.
Where pipework is exposed to view and passes through wall or floor, chromium
plated copper pipe flanges of the correct pipe diameter shall be fitted.

19.2.05 VALVES AND STOP COCKS

All valves and stopcocks shall comply with the regulations of the Ministry of
Electricity and Water, Water Department and shall be dezincification resistant.
Valves shall be provided as shown on the drawings and detailed below or similar and
approved. All valves shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval and approval
obtained in writing prior to ordering.

All valves shall be fitted in readily accessible positions. They shall be of even
thickness throughout, clean and smooth from scale. All stuffing boxes shall be
packed with material specially selected and recommended by the manufacturer for
the particular service in which each valve is used.

Non-return valves shall be screwed BSPT or flange BS 4504 : Part 2 in accordance


with the valve schedule in this specification. All non-return valves shall be suitable
for both vertical and horizontal mounting and shall be fitted in readily accessible
positions.

1. Gate Valves/Servicing valves shall be used for isolation purpose in the service
pipelines. Valves shall be of the same nominal bore as the pipeline in which they
are installed. Gate valve/Servicing valves shall be of bronze construction with
threaded/flanged ends. The bronze valves shall conform to BS5154. Gate valves
shall have screwed ends & bonnet pattern. The valves shall be pressure rated for
16bar & have a BSI kite mark for quality assurance.

2. Check/Non return valves shall be used wherever required to stop the back flow
i.e. as a back flow preventer. Check valves up to 50mm diameter shall be
threaded bronze pattern, spring loaded type with bronze body and PTFE seats
and positive leak tight seals and can be installed in any mounting position
(vertically & horizontally. 65mm diameter and above shall be with flanged end
connections. The bronze NRVs shall conform to BS5154. The valve shall be
pressure rated for 16bar & have a BSI kite mark for quality assurance. All valves
shall be located so as to provide easy access for operation and servicing.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-19-17/30


PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

VALVE CONSTRUCTION/APPLICATION SCHEDULE

Valve Type Pipe Size Press. Rate Bonnet/Stem Material/ Body


Steam/WOG Assembly (Class)
/Style
Gate 65 mm (2-1/2") & 125#/200# UB/RS AB/IPS or SE293
Smaller UB/NRS AB/IPS or SE291
Gate 76 mm (3") 125#/200# FL/NRS IBBM/FL 415
& Larger
Ball 65 mm (2-1/2") & 150#/600# Chrome Ball AB/IPS or SE
76 mm (3") Rings 3-piece
Check (Silent) All 150#/300# Spring IBBM/BOLT

AB = All Bronze
IBBM = Iron Body Bronze Mount
RS = Rising Stem
NRS = Non-Rising Stem
UB = Union Bonnet
ISB = Inside Screw
SOB = Screw Over Bonnet
OS&Y = Outside Screw and Yoke
ISP = Iron Pipe Size
FL = Flanged
SE = Soldered Ends

19.2.06 STRAINERS AND DRAIN COCKS

All strainers shall be fitted in a readily accessible position and adequate access shall
be allowed for maintenance and cleaning of strainer basket. All strainers shall be
manufactured by specialists and have a stainless steel 80 mesh screen basket.

All drain cocks shall be of the same manufacture and be in accordance with BS
2879. Generally drain cocks shall be provided at all low points in the system and
other points where necessary and as directed by the Engineer.

19.2.07 FLOAT BALL VALVES

Float ball valves on the mains shall be of equilibrium type, full bore, 6 bar
medium/high pressure to BS 1212 Part 1. Float ball valves shall be of delayed action
type if specified or shown on drawings. The fixing components and members for
delayed action ball valves shall be stainless steel.

19.2.08 TRENCH EXCAVATION

Excavation work shall be executed in whatever ground conditions that may be


encountered to the line and levels as detailed on the drawings.

The contractor shall be responsible for the stability of all excavations and any claim
arising from accident or damage to the public, adjoining property or labour on site.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-19-18/30


PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

The contractor shall provide all necessary steel sheeting, timber supports, strutting
and shoring to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer. Any slip or fall shall be
immediately made good by the contractor at his own expense and the contractor
shall take sole responsibility for any claim for damages arising out of inadequate
support of excavations.

All excavation shall be maintained dry and free from water. To achieve this, the
contractor shall, without additional charge, provide all necessary pumping
equipment, sumps, drains and soakaways. The contractor shall also be responsible
for operating, running and maintaining all equipment at all times to ensure
excavations are free from water.

All obstructions shall be broken out and voids and soft spots filled with concrete
grade 15 or as otherwise instructed by the Engineer at the Contractor's expense.

Granular Bedding

Pipework shall be laid on a granular bed with a minimum cover above the crown of
the pipe as follows:

1. Pipe lines 600 mm cover when there is no traffic on the ground above the
pipeline.

2. Pipe lines 1000 mm cover when there is traffic on the ground above the pipe line.

The granular bedding shall comprise grave, stone chippings or crushed stone to
pass 12 mm sieve and be retained on a 5 mm sieve mixed with free draining course
sand, in the ratio of two parts crushed stone or gravel to every one part of sand.
Bedding material shall not contain more than 0.3% sulphate nor shall it be obtained
from locations where 0.1 % sulphate is present in the ground water.

Bedding shall be laid 150 mm deep along the length of the trench and compacted
prior to work commencing on the pipe laying. After pipe laying, inspection and
testing, a further 300 mm of bedding material shall be compacted by hand above the
uppermost crown of the pipe line along its entire length. The bedding material shall
span the entire width of the trench and shall be laid in not more than 150 mm deep
layers, each layer being compacted by hand.

Laying of Pipelines and Fittings

All underground pipelines shall be laid to true levels in straight lines to even
gradients shown on the drawings. Pipeline laying shall not commence until the
Engineer has inspected and approved the granular bed and trench.

Care shall be taken when laying pipes that no bedding material or building debris is
pushed into the barrel of the pipe of fitting.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-19-19/30


PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

Backfilling Excavations

After compaction of granular bed and surround, the trench shall be backfilled using
selected excavated material free from all rocks, large hard objects and builders
debris of greater than 40 mm. Backfilling shall take place immediately after the
specified operations preceding it have been completed and shall be in layers of 150
mm, each fully compacted over the full width of the trench. Power rammers and
vibrators shall be used compact backfilling when the cover over the crown of the pipe
exceeds 0.5 meters.

19.2.09 UNDER GROUND COLD WATER SERVICES

Underground cold water services shall comply with British Standard Code of Practice
CP 310 : 1965, CP 2010 : Part 1 : 1966 and CP 2010 : Part 3 : 1972.

All pipework up to and including 67 mm diameter shall be copper tube to BS 2871 :


PART 1 : 1971 TABLE "Y". The tubes entire length shall be coated with a
continuous, seamless, polyethylene sheathing which shall be green in colour to
British Standard BS 1710 : 1975. All fittings shall be to British Standard BS 864 :
Part 2 : 1971 Type 'B'.

19.2.10 PIPEWORK INSULATIONS

All thermal insulation shall comply with British Standard BS 5970:1981 and BS
5442:1989.

All domestic hot and cold water pipes which are exposed to sun shall be insulated
and aluminium cladded.

Thermal insulation to pipework shall be carried out by specialists and strictly in


accordance with this specification. No thermal insulation shall be applied to pipework
prior to pressure testing and inspection by the Engineer giving clear instructions for
further insulation applied. In order that tests may be made of the thickness of
insulation to be applied to each pipe size, plant and equipment, the contractor shall
allow for the cost of cutting away one section for each size of pipe, plant and
equipment for inspection by the Engineer. If the insulation proves to be of the
thickness specified, then the cut section shall be made good and the whole
installation completed. Should any cut section show a deficiency of thickness,
further sections shall be cut at the direction of the Engineer for inspections.

If a deficiency of thickness or any other defects are found, the contractor shall
remove the whole of the insulation installed or as the Engineer directs and then shall
supply, deliver and apply new insulation complying with the specification and restore
it to the satisfaction of the Engineer. This work shall be carried out at the
contractor's own expense.

Thermal insulation shall be applied to all valves, strainers, non-return valves, drain
cocks, automatic air vents and bosses for gauges/test points. Insulation of these
components in the pipework system up to and including 65 mm diameter pipework
shall be carried out using sectional insulation cut to suit and of the same size as the
line pipework.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-19-20/30


PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

No insulation shall be concealed within false ceilings or vertical and horizontal builder
works shafts prior to inspection and approval by the Engineer.

Thermal insulation shall be 25 mm thick with a density of 64 kg/m2 rigid fiberglass


sections as set down in British Standard Specification BS 5422 : 1977. The sections
shall be covered with flameproof calico lapped and pasted down using approved
adhesive and secured using aluminium bands at 1.2 m centres.

All piping, branching off to fixtures chased in the floors or wells shall be insulated
with 10 mm thick flexible fiberglass insulation covered with plastic tape applied
spirally.

Where exposed to view, the insulation shall be painted with two coats primer and
one finishing coat rubberized paint to an approved colour prior to the fixing of
aluminium bands at 1.2 m centres. The finishing colour shall be to British Standard
BS 1710: 1975, identification of pipelines complete with direction arrows.

19.2.11 COLD WATER STORAGE TANKS

Cold water storage tanks shall be manufactured to British Standards and comply
strictly with the Water Department's Regulations of the State of Qatar. The following
tank may be used:

a. Roof Tanks

GRP sectional water tank complete with bolted inspection cover and with gunmetal
pipe connections pre-moulded in position. The tanks shall be suitable for ultra violet
light and comply with the National Water Council of the United Kingdom.

The tanks shall be provided to the capacities, dimensions and locations shown on
the drawing. Each tank is to be fixed on a base, which supports the whole of the
tank. The details of the tank base are to be approved by the Consultant before any
installation work begins.

The tank shall have the following additional components in addition to the
components listed above:

Low level electric float switches interlocked to their pressure pumps.


External ladder of GRP or aluminium, supplied by the Tank manufacturer.
Internal ladder of Fibre Glass or aluminium supplied by the Tank
manufacturer.
Vent with wire mesh
External graduated water level indicator
Channel base, of galvanized steel
Interconnecting pipes with valves
Overflow and drain connection
Access cover

The Contractor shall supply and assemble at Site sectional water tank of hot pressed
moulded GRP insulated panels (Rigid PU Foam) (Glass Reinforced Plastic) of ivory

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-19-21/30


PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

grey colour provide with lockable Manhole covers air vent with overflow and all piping
connections. The panels shall comply with BS 7491: part 3: 1994 and shall have
convex shape to assist a complete draining of water of the following characteristics:

a. Specific gravity of 1.8


b. Tensile strength of not less than 850 kg/cm
c. Flexural strength of 1800 kg/cm to ISO 178
d. Impact strength of 80 kg/cm ISO 179
e. Thermal expansion of 2.1 x 10-5 deg. C to ATM D 696
f. Thermal conductivity of 0.6 W/ m C to BS 7491 : part 3
g. Water absorption less than 0.2 % to ISO 62.
h. Glass content more than more than 30 %
i. No light transmission.
j. Gasket of synthetic
k. Bolts and nuts of stainless steel 316 / A4
l. Frame angles and frame plates of hot dipped galvanized steel
m. External ladder of hot dipped galvanized steel
n. Internal ladder of GRP or S.S according to Manufacturers standards.
o. Tie rods of stainless steel
p. G.R.P panel thick not less than 8 mm
q. Resin cover of 2 mm
r. Glass tube level indicator for all compartments

Guarantee letter from the manufacturer for 10 years should be obtained.

Tank shall be protected from direct sunlight and cover to be made to architect
approval.

b. Reinforced concrete storage tanks

The following design criteria shall be observed during construction:

1. There shall be one access opening to be positioned to have easy access to


the float valve.
2. GRP ladder shall be provided for access to the tank.
3. Vent pipe with insect guard shall be provided.
4. Water level controls (low level electric float switches interlocked) for pumps
shall be provided.
5. In case of overflow, warning system shall be provided either by level switch or
by other approved means.
6. Isolating stop-valves shall be provided in the supply and delivery lines
7. Approved non-toxic epoxy coating, resisting fungus growth shall be used on
all internal surfaces.
8. Approved tanking membrane for water tightness shall be used on external
surfaces.

The tanks shall be provided to the capacities, dimensions and locations shown on
the drawing.

Also, refer to structural drawings for U/G tanks

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-19-22/30


PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

19.2.12 HOT WATER SERVICE HEATERS

Individual Water Heater

Water heater shall be thermal - electric, individual constructed from heavy gauge
high carbon steel tank with allaying at 2cm CFC free compact foam insulation and to
be glass-lined. Insulation between inner and outer container shall be of CFC free,
flame retardant pure-foam of minimum 30 mm thickness, according to ISO
standard 3582. Internal surface to be glass lined.

The water heater shall be of pressurized type, horizontal or vertical type above false
ceiling, suitable for a working pressure of 8 bar and tested for 16 bar.

The heating element constructed to BS 3456 shall be from zinc-plated, copper


sheathed resistance wire, embedded conifer rod type immersion type protected
against stress cracking and pitting corrosion complete with thermostat of 20 Amps.
minimum rating and an additional safety temperature limiter for protecting the water
heater against overheating with 2 years warranty. The heating element shall be
brazed on to a screw - on immersion type apparatus plate.

The loading of water heaters shall be 1.0 kW for capacities of 30 litres, 1.5 kW each
for capacities of 50 litres and 2 kW for capacities for 80 litres - 240v, 50 Hz. single-
phase supply. The Water heater shall be complete with pressure relief valve (preset
according to allowed working pressure), non-return valve and temperature gauge.

- Glass lined heaters of approval make can be accepted as alternative.

19.2.13 WATER FILTERS

A packaged multimedia filtration system consists of (duty) filter shall be supplied for
turbidity odour and smell removal as shown in the tender drawing.

Tanks shall be of electric welded pressure vessel quality low carbon steel
construction rated for 100 psig, working pressure and hydrostatically tested at 50%
in excess of the working pressure.

Access opening for tank shall be provided. Support for tanks shall be structural steel
strap legs welded to lower tank head or adjustable jacklegs.

Tank shall be sandblasted internally to white metal, and then coated with 8-10 mils
DFT epoxy polyamide. The exterior surface shall be cleaned and coated with 2-3
mils DFT rust resistant primer.

Upper distribution system shall be of the baffle type to evenly distribute the water
over the entire tank area.

Lower distribution system shall be of a proven design constructed with individual fine
slotted non-clogging polyethylene strainers arranged for even flow distribution
through the resin bed.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-19-23/30


PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

The main operating valve shall be an industrial Automatic Multiport diaphragm type,
slow opening and closing, free of water hammer. The diaphragm assembly shall be
fully guided on its perimeter when pressure actuated from one position to another to
assure a smooth reliable shut-off without sticking. There shall be no contract of
dissimilar metals within the valve and no special tools shall be required to service the
valve.

The manufacturer of the equipment shall manufacture the main operating valve.
Single units shall have an internal automatic by-pass of untreated water during
regeneration. Valve shall have a treated water sampling cock.

An automatic flow controller shall be provided to maintain proper backwash and flush
rates over wide variations in operating pressures and require not field adjustment.
A factory-mounted and wired cycle controller shall incorporate an adjustable time
switch with multiport pilot valve to control all steps of automatic regeneration.
Provision for push-button initiated regeneration shall be included.

An electrical signalling device shall initiate regeneration with 240V / 1 ph / 50 Hz


power supply.

All filter media shall be of good quality possessing characteristics of durability, long
life and resistance to attribution and shall not impart taste, odour or colour to the
water being treated. Filter media shall be selected for removing particulates down to
10-micron size.

The filtration unit shall be supplied to remove suspended matters, de-chlorination


and organic removal and odour removal.

The granular media (multi-layered) shall consist of three distinct filter layers in
addition to a support layer. Each layer shall be of selected density and particle size
to stratify in the same order following a backwash. The filters layers shall be
stratified with the coarsest layer at the top and the finest layer at the bottom. Particle
retention shall be 10 micron or larger.

19.2.14 COLD WATER PUMP SETS

a. COLD WATER LIFTING PUMP SET

The cold-water lifting pump set shall be factory assembled set and shall be of the
multi stage vertical or horizontal type for the duty/standby stated on the drawings and
shall comprise duplicate pumps one run & one standby.

Each pump shall be direct run with drip-proof electric motors. Each pump shall be
provided with isolating valves on each inlet and outlet, together with a strainer on
each suction line and non-return valve fitted on each delivery line. One number
membrane tank of fabricated steel construction housing a removable butyl rubber
bag complete with lock shield gate valve shall be incorporated. 2 Nos. pressure
switch and 2 nos. pressure gauges shall be installed in pipe work.

Automatic control of the pressure set shall be by means of high/low level float
switches located in the high-level storage tanks and pressure switches. The pressure

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-19-24/30


PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

switches shall be arranged to start the pressure set to refill the high-level cold-water
storage tank.

A low-level float switch shall be incorporated in the basement level cold-water storage
tank and arranged such that it prevents the pump set operating in the event of no
water. Provision shall also be made within the controls for a duty pump selector
switch. This selector switch shall allow duty pump No. 1 and duty pump NO.2 to be
changed over.

Pump casings shall be manufactured from high-density cast iron to BS 1452 with
stainless steel shafts to BS 970 and high-grade gunmetal or stainless steel impellers
to BS 1400. Pump motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled, drip-proof squirrel
cage, conforming to British Standards and shall be suitable for continuous operation
in temperatures of 50 deg. C. Motor speed shall not exceed 2990 rpm and shall be
suitable for running in ambient temperatures of 50 deg. C.

The electrical control panel cubicle shall be manufactured from mild steel sheet,
finished in stove enamelled hammer finish and fitted with all motor starter, fuse gear,
door isolator, selector switches, indicator lights and all relays, timers, ELCB, Alarm,
loud-off auto etc. to provide sequence control.

The water transfer pump set shall be a completely packaged factory assembled and
tested unit, complete with all major components, instruments, safety devices, stop-
valves and prewired control panels and all connection pipes and fitting shall be
copper.

The schedules of equipment in the tender drawings are tentative and are intended as
a guide and therefore its is the contractors responsibility to crosscheck the hydraulic
head in conjunction with the equipment being offered and submit the same for
Engineers approval.

b. COLD WATER BOOSTER PUMP SETS

The cold-water pressure pump set shall be factory assembled set and shall be of the
multi stage vertical or horizontal VFD type for the duty/standby stated on the
drawings and shall comprise duplicate pumps, one run and one standby.

Each pump shall be direct run with drip-proof electric motors. Each pump shall be
provided with isolating valves on each inlet and outlet, together with a strainer on
each suction line and non-return valve fitted on each delivery line. One number
membrane tank of fabricated steel construction housing a removable butyl rubber
bag complete with lock shield gate valve shall be incorporated. 2 Nos. pressure
switch and 2 nos. pressure gauges shall be installed in pipe work.

Automatic control of the pressure set shall be by means of pressure switches. The
pressure switches shall be arranged to the primary water at the desired pressure.

A low level float switch shall be incorporated in the cold water storage tanks and
arranged such that it prevents the pump set operating in the event of no water.
Provision shall also be made within the controls for a duty pump selector switch. This
selector switch shall allow duty pump No. 1 and duty pump NO. 2 to be changed
over. Pump casings shall be manufactured from high-density cast iron to BS 1452

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-19-25/30


PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

with stainless steel shafts to BS 970 and high-grade gunmetal or stainless steel
impellers to BS 1400. Pump motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled, drip-proof
squirrel cage, conforming to British Standards and shall be suitable for continuous
operation in temperatures of 50 deg. C. Motor speed shall not exceed 2990 rpm and
shall be suitable for running in ambient temperatures of 50 deg. C.

The electrical control panel cubicle shall be manufactured from mild steel sheet,
finished in stove enamelled hammer finish and fitted with all motor starter, fuse gear,
door isolator, selector switches, indicator lights and all relays, timers, ELCB, Alarm,
etc. to provide sequence control.

19.2.15 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE

Wherever is required even not shown on the tender drawing, it is the contractors
responsibility to provide the system - a pressure reducing valve(s) if the distribution
system available pressure is above in relation to the fixture pressure requirement
being offered.

This is to prevent damaged and leaks that may cause and fault that may arise due
to over pressure since note that location of fixtures are installed in different levels
throughout the building. Maximum operating pressure should be 45 psi.

19.2.16 SWIMMING POOL

The Contractor shall supply and install all equipment and pipes, valves, electrical
connections and all the related works to the swimming pool including testing and
commissioning for the complete equipment/ systems as shown on the tender
drawings.
Swimming pool equipment / systems

Filtration System
Circulating Pumps
Pool Accessories
Over Flow Grating System
Under Water Lights
Chemical Treatments
Heat pumps
Control Panel
Balancing Tanks

19.2.17 STERILIZATION OF WATER SERVICES

All pipework, fittings and storage tanks shall be sterilized starting with the external
water supplies, storage tanks and finally the water distribution system.

No sterilization shall be carried out until the system has been flushed out and
approval received in writing from the Engineer to commence sterilization.

Sterilization shall be carried out by a specialized contractor competent to do the job


and have tested and approved by government authority.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-19-26/30


PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

The following procedure shall be adopted for sterilization of the water distribution
systems:

a. Flush out all tanks, pipe works, etc.

b. Recharge all water systems adding sufficient sterilization chemical to a


concentration of 1-2 parts per million. The concentration shall be confirmed by
using a measuring instrument approved by the water department.

c. Starting with the draw-off point nearest the cold water storage tank, each draw-
off point shall be opened until chlorine odour is present at each draw-off.

d. When all draw-off points have discharged chlorinated water, the cold water
storage tanks shall be recharged adding sufficient sterilization chemical to give
the correct concentration of 1-2 parts per million of chlorine. The system shall
then remain charged for a minimum period of one hour.

e. The water shall then be chemically analyzed. Should no residual chlorine be


found, the test shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained.

f. Drain down all storage tanks and pipework, flushing out tank and pipework, and
run the system clean prior to retesting of the water to ensure no residual chlorine
is present.

g. Finally a sample of tank water shall be taken to the Water Department for testing.
The results of these tests shall be forwarded to the Engineer for his approval.

19.2.18 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

General Setting Out of Work and Commissioning

The contractor having ensured that water, electricity and other necessary supplies
are available, shall set to work the completed works or part thereof, at the instruction
of the Consultant and make the necessary adjustments to ensure correct
functioning.

After the installation or part thereof has been set to work and adjusted, the contractor
shall demonstrate its operation, at a time selected by and to the satisfaction of the
Consultant. Test shall be in accordance with British Standard Code of Practice BS
6700 : 1997.

The test shall demonstrate:

a. That equipment provided complies with the specification in all particulars and is
of adequate capacity for its full rates of duty.

b. That all items of plant and equipment operate sufficiently quietly to meet the
specified requirements.

c. That all instruments, protection and control devices, etc., are correctly calibrated
and accurate.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-19-27/30


PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

d. That all water systems are properly balanced, vented, and operates satisfactorily
under test pressure.

The details of method of carrying out the recording of tests shall be agreed with the
Consultant. The Client's representative and the consultant shall be at liberty to be
present at test and to participate in the tests. This shall not relieve the contractor of
his responsibilities for carrying out the tests satisfactorily.

The contractor shall make all the records during the tests and on completion thereof,
shall provide the Consultant with a test report and record both in triplicate.

The contractor shall also provide all test instruments, together with skilled
supervision and adequate labour for carrying out the tests.

Pipe Work Pressure Testing

All pipework services shall be subjected to a test of 500 kN/m2 or one and half times
working pressure whichever is the greater, for not less than 24 hours.

Where pipework is tested in sections, all valves shall be blanked off temporarily
using plugs or blank flanges. The valve wedge shall not be used to retain the water.

The pipe work services shall be charged with water allowing all air to escape and
avoiding shock or water hammer. The test pressure gauge shall be mounted within
the pipework system with a loop and cock and shall be calibrated such that the test
pressure falls above its mid-range.

The contractor shall carry out his own test first to ensure there are no leaks prior to
requesting the Consultant to witness the test. The witnessed test shall be
maintained for a minimum of 4 hour without measurable loss and without further
pumping.
Pipework main laid in ground shall be tested for 24 hours and leakage shall be
measured by the quantity of water pumped into the main under test. Leakage shall
not exceed five litres per 25 mm of pipe diameter per 1750 meter length of pipe for
33 meters head pressure in a period of 24 hours.

The Consultant shall witness all pipework tests. The contractor shall give the
Consultant a minimum of 24 hours notice of all tests. The contractor shall also
provide test sheets set out in an agreed manner of each pipework section to be
tested

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-19-28/30


PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

19.2.19 SCHEDULE OF APPROVED MANUFACTURES

ITEM MANUFACTURER COUNTRY OF ORIGIN

1. Copper Pipes and fittings YORKSHIRE UK


WEDNESBURY UK
MUELLER UK
CONEX UK

2. Poly propylene pipes & fittings AQUATHERM GERMANY


(PPR) WEFATHERM GERMANY
BAENNINGER GERMANY
KOPEX UK
POLOECOSAN GERMANY

3. Valves PEGLER UK
CONEX UK
CRANE UK
HATTERSLY UK/ CHINA
ECONONOSTO NETHERLAND

4. Electric Water Heater ECOTHERM EUROPE


SOLAHART AUSTRALIA
RYCROFT UK

5. Water Pumps WILLO GERMANY


SPP UK
EBARA ITALY
LOWARA ITALY
GRUNDFOSS EUROPE
CRANE USA
ARMSTRONG CANDA/ UK

6. Pressure Reducing Valves CRANE UK


GRINNELL USA
ZURN USA USA
HATTERSLY UK/ CHINA

7. Thermal Insulation KIMMCO KUWAIT


IZO CAM TURKEY
ARABIAN FIBREGLASS KSA
(AFICO)

8. GRP Tanks SAMSUNG-MCD KOREA


SEKI SUI JAPAN
MITSUBISHI THILAND/MALAYSIA
FTC UAE

8. Hangers and supports GRINELL USA


WEICCO INDIA
MUPRO GERMANY
PHD COLOMBIA

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-19-29/30


PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

9. Water filters CULLIGAN USA


AQUA SWA NETHERLANDS
INNOVA ITALY
AQUA MACK CANADA

10. Water Hammer Arrestor SMITH USA


ZURN USA
MILLER USA

11. Swimming Pool PENTAIR USA


HYWARD USA
ASTRAL SPAIN

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-19-30/30


PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

19.3.00 IRRIGATION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

The purpose of this project is to supply, install and commission an automated


irrigation system with all related components for the Fox Hills Residential Building at
Lusail Fox Hills District, Qatar consisting of field AC electric control valves, control
wires, filter, integrated dripper lines, drippers, flush valves, and central control system

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

The scope of work shall be read in conjunction with the contract material
specifications, contract drawings and installation details and it includes but not limited
to the following:

A. The contractor shall prepare the shop drawings showing but not limited to The
Main line, Laterals, solenoid valves, control wires route and numbers, Irrigation
Controllers, integrated dripper lines, on line drippers, Bubblers and flush valves.

B. The contractor shall submit for client approval the technical information and
samples of the material he intends to use which should be in accordance with the
material specifications of this project.

C. The contractor shall commission the irrigation system upon completing the work
and then shall be handed over.

D. The contractor and upon completing the work shall provide the client with four
original sets of As-Built drawings accurately reflecting the executed works and
installation details.

E. The contractor shall upon completing the works provide the client with detailed
Operation and Maintenance Manuals (With applicable Arabic translations) in four
originals. The manuals shall include but not limited to; complete and marked
literature of all products used on the project and its reordering part numbers. It
shall also include a list of the recommended spare parts for a period of 5 years. It
shall include original print of the As Built drawings.

F. The client prior to issuing the Project Handing Over Certificate shall approve the
As-Built Drawings and the Operation & maintenance Manual.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of irrigation


equipment, central control systems, pumps and fittings whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-27/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

B. Installers: Firms regularly engaged in the installation of irrigation works of a


similar quality and scope as this project for at least 5 years.

1.04 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS

ISO R 161 Confirming to German Standards Din 8061 & 19532

BS: CP312 - Code of Practice for Plastics Pipe work (Thermoplastic Materials) of a
uPVC Pipe work and Fittings

BS: 1780 - Specification for bourdon tube pressure and vacuum gauges.

BS: 3505 - Specification for uPVC pressure pipes for cold potable water.

BS: 4346 - Joints and fittings for use with uPVC pressure pipes.

BS: 5150 - Specification for cast iron wedge and double disk gate valves for
general purposes.

BS: 5154 - Specification for copper alloy globe, globe stop and check, check and
gate valves for general purposes

BS: 8010 - Code of practice for pipelines.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings - The contractor to prepare the project shop drawings in 6 sets
which to be approved by the client representative prior to commencing installation
work. The shop drawings shall show but not limited to valves, control wires route
and numbers and controllers location

B. Products The contractor shall submit for client approval prior to commencing
installation works; the products he intends to use with all technical details and
literature in accordance with the specifications below.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals-The contractor shall submit 6 sets of the


detailed Operation & Maintenance Manual with equipment reordering codes and
literature.

D. As-Built Drawings- The contractor shall submit 6 sets of the complete project as-
built drawings reflecting the actual site installation.

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-28/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. All primary distribution pipe work shall be Un plasticized Polyvinyl Chloride


(uPVC) to Class 5

B. All primary distribution pipe fittings shall be solvent welded uPVC 16 bar

C. As an alternative to the Specifications in items A&B, uPVC pipe work confirming


to BS 3505 Class E and fittings to BS 4346 of equivalent pressure rating may be
used.

D. Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride Pipes:

1. All uPVC pipes shall be manufactured in Qatar or equal local manufacturer


approved by the client and consultant. They shall be Class E (16 Bar) / Class
D (10 Bar) as per BOQ and confirm to ISO 4422. Pipes up to 90 MM nominal
diameter shall have solvent welded joints and pipes of 110 mm and above
diameter shall have rubber ring sealing pipes.
2. Pipes may be supplied in random lengths no length smaller than six meters.
Each pipe shall legibly and indelibly marked with manufacturing standard, the
manufactures name, date of manufacture, nominal bore and working pressure
/ class. Pipe shall be smooth finished inside and outside and shall show no
evidence of blisters, grooves or other extrusion marks. The contractor shall
provide three samples of all size pipes of one meter in length for approval
prior to installation of any plastic pipe.
3. On no account shall uPVC saddle type connection to be made for solenoid
valve assembly.
4. The Engineer shall select samples during the course of the works from each
size of pipe for testing by an independent authority to ensure strict
compliance with the ISO Specification. All cots of packing, shipping, testing,
reporting and the like for all such test shall be deemed to be included in the
tender price.

E. Fittings

1. All uPVC fittings shall be ISO/DIN Specification and have a minimum rating of
16 kg/cm2 at 20 degree C Fittings shall be suitable for use with the above
specified pipes. Where uPVC flanges are required these shall be drilled to
NP16 as detailed in BS 7622 and BS 4772. All fittings above 160 mm shall be
fusion bonded epoxy coated ductile iron or cast flanged GRP. The Contractor
shall use only fittings that are approved by the Engineer. All nuts and bolts
shall be 316 stainless steel.

F. uPVC Cement Thinner and Tape

1. uPVC cement and thinner shall be of the type approved by the Engineer. All
cans of solvent and primer shall have labels intact and shall be stamped with the
date of manufacture and shelf life. No cans with an expired shelf life will be
permitted. Joints compound for threaded connections shall be PTFE tape or
approved equal thread sealant.

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-29/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

G. Underground Warning Tape

1. Marking tape shall be laminated polyethylene and aluminum foil construction


capable of detection by low output generator equipment.
2. Tapes shall remain legible and colour fast in all soil conditions at pH values of
2.5 to 11.0 inclusive.
3. Warning tape for irrigation pipe lines shall be yellow / orange in color as
approved by engineer.
4. Tape shall not less than 150 mm wide and shall have the phrase

IRRIGATION PRESSURE MAIN or

CAUTION IRRIGATION PIPE LINE AND CONTROL CABLES

in English and Arabic stamped in black letters and repeated at maximum intervals
of two meters.

H. Flexible Piping for on line drippers:

1. Flexible Pipes for irrigation on line drippers shall be in the required sizes as
shown on the drawings and B.O.Q extruded from linear low density
polyethylene version raw material. Pipes shall be resistant to algae and
ultraviolet deterioration with Carbon Black content not less than 2.25 %.

2.02 APPLICATION DEVICES

SPRAY POP-UP SPRINKLER

The sprinkler shall be equipped with an adjustable arc (1-360 ) nozzle discharging
4.3 gpm, for the full circle and it shall be available in sizes to cover up to a radius of
17 feet at a pressure of 25 psi.

The sprinkler nozzle shall automatically adjust the flow depending on the arc setting
in order to have a matched precipitation rate. It shall be an integral part of the riser
assembly that can not be removed, and has the ability to open fully to allow flushing.
It shall have grooves on the inner surface to allow dirt to go out of the nozzle easily.

The sprinkler shall have radius reduction capability by means of a stainless steel, arc
and radius adjustment screw. It shall also be possible to adjust arc and radius from
the top of the riser assembly, using an adjustment key. This adjustment shall be
possible in all the phases of installation (before and after installation, while static and
while operating).

The sprinkler shall have an inlet screen of length not less than 100 mm. It shall have
30 mm exposed diameter after installation. The body and riser of the sprinkler shall
be constructed of non-corrodible, heavy duty A.B.S The sprinkler shall accept a drain
check valve, installed in the field from in the base of the riser to prevent drainage.

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-30/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

The sprinkler shall carry a one-year, exchange warranty (not prorated).

ROTOR POP-UP SPRINKLER (8 12m radius)

The sprinkler shall be of the gear-driven, closed case rotary type, capable of
covering a 14 (meter) radius at 50 PSI with a discharge rate of 5.5 GPM. The
sprinkler shall have a patent gear drive reversing mechanism.

The sprinkler shall be available with eight standard nozzles discharging from 0.9 to
8.2 GPM or four low-angle nozzles discharging from 1.6 to 4.7 GPM.

The sprinkler shall have radius adjustment capabilities by means of a stainless-steel


nozzle retainer/radius adjustment screw. It shall be available in both full-circle and
adjustable part-circle configurations. The adjustable part circle unit shall be minutely
adjustable from 40 to 360. The adjustable unit shall be adjustable in all phases of
installation i.e., before installation, after installation while static, and after installation
while in operation.

The sprinkler shall have a FloStop feature that will enable the user to stop the
water flow through an individual sprinkler head. The sprinkler shall have a constant
rotation speed irrespective of the nozzle installed. It shall have a minimum of 4-inch
(100-mm) pop-up stroke to bring the rotating nozzle turret into a clean environment.

The sprinkler shall have a thick rubber cover firmly attached to the top of the
sprinkler riser. It shall be equipped with a drain check valve to prevent low head
drainage, and be capable of checking up to 10 feet (3, 0 m) in elevation change.

It shall have an exposed surface diameter after installation at least 40 mm.

The sprinkler shall have an overall height of 19 cm. The sprinkler shall have a 3/4-
inch Female National Pipe Thread (FNPT) inlet. The sprinkler shall be serviceable
after installation in the field by unscrewing the body cap, removing the riser
assembly, and extracting the inlet filter screen.

The body of the sprinkler shall be constructed of non-corrodible, heavy-duty A.B.S. It


shall have a stainless steel spring for positive retraction of the riser when irrigation is
complete. The sprinkler shall have a stainless steel riser and shall carry a five-year,
exchange warranty.

DRIPPER LINES AND DRIPPERS

Integrated Dripper Lines for Ground Cover and Shrub Beds

The dripper line shall consist of a ultra violet resistant low density Linear
polyethylene tube with internal pressure compensating continuously self cleaning
integral flat drippers welded to the inside of wall of the tube at the specified spacing
as an integral part of the tubing assembly.

The tube shall have a 17mm or 16 mm outside diameter.

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-31/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

The dripper shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and
a self cleaning EPDM diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper. It shall have
an inlet filter raised from the wall of the tubing. It shall have the ability to
independently regulate discharge rates with a constant flow at an inlet pressure of 7-
70 psi.

The drippers shall have a manufacturers coefficient of variability (CV) of 0.03 or less.

The dripper discharge shall be 0.4, 0.61, or 0.92 gph utilizing a combination turbulent
flow/reduced pressure compensation cell mechanism and an EPDM diaphragm to
maintain uniform discharge rates. It shall also be continuously self-cleaning during
operation and under pressure and have a flow exponent X = 0 and a Kd of 1.3.

The dripper flow versus pressure shall be tested by an independent organization


such as the Center of Irrigation Technology, and shall have available reports to be
presented upon request.

The dripper flow shall not be affected by temperature up to 60 degrees Celsius and
shall not have a spike at start up.

The filtration requirement of the dripper shall be a maximum of 80-120 mesh.

The dripper line shall have a 7 years guarantee against solar radiation and 5 years
warranty against manufacturing defects.

Drippers for Trees and Palm Trees

The dripper shall be single outlet and it shall have a fixed flow of 24 Liters per Hour
(6.34 Gallons per Hour) for a pressure range of 7-60 psi.

The dripper shall have an independent pressure compensation mechanism with dual
regulation having an EPDM diaphragm and a turbulent flow labyrinth path. It shall be
continuously self-cleaning during operation and under pressure.

The dripper shall have a flow path of the following dimensions: depth 0.057, width
0.053, and length 0.59.It shall have no emission spike at low pressure start ups of 7
PSI. It shall also be provided with a built-in anti-siphon mechanism to prevent suction
of external impurities.

The dripper shall have a colour coded cap to identify flow.

The drippers shall have the Anti-Leak mechanism to prevent water draining out of
the dripper at a pressure of 7 PSI. It shall have a barbed inlet having an inlet filter.

The dripper shall have a Coefficient of Manufacturing Uniformity (CV) 0.03 or less.

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-32/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

Drippers for Scattered Shrubs and Ground Cover

The dripper shall be single outlet and it shall be available with a flow of 4, and 8
Liters per Hour (LPH) and shall be of the pressure compensating and continuously
self-cleaning type.

The dripper shall have an independent pressure compensation mechanism with dual
regulation having an EPDM diaphragm and a turbulent flow labyrinth path.

The dripper shall have a uniform flow rate at a pressure range of 7-60 psi and shall
have no flow emission spike at start up low pressure of 7 PSI.

The dripper shall have a built in anti-siphon mechanism to prevent suction of external
impurities with the need of dust cap. It shall have the Anti-Leak mechanism to
prevent water draining out of the dripper at a pressure of 7 PSI.

The dripper shall have a nipple outlet with colour coded cap to identify flow for each
type.
It shall have a barbed inlet having an inlet filter.

The dripper shall have a Coefficient Of Manufacturing Variation (CV) 0.03 less.

BUBBLERS

The bubbler shall be of the pressure compensating type having a fixed flow under a
pressure range of 20 to 90 PSI. It shall be constructed of corrosion and UV resistant
plastic material.

The bubbler shall have an integral electrometric flow bushing to maintain a constant
flow at different pressure range.

The bubbler shall have a plastic screen filter to protect it from debris that could be
available in the water. It shall have a inch female threaded inlet (FNPT) for
connection to a inch male threaded riser.

The bubbler shall be available in 0.25, 0.5, 1.0 and 2.0 GPM flow rates. The bubbler
shall carry a two years warranty

VALVES

Remote Control Electric Solenoid Valves

The electrical solenoid valves shall be of the globe type normally closed,
electronically actuated, diaphragm operated.

The valves body and bonnet shall be moulded of non-corrodible, glass-reinforced


nylon, rated at an operating pressure of 200 PSI. The body of the valve shall have
brass inserts, with through holes, which will accept the bonnet Stainless steel bolts.

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-33/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

The diaphragm shall be of moulded construction, reinforced with nylon fabric. A


heavy-duty removable seat shall be available to protect and support the diaphragm.

The valve shall be equipped with an internal filter as well with a self-cleaning
metering rod, so only clean water can enter the solenoid chamber. A filter cleaning
system, that continuously cleans the filter when the valve is operating, shall be
available.

The valve shall be equipped with a flow control mechanism with handle, which
regulates the flow from full on to completely off. It shall have an accurate set
pressure regulator, to keep the downstream pressure constant after setting it. The
regulator shall be of the top dial model with clearly shown pressure values in bars
and PSI. It shall regulate the flow at a pressure range of 20 to 100 PSI.

The valve shall be available in 1, 1.5, 2 and 3 inch size and it shall have a BSP
female thread inlet and outlet. It shall accommodate a flow rate from 0.1 gpm (1size)
to 200 gpm (2size)

The valve shall have a 24 volts 60 cycle solenoid with a 370 mA in-rush current and
190 mA holding current.

The solenoid shall be an encapsulated, one-piece unit with a captive plunger. The
Valve shall be equipped with a manual internal bleed only giving the capability to
release the upper chamber water to the downstream piping, allowing the valve to
open. No external bleed shall be available

The valve shall carry a five years exchange warranty.

Plastic Glass Nylon Hydraulic Control Valves

The electrical solenoid valves shall be of the globe type normally closed, 3 way
hydraulic type electronically actuated, diaphragm operated.

The valves body and bonnet shall be moulded of non-corrodible, glass-reinforced


nylon, with a maximum operating pressure of 200 PSI.

The valve shall be controlled with a hydraulic control signal. It shall be equipped to
operate with a Radio Valve Actuator. The actuator shall be designed and the same
manufacturer of the Irrigation Central Control System.

The Valve diaphragm shall be made of EPDM, highly resistant to chemicals and
fertilizers.

The internal pilot shall have a large full bleed path to allow the valve working with low
quality Treated Sewage Effluent water without any clogging.

The valve shall be equipped with a flow control mechanism with handle, which
regulates the flow from full on to completely off. It shall have an insert able field
installed pressure regulating module, to ensure constant downstream pressure.

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-34/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

The valve shall be available in 1.5 and 2 inch size and it shall have a BSP female
thread inlet and outlet.

The valves shall accommodate a flow rate from 0.4 gpm to 150 gpm with a pressure
loss of 4.4 psi at 105 gpm flow in the 2 hydraulic globe valve, and 7.1 psi in the
1.5size.

Cast Iron Electric / Manual Hydraulic Control Valves

The Control Valve shall be made of epoxy coated cast iron. It shall be of the
hydraulic type with 3-way pilot design. The electric version shall be operated by 5
watts electric solenoid actuator.

The Valve shall be able to be outfitted in a number of combinations of control


functions including manual, solenoid , pressure reducing, and pressure sustaining
flow control, pump control, quick release slow closing and two way control.

The valve shall be of the flow through design with the diaphragm used as the direct
sealing surface. It shall be fully serviceable in place without removal from the line.

The valve shall have a minimum pressure rating of 200 psi. The only moving parts
inside the valves shall be the diaphragm and the spring. The valve diaphragm shall
be of natural rubber and it shall be available in nitrile and EPDM

The valve shall be available in sizes 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 18and 20.

PVC Electric Hydraulic Control Valve

The Valve shall be made of PVC material rated at 8 bars and of hydraulic type. It
shall be of available in 3 inch and 4 sizes.

The inlet and outlet connections of the valve shall be of the solvent weld type. The
valve shall be of the flow through design, and of the diaphragm direct closing type
which will allow very low friction loss at high flows.

The valve shall be of the normally closed type with a normally open 3-way solenoid
24VAC installed from outside. It shall be operated manually by means of a three-way
selector knob.

The internal parts of the valve shall be only a natural rubber diaphragm and a spring.
The valve shall be serviceable in place just by unscrewing and removing the top. It
shall also have the possibility of adding controls such as pressure regulation,
pressure sustaining, etc.

Quick Pressure Relief Valve

The valve shall be of bronze construction 2size with angle configuration.

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-35/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

The valve shall be of the flow through design with the diaphragm used as the direct
sealing surface. It shall be fully serviceable in place without removal from the line
and shall have a minimum pressure rating of 200 psi.

The valve shall have a pressure pilot for the adjustment of the pressure setting. It
shall immediately open fully when the network pressure exceeds the set pressure.

The valve shall close slowly as the network pressure drops in order to prevent shock
to the system and the on/off cycling of the pump.

The valve shall also be available in sizes 3, 4, 6, and 8 with flanged connections.

Check Valves

The valve shall be of constructed of Aerospace quality composite and stainless steel
(SAE 303) materials, 100% non-corrosive. It shall allow flow in one direction by the
action of a spring loaded flap which closes against a rubber seal. The spring and the
flap shall be connected via a moment arm in order to ensure that the spring pressure
is maximum when the valve is closed.

The valve shall have a pressure rating of 16 bars. It shall have an external position
indicator that may be made electric for signaling a control system.

The valve shall be available in 3, 4, and 6size.

Air Release Valves

Air relief valves shall be of the sizes shown on the Drawings and shall be of the
kinetic/automatic type that will automatically release air when the lines are being
filled with water and when air entrapment occurs while the system is working.

The Valves shall be of the 2size with plastic or brass male base. The body of the
valve shall be constructed heavy duty plastic.

The working components of the valve shall be constructed of 100% corrosion


resistant materials to ensure maximum life and minimum water loss due to leaks.

The Air Release valve shall employ rolling seal mechanism made of EPDM and shall
remain open even when pipeline air pressure reaches 10 psi.

Line End Auto Flush Valve

The automatic line end flush valve shall allow for temporary, automatic flushing of
irrigation lateral lines during pressurization of the system.

The valve shall be designed in a way that it will not close prematurely at high
pressure. It shall allow for disassembly for servicing. It shall have a operating
pressure range of 15 to 57 psi.

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-36/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

The valve shall be constructed entirely of non-corrosive plastic with a silicon


diaphragm. No springs shall be employed in the operation of the valve.

The connection of the valve shall be either inch male thread or 17 mm insert.

Quick Coupling Valves

The Valve shall be operated by insertion of a compatible hollow coupler key.

The valve shall be operated by a 90 turn in clockwise direction with reverse turn for
closure and be capable of 360-swivel action.

The valves shall be of the low-pressure loss type.

The Valve Body shall be made from brass material and have the two-section type
with removable upper body. It shall be supplied with spring loaded locking cover
made from thermoplastic rubber. The cover spring shall be of stainless steel
material.

Gate Valves

Gate valves shall be designed for a working pressure of not less than 10 bar and
water operating temperature of 45 C.

Valves shall be the same size as the incoming line size with a clear waterway equal
to the full nominal diameter of the valves and shall be opened by turning counter
clockwise.

The operating nut or wheel shall have an arrow cast in valve indicating the direction
of opening.

Valves smaller than 3 shall be all bronze or brass conforming to BS 5154 with
screwed and connections. Valves 3 and larger shall be cast iron body, and shall
conform to BS 5150 with flange end connections.

Valve Boxes

The valve boxes shall have enclosures, which are injected molded polyofin plastic
with ultra violet additives, according to ASTM-D-V1248. It shall be light in weight with
reduced side angles and increased break resistance.

The valve box shall be non-conductive or sparking.

The valve boxes shall be available in sizes 910, 1015, 1320, 1324 depending on
installation requirements as per scope of work, specifications and drawings.

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-37/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

REGULAR CONTROLLERS AND CONTROL CABLES

Irrigation Control Cables

The irrigation control cables shall be used between the solenoid valves and the
irrigation controllers. The cables shall be of the single conductor type UF and they
shall be engineered for direct burial use.

The wires shall be of the solid or stranded construction with soft bare copper
conductor. They shall have extra heavy thickness of special polyvinyl chloride
insulation highly resistant to the saline, acid or alkaline contaminants.

The copper conductors of the wires shall meet the requirements of ASTM B-3, B-8.

The thermoplastic insulation shall meet ASTM D-2219. All irrigation wires shall have
surface printing on insulation.

Irrigation Controllers

The controller shall be of a modular design with a standard 8-station model. There
shall be an insert able add-on 4 station and 8 station modules that enable the
controller to be customized from 8 stations up to 48 stations in 4 or 8 stations
increments.

The controller shall have three independent programs (A,B,C) with 8 start times per
program and one program (D) that can run concurrently with the other programs.
Watering time shall be available from 1 minute to 2 hours in 1-minute increment per
station in programs A, B and C and from 1 minute to 12 hours in program D.

The controller shall have 4 weekly schedule options to choose from: 7-day calendar,
31 days calendar, odd days programming and even days programming.

The controller shall also have a 365 days calendar clock to accommodate true odd
even watering. All programming shall be accomplished by use of a programming dial
and selection buttons with user feedback by LCD display.

The controller shall be equipped by a rain sensor.

The controller shall have a cycle and soak scheduling capability that allows a cycle to
be programmed for up to 60 minutes and a soak period up to 60 minutes.

The controller shall have a seasonal adjust feature that allows for station run times to
be changed from 10% to 150% in 10% increments to compensate for weather
changes.

The controller shall have automatic short circuit detection.

The controller shall be equipped with a programmable pump circuit that can activate
the pump start relay by zone. It shall have a programmable delay between valve
stations.

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-38/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

Programs backup shall be provided by a non-volatile memory circuit that will hold the
program, time and date indefinitely.

The controller shall have a Stainless Steel cabinet and it shall be pedestal mounted.
The pedestal shall be stainless steel.

The controller shall be compatible with a programming kit (SRP) that transfer the
irrigation program from a personal computer and upload them into the memory of the
controller.

Automatic Filtration System

The filtration system shall consist of a disc filter Battery having 2 or more 4units
depending on the flow and the water quality as specified on the drawings. Each unit
shall be capable to filter 415 gpm of average quality water.

Each filtration unit shall have 5 Nos. 3 disc filter elements enclosed in Anodized
Aluminium Housing with Stainless steel Clamp and EPDM O-ring seals.

The filter elements shall be of the grooved disc design providing both surface and
depth filtration in a compact package.

The grooved discs shall be fitted on a spine in a way that when the filter fills with
filtrate the ring compress to prevent the outflow water. They shall be manufactured
and laser cut so the width of each groove shall be constant from inside to out.

The grooves in the disc shall be cut at an angle so that the grooves on the upper disc
shall intersect with those on the lower disc.

The filter battery shall be equipped with a fully automatic backwash mechanism
consisting of 4x 3 backwash valves and a backwash controller.

The backwash system shall work on pressure differential and/or time.

The backwash valves shall be plastic that accepts Victaulic connection.

During the backwash process the discs of the elements shall spin under the water
pressure coming out from the outlets of the spine to ensure complete cleaning of the
discs.

The filtration units shall be assembled on epoxy coated steel manifolds.

The maximum operating pressure shall be 10 bars and the minimum pressure at the
battery outlet shall be 3.5 bars

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-39/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PROTECTION

A. All materials shall be shipped or otherwise conveyed in such a manner as to


assure no damage. All boxes shall be securely sealed and clearly marked with
the name of the manufacturer. All pipes shall be protected from crimping,
crushing and splitting. All non-metallic system components shall be protected
from sunlight exposure as per the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Work and materials shall be protected from damage during storage, handling and
construction. Particularly, non-metallic pipes and fittings shall be protected from
direct sunlight during storage. Facilities of the necessary dimensions shall be
provided and maintained for storage of all non-metallic irrigation materials in their
entirety. All non-metallic materials shall be handled carefully and stored under
cover to avoid damage. Pipes that have been damaged or dented will not be
used in this work.

C. In addition to the provisions for the protection of non-metallic components,


special attention shall be given to the protection of the control system compo-
nents; protection shall be provided as per the manufacturer's written
recommendations.

D. Openings into the system, apparatus and equipment shall be securely covered,
both before and after being set in place, to prevent obstruction in the pipes and
the breakage, misuse or disfigurement of the apparatus or equipment.

E. Barricades, guards, warning signs and lights as necessary or required, for the
protection of the public and the work force shall be provided.

F. Utilities: The location of existing underground utilities shall be determined and the
works performed in a manner which will avoid possible damage. Hand exca-
vation, as required shall be carried out to minimize the possibility of damage to
existing underground utilities.

3.02 PERFORMANCE

A. Layout and Verification:

1. The Contractor shall stake-out the locations of all pipe and valves and the layout
of work as accurately as possible.

2. The Contractor shall verify all horizontal and vertical site dimensions prior to
staking.

3. The Contractor will be responsible for relocating any existing services after first
obtaining the Engineer's approval. The Contractor shall remove and relocate
such services, at his own expense, if so directed by the Engineer.

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-40/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

4. Before starting work on irrigation systems, the Contractor shall carefully check all
grades to determine that work may safely proceed, keeping within the specified
material depths.

5. Fittings installed on pipes beneath pavements or walls shall be shown on


drawings.

6. All changes shall be recorded daily on the " As-Built" worksheets.

3.03 INSPECTION

The Contractor shall inspect all products for damage immediately before installation.
Any products that are found to be damaged or not in accordance with the
specifications shall immediately be repaired or removed from the site and replaced.
Repairs shall not be undertaken without the Engineer's approval of Contractor's
proposed action.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. Excavation and backfilling shall be in accordance with detail drawings.

B. In bedding and backfilling granular material shall be used below and above the
pipes. The back fill material shall be free of stones bigger than

C. Cast-in-place concrete shall be in accordance shall be in accordance with the


common civil works standards covering the concrete class, shattering work,
curing procedures etc.

D. All products shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction


and the drawings.

E. Location of Irrigation Lines:

1. Where the location of an irrigation line is not clearly dimensioned on the


Drawings, the irrigation line shall not be laid horizontally closer than 3.0
meters from a sewer.

2. However, where the bottom of the irrigation line will be at least 0.3 meters
above the top of the sewer pipe, the irrigation line shall not be laid closer
horizontally than 1.5 meters from the sewer.

3. Where irrigation lines cross under gravity-flow sewer lines, the sewer pipe
shall be fully encased in concrete, for a distance of at least 3.0 meters each
side of the crossing or shall be made of pressure pipe with no joint located
within 1.0 meters horizontally of the crossing.

4. Irrigation lines shall, in all cases, cross 0.6 meter above sewage pressure
mains.

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-41/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

5. Generally, where the irrigation distribution or secondary main with


accompanying cable bundle is running under hard surfaces or landscaped
areas the pipe and the cables will be directly buried in a clean sand bed with
a marker tape above. At road junctions or other locations where pipes cross
the road they shall be contained in a direct buried PVC sleeve. The sleeve
shall extend beyond the road crossing by at least one meter on both sides.
The sleeve shall be a minimum of 100 mm diameter, and for larger pipes will
be at least 25mm greater in diameter than the pipe running through it.

6. Header mains shall be direct buried in sand in the landscaped areas only.

F. Placing and Laying

1. Pipes shall not be laid in water or when trench conditions are otherwise
unsuitable for the work. Water shall be kept out of the trench until the material
in the joints has hardened or until caulking or jointing is completed. When
work is not in progress, open ends of the pipe, fittings, and valves shall be
securely closed so that no substance will enter the pipes or fittings.

2. Pipe ends left for future connections shall be valved, plugged or capped, and
anchored, as shown or as directed. Pipes that have the grade or joint
disturbed after laying shall be taken up and relaid.

3. All piping with the exception of the flexible irrigation drip line shall be
surrounded by a sand bed to the dimensions as shown on the Drawings.

G. Plastic Pipes

These shall be installed in accordance with BS 8010: Part 1 and the Manufacturer's
recommendations. Pipes with threaded joints shall be snaked from side to side of the
trench to allow for expansion and contraction.

H. Jointing

1. Pipe joints of uPVC shall be installed in accordance with recommendations of


the manufacturer. Excess jointing material shall be removed.

2. uPVC male adaptors with specified threaded joint compounds to make


connections between plastic pipe and valves shall be used as detailed, and
tightened with light wrench pressure.

I. Concrete thrust blocks shall be constructed on main pipelines at all changes in


direction or size. The thrust blocks shall be un-reinforced concrete and shall
have a minimum dimension of 300 mm. The pipelines shall be located centrally
in the thrust blocks.

J. Irrigation piping from the remote control valve boxes to the end of the irrigation
drip lines shall be buried to the depths as shown on the Drawings.

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-42/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

K. Closing of Pipe and Flushing Lines:

1. Closing: Openings in piping systems shall be capped or plugged, leaving


caps and plugs in place until removal is necessary for completion of the
installation. Dirt and debris shall be prevented from entering pipe or
equipment.

2. Flushing: All pipes and tubing shall be thoroughly flushed out before
installation of the emitter control valves. Butt joints, fittings and connections
shall remain visible.

L. Tagging and Identification: All remote control valves, motor-operated valves,


pressure reducing valves, manually-operated gate valves and controllers shall be
tagged and identified. All identifying numbers shall be consistent with like
designations indicated on the irrigation controller schedule.

M. Site Equipment Installation:

1. Isolation Valve/Gate Valve: Shall be installed as detailed and where indicated


on Drawings.

2. Remote Control Valve Assembly: Shall be installed in the positions as


indicated in the details, remote control valve assembly comprising gate valve,
remote control valve with pressure regulator , and all appurtenances. Valve
boxes containing the assembly shall not be placed closer than 300mm to
paved areas. When the pressure gauge has been properly attached, the
outlet pressure shall be set as required during coverage tests.

3. Valve Boxes: Shall be installed as detailed and where indicated on Drawings.


All valves and valve assemblies shall be mounted in boxes as detailed.

a. The top of all boxes shall be set parallel with the grade and as detailed
in a neat and orderly fashion.

b. Shall be placed parallel to paving, kerbs, walls or similar structures


and where more than one box, parallel to each other.

c. All box locations shall be reviewed with the Engineer prior to


installation of valves.

d. Valve boxes shall not rest on or come in contact with the valve, piping,
hose or conduit.

e. Valve circuit number of the remote control valve shall be painted on


rim of box, such that:

i. Minimum height of letters and numerals - 38 mm.

ii. Black enamel paint.

iii. It shall be located on inlet side of box with bottom of letter aligned
with outer edge of box.

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-43/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

iv. A soak away 500 mm deep shall be provided under all valve boxes
using clean crushed aggregate 20 - 30 mm nominal size.

N. Control System

1. Irrigation Controller:

a. An irrigation controller shall be installed in locations approved by the


Engineer, with the control cables, clearly marked with identification
markers, attached to the appropriate terminals in the approved manner.

b. Shall be secure to a concrete pad with approved anchor bolts. Chipping,


cracking, or otherwise marring the finish of enclosure when securing to
the concrete pad shall be avoided.

c. Programming of Irrigation Controller: Using the controller schedule


provided on the drawings, as a guide, the irrigation controller shall be
programmed to correspond with the initial irrigation sequencing and
duration of the cycles for each zone. The Contractor may find that during
establishment and maintenance the schedule has to be modified to
achieve a correct irrigation regime in accordance with good horticultural
practice.

O. Irrigation - Electrical:

1. The Contractor shall provide, install, test and commission all items of
electrical equipment associated with the irrigation systems.

2. All electrical works shall be in accordance with the BS and IEC, and as further
specified in Sections under Division 16.

3. The irrigation system shall commence at the controllers which shall be fitted
into a dwarf type distribution cabinet with solar shade and shall have a bolting
down foot for mounting on a pre-formed concrete base. All incoming and
outgoing cables shall be from below ground level. The cabinet shall have a
hinged lockable opening door to provide full front access to the controller and
equipment and shall be sized according to the equipment being installed.

4. All equipment, conductors, termination, etc., within the pillar and throughout
the irrigation system generally shall be fully insulated such that there are no
live parts or connections exposed and shall be to the complete satisfaction of
the Engineer.

5. The irrigation pillar shall have sufficient free space for fitting a kWh meter
together with any additional equipment or accessories required to complete
the equipment.

6. Each irrigation pillar shall have permanently fixed on the inside of the door, a
distribution diagram showing all circuits connections, ratings, cable sizes, etc.,
together with a current controller schedule.

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-44/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

7. All terminals shall be of the crimped spade type with insulated grip. At all
connection locations 150 mm of "slack" shall be provided.

8. Conductor markers shall be used throughout which shall clearly indicate the
circuit reference or number. These shall be white plastic with black letters or
numbers and of the type which acts as a sleeve over the conductor insulation.

9. Connections onto valves shall be made in a below ground PVC resin filled
moulded waterproof connector with integral wire clamp.

P. Drip Line/Soft line Testing:

1. Drip lines shall be carefully uncoiled and laid in position without kinking. Any
kinked section shall be cut from the line and subsequently rejoined with a line
joiner section.

2. Drip lines shall be snaked as required for maximum coverage without the use
of compression fittings. Sharp bends shall be avoided where there is a
likelihood of causing kinks in the line.

3. Drip lines shall be laid on the ground surface for a minimum of 48 hours prior
to the installation of irrigation emitters or stakes.

4. After this period the drip lines shall be realigned and secured to the ground
with stakes at 5 m intervals.

Q. Concrete Pads:

1. Installation as detailed and where shown on the Drawings.

2. The exact location shall be confirmed to the Engineer prior to pouring.

3. Specified non-metallic conduit shall be provided as required to penetrate


boxes and enclosures as approved by the Engineer.

4. The anchor bolts shall be set in coordination with enclosure hole locations.

R. Pumps:

1. Installation:

a. Installation shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer's instruc-


tions, and as specified herein.

2. Fabrication:

a. All like parts of same type pumps fabricated by the same manufacturer
shall be interchangeable.

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-45/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

b. Whenever possible, the pump shall be manufactured such that it shall be


possible to disassemble the rotor assembly with minimum disassembly of
other parts, such as suction and discharge nozzles, bearing supports, etc.

c. All castings shall be clean without defect. Casting repairs shall be done
only after agreement is reached between the Engineer and the
Contractor.

d. All foundry and machine work shall be in accordance with good practice
for the class of work involved.

e. All parts shall conform to the required dimensions and shall be free from
defects that will prevent proper functioning of the pump.

f. Assembly of parts shall be well fitted and smoothly operating.

g. All internal parts, such as impeller, requiring surface treatment shall be


sprayed with PVC epoxy primer in accordance with pump manufacturer's
standard practice.

h. Pump exterior shall be sprayed with PVC epoxy primer and shall be
painted to meet specific application requirements in accordance with
pump manufacturer's standard practice.

3. Shop Testing:

a. Pump performance tests shall be conducted in accordance with BS 5316.


In addition, each pump shall be tested at five points of operation from
shut-off head to run out condition, including the guaranteed pump's
performance point.

b. All pumps shall be hydrostatically tested for leaks at 1.5 times the design
pressure. There shall be no leakage during the one-hour test period.

c. The Contractor shall submit Manufacturer's test certificates, including test


data to show that pump meets performance specifications.

3.05 SYSTEM TESTING

A. Purging:

1. Immediately prior to hydrostatic testing, all irrigation lines shall be thoroughly


purged of all entrapped air.

2. Mainline piping system may be tested in sections. Lateral Systems shall be


tested valve by valve.

3. Water shall be discharged from a single outlet by manipulation of isolation control


valves and installation of temporary caps.

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-46/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

4. Water shall be introduced into lines to be tested at full operating head and the
water flow at end discharge point, and observed until all air and residual debris
has been expelled from the line.

B. Initial System Test:

1. Individual parts of the main network between isolation valve points having a
length not greater than 500 meters shall be tested together with dead legs before
backfilling operation.

2. Test shall be made only after completion of the above operations and not until at
least seven days after the last concrete thrust anchor block has been cast.

3. Contractor shall supply all testing material and equipment, including all caps,
valves, pumps, tanks and gauges as required.

4. Pressure gauges shall be dual reading in bar and psi units. Calibration shall be
such that accurate determination of potential pressure loss can be ascertained.

5. The section of the main pipeline to be tested shall be filled with potable water and
all air expelled. After the main pipeline has been completely filled, the pressure
shall be steadily and gradually increased until the specified test pressure has
been reached. Simultaneous pressure and leakage tests and separate pressure
test shall be made at 150 % of working pressure at the point of test, but not less
than 125% of normal working pressure at highest elevation. Separate elevation
test shall be made at 150 % of normal working pressure of the segment tested.
Duration of simultaneous pressure and leakage tests shall be 2 hours and
duration of separate pressure tests shall be 1 hour. All testing shall comply with
AWWA M23-80, Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe Design and Installation. A graph shall be
produced showing water input against time and the test shall run until the graph
curve flattens out. Testing shall comply with AWWA specifications and
requirements.

6. Separate tests shall be applied to the lateral distribution pipe work and the
irrigation pipe work from the remote control valves outwards. Test pressures for
these shall be as described above.

7. When testing the irrigation lines from the valves, discharge devices shall be
replaced with temporary plugs or caps.

8. All trenches with pipe installed shall be immediately backfilled with preliminary
sand backfill sufficient to prevent arching or slipping under pressure. All joints,
fittings and connections are to remain exposed until successful completion of
hydrostatic testing.

9. Other than for preliminary sand backfill over pipes, no work shall be covered
before it has been inspected, tested and approved by the Engineer.

10. During the tests, all exposed couplings, fittings and valves shall be carefully
examined for defects and leakage. Leaking pipes, couplings, joints, fittings and

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-47/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

equipment shall be repaired or replaced and the section retested as previously


specified.

11. Upon receipt of approval of the Engineer to proceed, the remaining backfill shall
be placed and compacted to ninety percent (90%) of maximum dry density. For
further details refer to Section 02221 - TRENCHING, BACKFILLING,
COMPACTION AND GENERAL GRADING.

C. Final System Test: The tests as specified above shall be repeated for the entire
network after pipelines have been backfilled, cleaned and inspected. Each test
shall be restricted to pipes of one class and particular care shall be taken to
isolate air valves, etc. and not to apply higher pressures than specified at any
point on the pipeline and to ensure that the pipelines are adequately anchored
before any test is carried out.

D. Test Results: Written records of every test clearly identifying the tested section
of the pipe together with time of test and name of testing engineer in tabulated
format shall be submitted for review and approval by the Engineer upon
completion of the tests.

3.06 FLUSHING

A. General: On completion of the system test, the system is to be thoroughly


flushed, the velocity of water being at least 1 m/s. Should the main water supply
be unavailable or inadequate for this purpose at the time of flushing, then a swab
of adequate size shall be used to remove all foreign matter from the pipeline. This
process shall continue until the pipeline is completely clean. Each control valve
shall be opened separately and the terminal systems also thoroughly flushed.
After completion of flushing, the emitters and other discharge devices shall be
fitted.

B. Operation Test: After the hydrostatic test, emitters shall be installed and the
system completed and tested to demonstrate functional efficiency. This shall be
prior to covering the laterals with mulch.

C. The lines shall be operated for a period of 24 hours, not necessarily in one
continuous period, and all emitters checked for satisfactory operation. Any
faulty/blocked emitters shall be replaced.

3.07 IRRIGATION TANK

Irrigation water storage tanks shall be manufactured to British Standards and comply
strictly with the Water Department's Regulations of Qatar. The following tank may be
used:

Reinforced Concrete Storage Tank

The following design criteria shall be observed during construction:

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-48/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

a. There shall be one manhole to be positioned to have easy access to the float
valve

b. Stainless steel or GRP ladder shall be provided for access to the tank.

c. Vent pipe with insect guard shall be provided.

d. Water level controls (low level electric float switches interlocked) for pumps shall
be provided.

e. In case of overflow, warning system shall be provided either by level switch or by


other approved means.

f. Manholes shall be provided with at least 100mm upstaged concrete and double
sealed to prevent leakage.

g. Isolating stop-valves shall be provided in the supply and delivery lines

h. Approved non-toxic epoxy coating, resisting fungus growth shall be used on all
internal surfaces.

i. Approved tanking membrane for water tightness shall be used on external


surfaces.

The tanks shall be provided to the capacities, dimensions and locations shown on the
drawing. Each tank is to be fixed on a base, which supports the whole of the tank.
The details of the tank base are to be approved by the Consultant before any
installation work begins.

APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

1. IRRITROL
2. RAIN BIRD
3. HUNTER
4. TOURO

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-49/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

SNG SYSTEM

INDEX

1. Scope of Works
2. Design Standards
3. Materials
4. System Installations
5. Pneumatic Testing
6. Commissioning

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-27/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

1.0 SCOPE OF WORKS

This scope covers the Engineering, Supplying, Installing, Testing and Commissioning of all
materials and equipments required for the complete system and general method of installing
the materials and equipments. The conditions set out below shall apply to all the system,
and shall consider the following.

The Contractor shall strictly follow and comply with the Civil Defense requirements &
Marafeq Qatar latest

Guidelines & NFPA 54, NFPA 58, IGEM standards.

Project Description

This project has been developed within the master plan of lusail is engaged in
maintaining functional efficiency and over all environmental quality of the master plan
located in the vicinity of the residential zone of marine plots. This plot is provided a
harmonious unity due to its integrated facades and carefully arranged apartment to
provide its own character.

This building is 2B+G+10floors.

Surrounding the plots is hierarchy of road network and streetcar and to be supplied
and connected to Synthetic Natural Gas (SNG) Network System of Lusail.

SNG SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Components

1. First Stage Pressure Reducing and Metering Station (PRMS)

Which consist of isolation valve, gas filter, slam shut off valve, active and
monitoring pressure regulator, explosion proof solenoid valve (Normally closed),
pressure relief valve, pressure gauge & Gas Meter etc. This pressure reducing &
metering station reduce the inlet gas pressure (0.5-4 bar) to 75 mbar and supply
to inside the building.

2. Gas Distribution Piping from 1st stage PRMS until the Building

4 Carbon steel pipe schedule 40 wrapped with denso tape for corrosion
protection running underground from the First stage PRMS until the building.

3. Gas risers externally and inside shaft: 2 Carbon steel pipe schedule 40
running as riser externally supported with outer wall of building to roof top. Gas
pipes dropping to each kitchen through gas shaft to distribute gas up to the gas
equipments.

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-28/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

4. Gas pipe running on the roof top of the building: 2-1/2 2 Carbon steel
pipe schedule 40 running on roof top of the buildings as main distribution line. 1
& 1/2" carbon steel pipe schedule 40 pipe branch drop down to serve kitchen
areas.

5. Gas pipe and equipments inside the kitchens. A solenoid valve (Normally
closed) shall be provided at the gas pipes entering to each kitchens, 1/2 gas
pipe (copper pipe) running inside the kitchens from the solenoid valve to gas
equipment connection. Solenoid valve interlinked with gas detector emergency
push bottom and gas control panel. Second stage pressure regulator shall be
provided to reduce gas pressure from 75 mbar to 21-37 mbar. Smart Gas meter
(remote read out gas meter) in each kitchens shall be install to calculate amount
of gas consumed by each kitchens. Apart from solenoid valve an excess flow
valve or auto shut off valve shall be provided in each kitchens to cut the gas
supply in case of excess flow. Each equipment connection provided with isolation
valve and flexible hose.

6. Gas detection system: Which consist of gas control panel gas detectors
emergency push button and sounder. Gas control panel and sounder shall be
install in security room in ground floor. Gas detector shall be installed in each
kitchens, gas shaft, PRMS and safe area. Emergency push button shall be install
in each kitchens. Gas control panel shall be interlinked with all gas detectors,
solenoid valve, building fire alarm panel and BMS.

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-29/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

2.0 DESIGN STANDARDS

a. IGE/GM/6 Diaphragm and RD Meter Installations, > 6m3/hr, MOP 75 mbar.


b. IGE/GM/8, Part 1 Meter Installations I & C Design, MOP 38 bar.
c. IGE/GM/8, Part 2 Meter Installations I & C Location & Housing, MOP 38 bar.
d. IGE/GM/5 Electronic Gas Meter Volume Conversion Systems.
e. IGE/SR/25 Hazardous Area Classification of Natural Gas Installations.
f. IGE/TD/13:2001 - Pressure regulating installations for transmission and distribution
systems.
g. BS EN 1359:1999 - Gas meters. Diaphragm gas meters.
h. BS EN 12480:2002 - Gas meters. Rotary Positive Displacement (RPD) gas meters.
i. BS EN 12261:2002 - Gas meters. Turbine gas meters.
j. BS EN 12405-1:2005 - Gas meters. Conversion devices. Volume conversion.
k. BS 6400 Specification for the Installation of domestic-sized gas meters maximum
rated capacity not exceeding 6 m3/h (2nd and 3rd family gases) Part 1 Natural Gas
(low pressure) Part 2 Natural Gas (medium pressure).
l. IGE/UP/15- Gas in Flats: Gas Installations in Multi-Occupancy Buildings.
m. IGE/UP/2 - Gas installation pipe work, boosters and compressors on industrial and
commercial premises.
n. IGE/G/5 - Gas in flats and other multi-dwelling buildings.
o. IGE/TD/4 - Gas Services.
p. IGE/TD/3 Edition 4; 2005 Steel and PE pipelines for gas distribution.
q. BS 6891 - Specification for installation of low pressure gas pipework of up to 28 mm
(R1) in domestic premises (2nd family gas).
r. NFPA 54 National Fuel Gas Code Handbook.
s. NFPA 58 Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code.

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-30/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

3.0 MATERIALS (PIPING, FITTINGS AND VALVES GAS METER)

a. PIPING: All pipework shall be seamless Carbon steel pipe sch 40 conforming to
ASTM A53 / A53. All the changes in direction of pipes shall be achieved by using
proper fittings.

b. HDPE HIGH-DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPE (Black Colour with Yellow Stripes)

All underground pipes are high density Polyethylene pipe of type PE 100, SDR 11
constructed

According to code prEN 1555-2 or ASTM D 2513 or equal approval from Marafeq
Qatar.

c. BUT WELD FITTINGS

All welded pipe fittings shall be comply with ASTM A234 (Carbon and alloy steel)
wrought steel but welding fittings or approval from Marafeq Qatar.

d. PE FITTINGS (BLACK COLOUR): ASTM D 2683, socket-fusion type or ASTM D


3261, or UNI EN 1555-9:2004, Bar coded butt fusion type with dimensions matching
PE pipe.

e. PE TRANSITION FITTINGS

Factory-fabricated fittings with PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, or EN 1555,


SDR 11 and steel pipe complying with ASTM A53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40,
Type E or S, Grade B or ASTM A106 Grade B Schedule 40 or API 5 L Grade B
Schedule 40 or equal approval from Marafeq Qatar.

f. VALVES

Valves shall be of lever operated ball type with an indication of ON and OFF
positions. Valves shall be of the non-lubricated type and constructed of non-ferrous
materials. The valves shall be designed for capillary joint connections to the pipe
lines. Where screwed/threaded connections are provided for pipe line connection,
they should have I.S.O. metric thread in accordance with BS 3643. The valves shall
be of wrought copper or bronze. Details of the valves shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval. Valves shall be Malleable iron to ASTM A47 and or Ductile
Iron to ASTM A395 or EN 331 standard/ or approval from Marafeq Qatar. Rating as
specified in table 5.9.4.1, as per NFPA58.

g. FLANGE

All the flange connection shall be comply with ASME B16.5 standard class 150 or
equal approval from Marafeq Qatar.

h. GAS METER

All gas meter shall be diaphragm Type comply with EN-1359 or equal approval from
Marafeq Qatar/Woqod.

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-31/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

I. SOLENOID VALVE

Solenoid valve should be complying with conformity with the 97/23/EC Directive
(PED Directive) and should be explosion proof and IP65 raring. Electrically operated
230 VAC/50-60 HZ. Normally closed type. Threaded connections Rp: (DN 20 DN
50) according to EN 10226 and Flanged connections PN 16 :( DN 65 DN 300)
according to ISO 7005. Material Die-cast aluminium (UNI EN 1706) with pressure
rating 0.5-6 bar. Or approval equal from Marafeq Qatar/WOQOD.

j. ACTIVE PRESSURE REGULATOR, MONITOR PRESSURE REGULATOR AND


SLAM SHUT OFF

1st stage Active pressure & Monitor pressure with slam shut off shall be Cast iron by
with Die cast Aluminum cover, closed rubber Diaphragm type with inlet pressure 0.5 -
10 bar and outlet pressure 15-100 mbar. Comply with conforming to the 97/23 CE
PED directive or equal approval from Marafeq Qatar/ Woqod.

k. LOW PRESSURE REGULATOR FOR APARTMENTS

Should have UPSO (Under pressure shut off) with inlet pressure 0-75 mbar and out
let pressure 37 mbar (LPG) switch to 21 mbar (SNG/NG).

1. Body and cover: die cast zinc alloy


2. Diaphragm: NBR
3. Valve pads: NBR
4. Casing : ABS

Should be comply with EN437 or equal approval from the Marafeq Qatar/Woqod.

l. RELIEF VALVE: Relief valve should design pressure up to 20 bar and inlet pressure
150 mbar-15 bar raring and set pressure at 90 mbar. Connection size should be 1/4"
to 1, brass or aluminum alloy body, should comply with conforming to the 97/23 CE
PED directive or equal approval from Marafeq Qatar.

m. GAS FILTER: Should comply with DIN 3840 and EN 12516 standards or equal
approval from Marafeq Qatar and capable be used for all types of Natural gas, LPG
or non-corrosive gases. The filters are widely used for protection of control devices,
pressure regulators, meters and on systems requiring a high degree of filtration .The
high filtration capacity of the cartridges and their broad surface allow separation of
both dust and solid particles reducing maintenance times for the equipment installed
downstream. The gas filter should have pressure rating 10 bar, can be threaded and
flange connection.

n. PRESSURE GAUGE: Should comply with ANSI & ASMEB40.100, or equal approval
from Marafeq Qatar. The pressure gauge have minimum

1. Shatterproof, Vibration proof capacity


2. Accuracy 1.6% of F.S.
3. Ambient temperature: - 25C to + 65C
4. Process temperature: Max 100C
5. Operating pressure: 75 % of the Scale Value

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-32/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

6. Case : AISI 304 SS


7. Ring : AISI 304 SS, Bayonet Type
8. Movement: Brass [ Chrome Plated ]
9. Joints : Tig Argon Arc Welding
10. Capsule: AISI 316 SS
11. Protection: IP 55
12. Dial : Aluminum, black graduation on white background
13. Pointer : Aluminum, black Colored Micrometer Zero Adjustable
14. Window: Sheet Glass.
15. Connection: Bottom connection.
16. Nominal size: 63 mm.
17. Vibration proof.

o. AUTO SHUT OFF VALVE: The Auto shut off valve should be equipped with UPSO
safety valve and it provides 2 functions: (1) manually operated shut off valve. (2)
Manually resettable shut-off valve which stops the gas flow when: the upstream gas
supply pressure is too low (lack of gas supply, clogged filter) and an excess of flow-
rate occurs (rupture of downstream pipes or hoses, oversized appliance. The Auto
shut off valve should have below future:

1. Filter in the inlet connection


2. Manual resetting by knob rotation
3. Possible lock-sealing of the knob
4. Construction
5. Body and cover: die cast zinc alloy
6. Diaphragm: NBR
7. Seat pad: NBR

Should have inlet pressure 19-50 mbar and UPSO set pressure 8-14 mbar, Or
equal approval from Marafeq Qatar.

p. PIPE SUPPORTS

Pipe supports shall be comply with ASTM B 633 standard and should have minimum
future:

1. Strengthened lock bolts for high load capacity


2. Can be used for both horizontal and vertical installations.
3. Rubber lining for suppression of sound and vibrations.
4. Lock bolts with combi cross recessed head.
5. M6 side screws with PE captive disc.
6. Grooved Construction for added strength.
7. Welded Nut M8/M10 with option of M10/M12
8. Safe and Break Loads as per Chart
9. M6 Side Nuts can be provided on request.
10. Electrogalvanized as per ASTM B 633 Standards.
11. U bolt should have minimum future:
12. High Load Capacity due to one piece design.
13. Supplied with two or four Nuts.
14. Special U Bolts with longer tangents and threads.

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-33/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

15. Mild Steel


16. Designed to meet MSS SP-58-2002, Type 24
17. Electrogalvanized as per ASTM B 633 Standards.

SUPPORT CHANNELS

1. Thickness: 2.5mm
2. Material: 250MPa (min yield stress) mild steel
3. Finishes: Plain, Galva bond, Hot Dipped Galvanized, Polyester Powder
Coated,
4. 316 GR Stainless Steel, (Other finishes available)

Or approval form the Marafeq Qatar.

Q. PRMS ENCLOSURE

Customer/contractor is requested to prepare and install station foundation and box


cabinet complies according all the standard listed in this document. The cabinet must
have suitable earthling connection.

1. Size- The cabinet must be sized for all required equipment to be easily
accessible.
2. Ventilation-It must have at least 10% ventilation.
3. Material- As per WOQOD requirements.
4. Door-PRS Cabinet of width 60 cm or less shall be provided with single hinged
door fitted with locking system whereas if the cabinet is wider than 60 cm
shall be provided with double egress door and appropriate gas safety sign
must be imprinted.
5. Cabinet Base- The base must be concrete and be a minimum of 100mm
larger on each dimension than the cabinet base and be at least 150 mm thick.

r. PAINTING AND COLOR CODES: The Pressure Reducing Station equipment and
pipes spool shall be protected from corrosion and to be provided with piping color to
easily identification of the pipelines and their content. Pipeline color coding shall
follow to international acceptable standard.

1. Paint shall be in 3 layer coating system as given below:-


2. Primer coating shall be 85% metallic zinc by weight, grey color, matte finish
3. Intermediate coating shall be Polyamide Epoxy, matte finish
4. Finish coating shall be polyurethane, golden yellow, high gloss finish.
5. Final coat for gas piping shall be Golden Yellow color RAL 1007.
6. Paint shall be fully cured before another layer to be applied.

s. GAS DETECTION SYSTEM:

Gas Detection system consisting of Gas control panel, Explosion proof and dust
proof gas detectors, emergency push button or switch, sounder alarm.

1. Gas control panel should have capacity centralized gas detection system to
interlinked all building gas detector and interface with building fire alarm
panel, BMS system.

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-34/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

2. The central panel shall have a modular design incorporating input alarm/
display module for each gas detector. Each channel shall have indication for
low alarm of 15% LEL, high alarm at 30% LEL and fault at 0-100% LEL
indicator.
3. Main SNG supply shall be shut off at 30% LEL indication.
4. The concentration of the Gas shall be displayed on a common indicator
with selector Switches to display the concentration of the desired
channel or zone indicator.
5. System control panel shall have the following indications:
a) AC Healthy
b) CD Healthy
c) Gas solenoid valve operated
d) Common fire signals
e) Gas Leak High.
f) Gas Manual shut off switch.
g) Test Channels switch.
h) System reset switch.

Sounder: A sounder unit shall be installed in the vicinity of the panel located in a
visible area.

Cables: FP 200 cables of at least 1.5 sq. mm area shall be used to interconnect between
each detector and the control panel.

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-35/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

4.0 SYSTEM INSTALLATION

The Contractor shall allow for obtaining of any approvals, permits, inspections. etc., which
may be required by the local authorities. In case of document approvals, these shall be
made available to the Engineer; once they are obtained, a copy for the Engineer's retention
shall be provided by the Contractor.

The Contractor shall submit material submittal, installation method statement, inspection test
plan & testing & commissioning procedure to Marafeq Qatar for review and approval.

The Contractor shall show on the shop drawings any modifications or any additions needed
to suit the system to be installed.

All installations shall be carried out by qualified specialist subcontractor under the
supervision of qualified site Engineer having experience in undertaking such installations.
The subcontractor should have approved certificate from Marafeq authority/WOQOD.

Piping installation shall comply with NFPA 54 and international fuel gas code for installation.

Piping in system shall be run as directly as is practicable from one point to another and with
as few restrictions, such as bends.
Pipes supports, hangers, paints and labels should be as per the international
standards/Codes. Gas pipe paint colour shall be golden yellow RAL 1004, Arrow marker will
also marked on the gas pipeline.

Gas shaft to be open to sky and shall be easy access is provided.

All welding of metallic piping shall be in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure vessel
Code, Section IX.

All joints to be welded unless otherwise required example the connection to threaded valves
or pressure gauge.

During the fabrication and installation of Pressure Reducing Station, Contractor is requested
to follow the contents of design documents/drawings reviewed by Marafeq.
Furthermore Marafeq will perform necessary inspection and witness in order to make sure
that the quality of Pressure Reducing Station is satisfactory in accordance with Marafeqs
minimum requirements stated in the technical guidelines.

All the materials to be used in these installations shall be approved by Marafeq Qatar and
delivered on site wherever possible, in the maker's packing.

The ENGINEER RESERVES THE RIGHT TO INSPECT ALL INVOICES IN ORDER TO


ENSURE THIS FACT.

All materials are to be stored in a proper manner and when installed are to be in clean
undamaged condition. All items are to be protected from continuous exposure to direct sun
light.

The Contractor shall ensure that all items installed are maintained in good working condition
until accepted by the Engineer.

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-36/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

The Contractor shall guarantee all materials and workmanship for 400 days from the date of
issue of Practical Completion Certificate in respect of the works, by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall keep on site one complete set of drawings which are to be marked up
along and in conjunction with the site progress. These drawings may then be used to form
the basis of the 'As-built' drawings.

The set of drawings kept at site shall be made available for reference by the Engineer or his
representative at any time so requested.

The Contractor shall prepare and produce a Master Instruction Manual for all equipments,
system and installations constructed. It shall include schematic diagrams and all necessary
instructions for the proper operation and maintenance of equipment, system and
installations.

The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer for approval two sets of 'As-installed ' drawings
showing the works together with any other information necessary for operation and
maintenance. After approval is obtained, three copies of each drawing shall be supplied. In
addition, two sets of copy negatives for each drawing shall be handed over to the Client.

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-37/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

5.0 PNEUMATIC TESTING

The gas contractor required to submit written method statement for Pneumatic testing to
Marafeq Qatar for approval but not limited to below:

a. Gas tightness: test piping by filling with air or inert gas such as carbon dioxide or
nitrogen. Do not use water or oxygen. Apply pressure from pressurized cylinder or
with air pump. Measure pressure with mercury manometer or inclined gauge
calibrated in increments not greater than 0.1 psi (0.07 g/mm2) Isolate pressure
source during test.

b. Gas tightness: test piping to 1 1/2 times normal working pressure or 30 psig (10
g/mm2), whichever is greater. There is to be no drop in shut-in pressure for two
hours. Test for leaks by applying soap solution to joints fittings and valves. Do not
use flame to look for leaks.

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-38/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 19

6.0 COMMISSIONING

The gas contractor required to submit written SNG commissioning procedure and check list
to Marafeq Qatar for approval but not limited to below:

a. Check for gas tightness: prior to turning on gas, close all shut-off valves at
appliances. Check that all openings are capped or plugged and that pipe work is
complete.

b. Check for gas tightness: turn on gas, attach manometer calibrated in increments of
2.5 mm water column to appliance outlet and open main shut-off valve momentarily.
No discernible drop in pressure is to occur during 3 minutes. Should pressure drop
he noted, identify cause, make necessary repairs and repeat tests until perfectly tight
system is assured.

c. Purge system after checking for tightness by disconnecting pilot piping of appliances
at outlet of pilot valve. Do not purge piping into combustion chamber of appliance. Do
not purge piping into confined spaces or areas where there are sources of ignition
unless precautions are taken to perform this operation safely by ventilation

AEB-1179-11-REV.00 S-19-39/49
PLUMBING, SNG AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
SECTION 20

DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 20

SL NO. TITLE OF SPECIFICATION

20.1.00 DRAINAGE GENERAL

20.1.01 Site

20.1.02 Site Conditions

20.1.03 Definitions

20.1.04 Scope of Works

20.1.05 Compliance with Specifications and Regulations

20.1.06 Drainage System

20.1.07 Programme

20.1.08 Contract Drawings

20.1.09 Working Drawings

20.1.10 Co-ordination of Drawings

20.1.11 Material Submittals

20.1.12 Materials Inspection

20.1.13 Alternative Materials

20.1.14 Setting Out of Works

20.1.15 Safety

20.1.16 Contractors License

20.1.17 Permits

20.1.18 Damage to Plant and Materials

20.1.19 Protective Finishes

20.1.20 Works Test and Inspection

20.1.21 Operation and Maintenance Manuals

20.1.22 As Built Drawings

20.1.23 Period of Maintenance

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-20-1/27


DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 20

20.2.00 DRAINAGE SYSTEM NETWORK

20.2.01 Pipes and Fittings

20.2.02 Above Ground Pipes

20.2.03 External and Below Ground Pipes

20.2.04 Rain Water System Pipes

20.2.05 Pipes and Fittings, Installation and Inspection

20.2.06 Manholes

20.2.07 Sump Pumps

20.2.08 Manhole Covers and Gully Gratings

20.2.09 Holding Tanks

20.2.10 Protection of Drainage Pipes

20.2.11 Testing and Commissioning

20.2.12 Schedule of Approved Manufacturers

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-20-2/27


DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 20

20.1.00 GENERAL

20.1.01 SITE

Lusail AL ERKYAH, Lusail, Qatar

20.1.02 SITE CONDITIONS

Unless otherwise specified, all the Drainage Materials & Equipments shall be capable
of withstanding the following site conditions:

1. Maximum Ambient : 50 Deg C (Dry Bulb) in Summer


& 8 Deg C (Dry Bulb) in winter

2. Altitude : Sea Level

3. Maximum Relative Humidity : 95 %

4. Maximum Wind Velocity : 140 Km. per Hour

5. Prevailing Wind : North and North Westerly

6. Storms : Dusty Sporadic and Irregular

7. Annual Rainfall : 50 mm between January & April

20.1.03 DEFINITIONS

The following terms and abbreviations used in these specifications / drawings shall
mean:

Site : The Locations where the works are to be carried out.

QCS : Qatar Construction Specifications

KAHRAMAA : Qatar general electricity and water corporation

KAHRAMAA Regulations :Regulations issued by the KAHRAMAA regarding the


installation of Electrical equipment, Wiring & Air-
conditioning of residential and commercial Buildings.

BS : British Standard Specifications

CP : British Standard Code of Practice

Tender Drawing : The Drawing on which the tender is based and the
Schedules therein.

Working Drawings : The Drawings prepared by the Contractor for the


purpose of execution of work at site.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-20-3/27


DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 20

As Built Drawings : This is the true record of the actual work carried out
at site.

Works : To include the provisions for al the materials and works


to be carried out by the contractor as per these
specifications and for the satisfactory completion of the
installation.

Approved : Shall mean APPROVED by the consultant in writing.

Submitted : Shall mean SUBMITTED to the Consultant in writing.

Accepted : Shall mean ACCEPTED by the Consultant in writing.

Provide : Shall mean, supply, install, test and commission.

Install : Shall mean install, test and commission.

Furnish : Shall mean supply only.

Concealed : Shall mean hidden from normal sight in the shafts,


ceiling spaces, walls, slabs or partitions.

20.1.04 SCOPE OF WORKS

The scope of works consists of furnishing, installing, commissioning and testing the
complete foul, waste and storm water drainage systems along with all associated
manholes as indicated on the contract drawings, and in accordance with this
specification and the requirements of section 20 of the QCS and shall be installed to
BS 8301:1985 (formerly CP 304).

The contractor shall provide all supervision, labor, materials, equipment, machinery,
and any other items necessary to complete the systems in all respects.

The drainage system shall include the following:

1. UPVC soil, waste, vent, rainwater pipes as shown on drawing and specified
elsewhere.
2. Floor drains, floor gulleys, gully traps, overflows, bottle traps as shown on
drawings and specification
3. Manhole, Manhole Covers, Gully Grating, & Steps.

20.1.05 COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFICATION AND REGULATIONS

Project Specification to be followed as applicable and shall also to comply to QCS.

All materials used shall be as per approved materials, any changes shall have a
written approval by the Engineer.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-20-4/27


DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 20

The installation of the works covered in this section shall be in accordance with this
specification and with the requirements of the relevant authorities, State of Qatar
Public work authority Drainage affairs and to the relevant B.S specification.

The equipment shall conform to the British Standard specifications & codes of
practice (current editions including all amendments)

It is the responsibility of contractor to study the specification in detail and clear all
doubts or issues that need clarification in order to execute the job. The tender
drawings are guide lines and the contractor must prepare the detailed shop drawings
and get approval from consultant prior to the execution of job at the site, No delay
or any compromise on the specification or quality of work is accepted on any
account.

Any apparatus, appliance, material or work not shown on the contract drawings but
mentioned in the specification or vice versa, or any incidental accessories or work
necessary to make the work complete and perfect in all respects and ready for
operation, even if not particularly specified shall be supplied and installed or carried
out by the contractor without any additional costs.

Applicable Standards:

1. All Local Codes


2. National Standard Plumbing Code
3. NSF National Sanitation Foundation
4. PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute
5. ASSE (American sociaty of safety engineers)

20.1.06 DRAINAGE SYSTEM

The Drainage system includes UPVC pipe works including all the necessary fittings
and fixtures for the safe disposal of Soil, Waste, and Rain Water from the project site,
along with the provisions of various Manholes and Holding tanks, finally connected to
the Municipal drainage and disposal system available in the vicinity.

The scheme for the drainage system is detailed and provided in the Contract
drawings for handling and disposal of:

a) Soil Water
b) Waste Water &
c) Rain Water

a. Soil and Waste Water Discharge

Twin pipes system for separate discharge of soil and waste shall be provided as
required in accordance with the State of Qatar Public Works Authority (Ashghal),
Drainage Affair Manual.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-20-5/27


DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 20

Drainage will be provided for all sanitary fixtures, sinks, floor drains and parking
areas thorough vented soils and waste risers. Offset venting will be provided in order
to ensure a proper functional system. The drainage system will be divided into a
waste and soil system. The waste system will collect water from sinks, floor drains,
etc. The soil system will collect water from toilets and urinals. The soil and waste
system will be connected directly to the municipality sanitary system.

b. Storm Water Drainage System

Storm water drainage shall be provided for roof and ground level parking areas. The
storm water run-off generated from the roof of the building and ground floor parking
will be collected through roof drain & road gulleys and convey to the storm water
holding tank located at basement level-1 and pumping out to the tanker filling point..

c. Car Park Drain - Basement

Car park drains are provided for the basements car parks. All the drains shall be
collected to the holding tank through sand & oil interceptors. Lift pumps (Duty &
standby) are provided for empting holding tanks.

20.1.07 PROGRAMME

The Contractor shall produce the work program based on CPM (Critical Path
Method) or Bar chart, indicating the time required for various activities and operations
to complete the project in time. The following points shall be highlighted in the
Program:

1. Mobilization
2. Drawings and Material Submittals
3. Approvals
4. Equipment Deliveries
5. First Fix
6. Main and Sub-Main Piping Works
7. Second Fix
8. Fixing of Accessories
9. Testing
10.Commissioning and Handing Over

20.1.08 CONTRACT DRAWINGS

The Drainage tender drawings related to this project have been listed in the Schedule
of Drawings enclosed with the specifications. The tender drawings have been
prepared to show the tenderer the principal equipment and general arrangement
required for the project.

These drawings do not indicate every detail of the work. It is the Contractors
responsibility to check the positions / locations at site. All dimensions are tentative
and shall be checked with the Architectural and Structural drawings. Any discrepancy
shall be brought to the attention of the consultant in writing at the time of tender.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-20-6/27


DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 20

Particular attention shall be paid to the positioning of Floor Gullies, Drains, and other
accessories, in relation to the Interior finishes and locations of various appliances.
The Contractor is deemed to have studied the services drawings based on all the
local regulations and have included in his prices for all builders work associated with
these drawings.

20.1.09 WORKING DRAWINGS

The contractor shall prepare the working drawings in a scale of 1:100 for plans, 1:20
for details and 1:200 for site plan, and submit them for the Consultants approval. The
contractor shall project the following in the above drawings:

i. Actual pipe work routes boxes indicating the sizes of all branches, bends and
other accessories and fittings.

ii Typical connection details of the various drainage systems of appliances, like


Water Closets, Wash Basins, Faucets, Bidets, Sinks etc.,

iii Sections and Elevations of Installations with co-ordination details in respect to the
other services Installations like, Electrical, Air-conditioning & Ventilation and
Plumbing.

iv Levels, Center Lines and Slopes/Gradients of the pipe work installations.

20.1.10 CO-ORDINATION OF DRAWINGS

The Main contractor shall produce working drawings for building works required for
the services showing the integration of all the services i.e., Electrical, Mechanical,
Plumbing and Drainage systems.

The Main contractor should ensure that all the working drawings are properly
coordinated before submitting to the consultant for approval. All the services shall be
installed in such a manner so as to avoid conflict with each other and maintain the
clearances required between each of them as per the prevailing regulations.

20.1.11 MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

The materials offered for approval shall be strictly in accordance with the
specifications and tender drawings.

The contractor shall submit in triplicate, the technical literature for each item of the
equipment, he intends to use for the project, to the consultant for the necessary
review and approval.

If in case the technical literature is not available, then a sample shall be submitted: in
the absence of either of these, typed technical data shall be submitted duly
supported by letter of the manufacturer for confirmation.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-20-7/27


DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 20

In case of items involving aesthetic, like Floor Gullies, Floor Clean Outs, Manhole
covers ( if located Inside of Building) etc., samples must be submitted for approval
along with the materials submittals.

Each copy of the submittals shall be numbered and signed with the technical
literature clearly highlighted, indicating the model, type and capacity of the equipment
offered. The consultant shall retain two for copies and return one, either Approved or
Not Approved, to the contractor.

The contractor shall maintain and submit a status report every month, of all the
Materials submittals of the Drainage Materials & Equipments in the following perform
to the consultant:

i. Submittal Number
ii. Type of Material
iii. Manufacturer / Local Agent
iv. Date of Approval
v. Date of Order / Order Number
vi. Mode of Delivery (Air, Land, or Sea)
vii. ETA on Site
viii. Status as on date of Report

a. Equipment Supply

All the equipments for the project shall be procured only through the appointed local
agent in Qatar, who shall be the authorized agent and be able to supply the spare
parts etc., for the items anytime in the future. The contractor shall mark the same
clearly on the submittals (item No. iii. above).

In case of any item/s required to be purchased abroad directly, for valid reasons,
then the contractor shall mention the same in the submittal and obtain approval from
the consultant specifically.

b. Equipment Size and Delivery

Each item of equipment shall be delivered to site in sections suitable for installations
in position designated, bearing in mind the location, type of structure, construction
program and the method of access.

c. Design References

Any design, for any of the systems, detailed on the Tender drawings, which requires
amendment or differs from that available at the time of construction, due to the
change in the manufacturers range of production or availability etc., The contractor
shall discuss the matter and obtain a readily available alternative from the
Consultant. Accordingly, the contractor shall make a fresh submittal based on the
Consultants advise and obtain approval to provide the revised system.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-20-8/27


DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 20

In such cases, no cost consideration will be applicable, as the contractor is deemed


to have studied the drawings and specifications thoroughly as well as obtained
clarifications during the tender stage, before submitting his quotation for the
execution.

20.1.12 MATERIAL INSPECTION

The contractor shall inform the consultant within one week upon receipt of all the
materials at the site and arrange for the inspection of the same. Any material used at
site, which is not approved earlier specifically, shall stand rejected without notice.

Any item on supply differs from the one shown on the submittal catalogue copy or the
sample submitted, would also be rejected at site. In such cases, the contractor shall
make a fresh submittal for the item and obtain approval from the Consultant. Any
time delay caused due to the above shall be on the Contractors account.

The contractor will have to remove the rejected materials from the site and replace
with approved materials at his own expenses. In the event the contractor fails to do
so, the client will have the liberty to carry out such works from other agencies and
debit the ensuing amount to the Contractor.

Materials Storage

The contractor shall be responsible for the safekeeping and storage of the materials
at site and provision of such covering as may be necessary to ensure that on
completion, all items are handed over in sound condition with all protective finishes
undamaged. The material storage, handling, & protection at site shall be strictly as
per Q.C.S.

20.1.13 ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS

Equipments and Materials used as the basis for the design are listed in the Schedule
of Manufacturers. Only in case if the specified item/s are not available due to valid
reasons. Only in such cases, the Consultant will consider the alternatives, before the
tender is accepted and the Consultants decision will be final regarding the matter.

In case the alternatives are accepted, the Consultant will confirm the acceptance of
the same in writing. During the execution of the contract, no alternative equipment,
materials or fittings will be permitted other than the approved and the contractor is
fore-warned that any item provided by him which is not up to the specification, must
be replaced at his own expense. In cases where time will not permit, then such
replacements shall be at the clients convenience, but at the Contractors expenses
etc.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-20-9/27


DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 20

20.1.14 SETTING OUT OF WORKS

The location of Floor Drains/Gullies, routes, Manholes etc., as indicated on the


tender drawings is tentative and may require some variation to suit the site
requirements. The exact positions must be checked and shown on the detailed
working drawings as indicated on the detailed Architectural drawings and co-
coordinated with furnishing and other services.

20.1.15 SAFETY

The contractor shall maintain all the safety procedures at site to protect manpower
and machinery. The Main Contractor shall provide all the means to achieve the
Safety standards required and protect the manpower, materials and equipments at
any point of time.

20.1.16 CONTRACTORS LICENSE

The Main contractor shall ensure that the Sub-Contractor appointed for Drainage
works shall be one of the approved to carryout and maintain such work.

The Contractor shall submit the qualifications and experience particulars of the
Mechanical Engineer, Foreman, and technicians (plumbers) to be employed on the
project and obtain approval from the consultant. Once the approval is obtained, the
contractor shall not replace the staff from site. In case the same becomes necessary,
re-approval should be obtained and the new staff shall continue with the old staff for
a minimum period of 30 days before the later is withdrawn from the site. In such
cases, the proposed replacement personnel shall have a minimum of 5 years local
experience. The consultant will reject any application with less than 5 years of
experience.

20.1.17 PERMITS

The contractor shall obtain all necessary permits prior to commencement of work and
obtain current record drawings of existing services already installed. All applications
for permits etc., shall be made in writing to the authorities, a minimum of 7 days prior
to the execution of the work. The Contractor is fully responsible for obtaining the
necessary permits from the authorities for his work site as well as for any connected
works to others.

20.1.18 DAMAGE TO PLANT AND MATERIALS

Any plant or material which is damaged by any means whatsoever, shall not be used
in the works. Should the contractor wish to rectify such damage in order to utilize the
plant or materials in the permanent works, the matter shall be brought to the attention
of the Engineer, who in turn shall conduct a proper survey after which the necessary
instructions will be issued. Only after obtaining a written permission from the
Engineer shall any remedial work be carried out.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-20-10/27


DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 20

Any damaged Plant or Material allegedly brought to a as-new condition following


such a procedure, shall only be accepted after the technical appraisal & discretion of
the Consultant, whose decision in such matters shall be final and binding.

20.1.19 PROTECTIVE FINISHES

The protective finishes must be provided on all materials and Equipments used in
this contract to ensure that no deterioration is caused by the interaction of local
climatic conditions.

All materials shall be inspected by the contractor or his representative before


shipment to ensure that finishes are in accordance with the specifications.

20.1.20 WORKS TEST AND INSPECTION

Provision shall be made by the contractor for the Consultant or Consultants


representative to witness hydraulic tests as specified elsewhere, of major pipe work
executed by the contractor.

The Consultant will advise the contractor at the time of commencement of the
contract the list of works that to be inspected and the contractor shall give the
Consultant the required notice in the required Inspection form, of the date on which
the plant will be ready for testing.

The Consultant will signify his intention to attend the tests or accept the contractor's
test sheets. The contractor shall supply all the Inspection Forms and Test certificates
in original to the Consultant / Client at the time of handing over the project.

20.1.21 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

The contractor shall provide three copies in the form of bound documents the
operating instructions and maintenance manuals indicating the following:

a. Step by step operating procedures.


b. Preventive maintenance schedule.
c. Technical literature.
d. Spare parts list
e. Manufacturer's name, address, telex no., Fax no. telephone no., and contact
person. - Local as well as overseas.
f. Work test certificates, if any.
g. Routine Test results carried out at site.

20.1.22 AS BUILT DRAWINGS

After the working drawings have been approved, no alteration to the drawings shall
be carried out without the consent of the Engineer. These changes shall be
supported by sketches and incorporated on the AS-BUILT drawings, which are to
be submitted to the Consultant within one month of completion of the project.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-20-11/27


DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 20

Two sets of drawing CDs along with three sets of drawings printout shall be
submitted after approval of the Engineer for onward submission to the client.

20.1.23 PERIOD OF MAINTENANCE

The contractor shall guarantee the entire Drainage System installed against Faulty /
improper materials and or workmanship for the period of maintenance of 400 days
(Four Hundred) from the date, the installation is tested, commissioned and accepted
by the Consultant. Also where longer guarantee or warranty periods are otherwise
declared, for any equipment or materials such longer terms shall apply.

The Contractor shall submit a single guarantee for whole of the works, which states
that all parts of the work are in accordance with the contract documents during the
period of maintenance, the contractor shall repair any deficiencies, within 24 hours of
notification at no additional cost to the contract.

In case if the Contractor fails to attend to any such faults as mentioned above within
the specified time, then the client shall make own arrangements to rectify the fault
but nevertheless at the Contractors expense.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-20-12/27


DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 20

20.2.00 DRAINAGE SYSTEM NETWORK

20.2.01 PIPES AND FITTINGS

All uPVC pipes and fittings shall be manufactured under BS 4514 for Internal above
ground and BS 4660 for the Internal & external under ground installations.

Applicable sub-sections of Section 20 of Qatar Construction Specifications (QCS)


shall be applied to all drainage works.

20.2.02 ABOVE GROUND PIPES

Soil, Waste and Overflow Systems

Reference should be made to the following Codes and Standards:

BS 3943 : 1979 Specification for plastic waste traps


BS 4514 : 1983 Unplasticized PVC soil and ventilating pipe fittings and
accessories.
BS 5254 : 1976 Polypropylene waste pipe and fittings
BS 5255 : 1976 Plastic waste pipe and fittings
BS 5572 : 1978 Code of Practice for Sanitary pipe work
(Formerly CP 304)
CP 312 : 1973 Plastic pipe work (Thermoplastic material) Part 1 & 2

Materials and color: pipes and fittings shall be in UPVC in gray, white .

Socketed fittings shall be solvent-welded with plain-ended pipes. Seal ring expansion
joints shall be provided where required.

The system shall be compatible with buried drain system. Weathering Apron
(solvent-weld socket) shall be solvent-welded to the soil, waste, vent pipes for
weather flashing around pipe at roof.

Adjustable, plastic coated steel holder bats shall be used to support pipes or secure
fittings. Galvanized mild steel support bracket with packing piece shall be used for
horizontal pipes. Smaller pipes and fittings shall be secured to wall by zinc-plated
steel brackets.

Drain schedule:

"FG" Floor drains inside toilets & Kitchen

Nickel bronze/stainless steel 150mm x 150mm strainer with multi-inlet PVC


floor drain trap/ gully trap

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-20-13/27


DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 20

"FD-1" Floor drains inside garbage chute

Nickel bronze/ stainless steel 150mm x 150mm strainer with PVC floor drain
trap/ gully trap

"FD-2" Floor drains near spool area.

Nickel bronze/stainless steel 200mm x 200mm strainer with multi-inlet PVC


floor drain trap/ gully trap

"FD-3 Floor drains inside mechanical rooms

Floor drain, Dura-Coated cast iron body with bottom outlet, combination
invertible membrane clamp and adjustable collar with seepage slots and
polished nickel bronze, strainer 150MM SQ

"RG" Road gullies, basement-1,2&3

300MM Square top drain, Dura-Coated cast iron body with bottom outlet,
seepage pan and combination membrane flashing clamp and frame for
heavy-duty cast iron loose slotted grate.

20.2.03 BELOW GROUND DRAINAGE PIPES


(uPVC Buried Drain System) for piping within the building

The uPVC pipes and fittings shall comply with BS EN 1401-1:1998(formerlyBS 4660)
and BS EN1401-1:1998(formerly BS 5481), comprising complete drainage system,
compatible to soil waste and rainwater system and where appropriate shall bear the
Kitemark.

Materials and Colours : buried drain system pipes and fittings shall be uPVC with
polypropylene seal retaining caps. Underground fittings shall be coloured golden
brown, approximately to BS 381 C : number 414. Seal retaining caps and seal rings
are black. Rodding eyes shall be provided where required.

uPVC solvent weld socket seal / lip and lip seal / lip seal shall be used.

Where necessary, lip seal / lip seal slip coupling shall be used.

Solvent Cements

Solvent cements should comply with either BS 6209 for non pressure pipework

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-20-14/27


DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 20

Sealing Rings

Sealing rings should be made from natural or synthetic rubber complying with BS
2494.

20.2.03.1 EXTERNAL DRAINAGE PIPES

Vitrified Clay (VC) Pipes and Fittings for Buried Drainage System

Vitrified clay pipes and fittings for drains and sewers shall comply with the
relevant provisions of BS EN 295. Pipes shall have spigot and socket joints
complying with the relevant provisions of BS EN295. Joints shall have
elastomeric joint seals. Complying with the relevant provision of ISO 4633 or, BS
2494 (Type D) and shall be obtained from the pipe manufacturer. For pipes up to
150 mm diameter, push-fit (sleeve type) polypropylene flexible couplings may be
used in place of spigot and socket joints.
All other requirements related to the manufacture, inspection and testing of
vitrified clay pipes shall be in accordance with the relevant provision of Section 8,
Sewerage.
Pipes up to and including 450mm diameter shall be "Extra Strength" and
pipes above 450mm diameter shall be "Super Strength" as specified in Table 3 of
BS 65.
Pipes shall be supplied with an approved rubber ring joint and shall have clearly
defined indelible marks to show their Class. Except on the approval of the
Engineer's Representative pipes shall not exceed 1.2m in length exclusive of the
depth of any socket.
All materials used shall be obtained from one manufacturer only. The integration
of any materials from different manufacturers shall not be acceptable.

20.2.04 RAIN WATER SYSTEM PIPES

As shown on drawings rain water system in uPVC complying with BS 5481 and
bearing the Kite mark shall be provided. uPVC rainwater systems shall be in gray as
approved by the Engineer.

All joints should remain watertight under working conditions. Pipes inside the building
should be capable of withstanding the water tightness of a positive pressure of 38
mm water gauge for at least 3 minutes.

Rainwater pipes should be firmly supported without restricting thermal movement.

Rainwater pipes shall not be encased in concrete columns structural walls and it is
important rainwater pipes in casing or ducts are accessible for maintenance, repair,
and replacement.

Relevant regulations of BS 6367, BS EN 12056-3:2000 shall be followed to ensure


good performance of the rainwater system.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-20-15/27


DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 20

BS 4514 UPVC soil and vent pipes fittings and accessories and BS 4576 UPVC
rainwater goods may be used for rainwater system.

Roof drainage shall be by gravity outlets (gargoyles) sahll be madeof cast iron
complying with BS CP 308: 1974 and the building regulations 1976.

When jointing UPVC pipes, a gap should be left between spigot end of pipe and
shoulder of socket that it enters in order to allow for thermal movement.

UPVC pipes shall be with solvent weld sockets usable with seal ring adapter.

20.2.05 PIPES AND FITTINGS, INSTALLATIONS AND INSPECTION

A. Pipe Supports, Brackets and Hangers

All pipe work shall be adequately supported in such manner as to permit free
movement due to expansion contraction, vibration or other changes in the system.
Supports shall be arranged as near as possible to joints and changes in direction.
Spacing of supports shall comply with Table 13 contained in British Standard BS
5572: 1978 Code of Practice for sanitary pipe work.

Vertical stacks shall be adequately supported at the base to stand the total weight of
the riser. Under no circumstances shall branches from vertical rising pipes be the
means of support for the vertical pipe work.

High temperature PVC waste pipe work 32 mm, 40 mm and 50 mm shall be


supported using two-piece holder bats screwed to the wall using round head zinc
plated wood screws.

Brackets shall be galvanized steel and be rigid. Where soil and ventilation pipes are
suspended from the underside of slab, they shall be held rigid in position. Single
angle iron supports may be used for pipe work up to 500 mm from underside of slab.
Double angle iron supports shall be used for pipe work 500 mm, 1000 mm from the
underside of the slab. All supports shall be proprietary brand and manufactured from
galvanized steel. Double angle iron braces shall be installed on both single and
double angle iron supports at 6 meter centers of vertical and horizontal runs of pipe
work and anchored as necessary.

B. Floor clean-outs

Floor clean-outs shall be provided as indicated on the contract drawings and as


required even not on the drawing.

C. Roof Termination

All soil ventilation pipes shall terminate 300 mm above the point of exit from the
services duct.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-20-16/27


DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 20

D. Jointing

Jointing of UPVC and high temperature PVC shall be "O" ring and solvent welded.
Prior to jointing all pipe work fittings and accessories shall be thoroughly cleaned.
Pipe work shall be cut square, end chamfered, swarf, and dust removed. Prior to
jointing pipes and fitting should be checked for correct position and alignment and
marked to ensure accurate assembly.

Where 'O' ring joints are to be used pipes shall be marked for insertion depth "O" ring
placed in ring seal prior to application of small quantity of lubricant or petroleum jelly
around the chamfered spigot end. The pipe shall then be inserted into the socket
joint finally adjusted to the correct insertion depth.

Where solvent joints are to be used, special care shall be taken to ensure both spigot
and socket are free from all dirt, grease, and swarf. Solvent cement shall then be
applied liberally and evenly to both socket and spigot prior to inserting spigot into
socket. The joint shall immediately be cleaned of surplus solvent with a dry cloth
around newly formed joint.

Jointing of W.C outlet to UPVC pipe work shall be by means of either a straight or
bent connector as required complete with rubber seal ring and suitable connection for
W.C spigot outlet.

E. Laying Rigid Pipe

Each pipe immediately before being laid shall be carefully brushed out and inspected
for defects.

Pipes with flexible joints, except concrete protection is provided as specified


hereafter shall be laid on a well compacted bed of granular bedding material
extending for the full width of the trench and with sufficient material at the side to
permit the pipes to be worked into the granular material and firmly supported to true
line and level. Sufficient space should be left to enable the joints to be made tested
and inspected but the contractor shall ensure that at least three quarters of the pipe
length is fully supported. After the pipeline has been tested and approved by the
Consultant the trench shall be carefully filled to 300 mm above the crown of the pipe
with granular material.

F. Laying Plastic Pipe

All operations involving the laying, bedding, jointing, backfilling etc., of pipes plastic
materials shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations
subject to the approval of the Consultant.

G. Setting Out and Pipe Alignment

All pipes and pipelines shall be laid to the lines and depths shown on the drawings or
as otherwise directed by the Consultant.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-20-17/27


DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 20

All pipelines shall be laid accurately to line and gradient so that, except where
otherwise specified, the finished pipeline is in a straight line in both horizontal and
vertical planes. Where shown on the drawings or other wise permitted by the
consultant small changes of direction shall be achieved by deflection at joints within
the maximum permitted by the manufacturer. Where the angle of the bend required
is greater than that obtainable by joint deflection then manufactured bends of the
appropriate degree shall be used. Manufactured bends shall only be used where
shown on the drawings or where otherwise permitted by the Consultant.

All pipelines forming part of a drainage system shall be laid to the specified line and
levels so that every pipeline lies in straight line in both horizontal and vertical planes
between successive manholes on the line. No bends will be permitted other than at
manholes.

Every pipe shall placed in position individually and shall be set out accurately to the
line and level required. All setting out to line and level of both pipelines and individual
pipes shall be achieved by methods approved by the Consultant.

Where pipelines of constant gradient are to be laid the contractor shall provide, fix
and maintain at such points as may be directed by the Consultant properly painted
sight rails and boning rods of pre-determined measurement for the boning in of
individual pipes to correct alignment. The sight rails shall be situated vertically over
the line of pipes or immediately adjacent to and there shall at no time be less than
three sight rails in position on each length of pipeline under construction to any other
gradient.

If the contractor wishes to propose an alternative method of controlling pipeline


alignment, he shall submit his proposed method to the Consultant for approval.

Inspections

Written notice on prescribed form shall be given for the purpose of inspection,
measurement and testing for each of the following cases:

i. Setting out completed


ii. Excavations completed
iii. Beddings Laid
iv. Drainage Laid and ready for testing
v. Drainage bedding cover complete and compacted
vi. Backfilling complete and compacted with ground level finish complete and ready
for final testing.

20.2.06 MANHOLES

CEMENT AND CONCRETE

All cement used in all classes of concrete for drainage and sewerage works whether
above or below ground level shall be sulphate resistant cement complying with BS
4027.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-20-18/27


DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 20

Cement mortar shall consist of sulphate-resisting cement and sand gauged by


volume in suitable boxes in the proportions given in Section 20 of QCS.

Unless otherwise specified cement mortar shall be SRC Class No. 1.

The ingredients of the mortar shall be mixed in an approved mechanical mixer or


shall be mixed together dry on a clean wooden stage until the mix is homogeneous in
colour. Water shall then be added through a rose in sufficient quantity to give no
more than stiff workability. The whole shall then be turned until perfectly mixed.

Mortar shall be used within 30 minutes of mixing and shall not be remixed or worked
up again after it has stiffened. Any mortar that has commenced to set shall be
removed from the works.

Rendering to manhole benching shall comprise a 12 mm thick layer of approved


epoxy mortar.

MANHOLES

A. General

Manholes shall be provided at all changes in direction gradient or diameter.

The manholes shall be of the sizes and grades indicated on the Contract drawings
and fully comply with CED regulations and QCS Section 20.

B. Block work Manholes

Blockwork manholes shall be constructed on the drain lines in the positions and to
the dimensions indicated on Drawings or as directed on site by the Consultant.

The type of construction for each chamber shall be as indicated on the Contract
Drawings.

Concrete blocks used for chamber construction shall be manufactured with sulphate
resisting cement and shall comply with the requirements of QCS Section 20-5-1.
Hollow concrete blocks shall be filled solid with concrete Grade SRC 20.

Each manhole shall be built on a minimum of 75 mm thick blinding of grade SRC 25


concrete which shall be laid on a dry clean firm foundation free from unsound
material. If the bed of the excavation is wet, the top surface of the blinding shall be
coated with an approved waterproofing material.

Foundation base slabs shall be cast in-situ Mass concrete foundation, slabs shall be
of concrete Grade SRC 20. Reinforced concrete foundation slabs shall be of
concrete Grade SRC 30.

Internal and external faces of the blockwork walls shall be finished with 12 mm thick
SRC mortar rendering Class 1.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-20-19/27


DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 20

All internal faces of manhole chambers except benching and vitrified clay channel
fittings shall be painted with one primer coat and tow final coats of black bitumen
coating water proofing solution to BS 3416, type 1 or equal and approved.

All exterior faces of manhole chambers shall be protected with 1000 gauge polythene
membrane with hardboard protection against damage during backfilling.

Where indicated on the Drawings, manhole cover frames shall be supported on solid
precast concrete bricks, manufactured from Grade SRC 30 concrete.

Reinforced cover slabs shall be provided where manhole access opening are less
than the internal dimensions of the manhole chamber.

The cover slabs shall be mounted by ductile or cast iron manhole covers and frames
of the quality specified. The covers in roads and paved areas shall be accurately set
on precast concrete brick-work to the level and slopes of the roads or pavements.

Manhole inverts shall be constructed of half section vitrified clay channels. Half
section vitrified clay channel branch bends shall be used for branch connections.
Benching in manholes shall be carefully formed according to the number, diameter
and positions of the incoming and outgoing pipes. The benching in the manholes
shall have vertical sides extending from the vitrified clay channels at least to the level
of the crown of the highest pipe. The benching shall be sloped towards the channels
at a gradient of 1 in 10 or as otherwise detailed on the drawings.

The benching shall be rendered with a 12 mm thickness of epoxy mortar rendering.


The ends of all pipes entering and leaving the manhole are to carefully cut to shape
to suit the internal dimensions of the manholes, and shall project through on the
inside, the benching being continued round the pipe to form a fillet.

20.2.07 SUMP PUMP

Electric submersible sewerage pumps shall be suitable for wet sump or dry pit
installation and for intermittent or continuous operation.

Motor shall be of the synchronous squirrel cage type IP 68 rating, hermetically


enclosed within the stator housing. Stator shall be wound with double lacquered wire
and subsequently triple dipped to provide insulation in accordance with IEC 85
temperature class F (155 deg. C) Stator winding over temperature shall be
prevented by bimetallic thermal switches or thermostats embedded in each of the
stator phase windings. Motor shall be designed for a maximum of 15 starts/hour.

Cable entry glands shall be suitable designed to effectively seal the junction box from
the surrounding liquid and to mechanically restrain the cable to avoid distortion of the
gland rubbers and to prevent kinking of the cable adjacent to the cable entry.

Motor shaft shall be stainless steel and mounted on robust pre greased rolling
element bearings. The shaft seal assembly shall comprise of two independent
mechanical face seals mounted in tandem with an interposing oil chamber to cool the
seals and to act as an additional leakage barrier. Seal combination shall be high
wear resistant tungsten carbide.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-20-20/27


DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 20

Motor and pump casing constructed of cast iron.

Pump casing shall be smooth profiled volute geometry for clog free operation fitted
with replaceable inlet wear rings.

Impeller shall be dynamically balanced screw depending on the pump selection and
duty specified.

Pump set shall be supplied with a control panel complete with breakers, fuses
starters duty/standby pump selector switch, pump on/off/fault indicator lights, auto
change over facility etc. Panel enclosure shall be to IP 65.

Pump operation shall be automatic controlled through float switches installed in the
sewage collection pit.

Pumps shall be supplied with all accessories including foot bends, guide rails
stainless steel lifting chains, float switches etc.

20.2.08 MANHOLE COVERS AND GULLY GRATINGS

Manhole covers and frames shall comply with BS 497:1976 and shall be of the sizes
and types as shown on the contract drawings.

In general, manhole covers and frames shall be one of three types, as follows unless
otherwise specified:

Heavy Duty to BS 497 Grade A


Medium Duty to BS 497 Grade B

Heavy Duty

All manholes installed in roadways or trafficked areas shall be heavy to BS 497


Grade A. Reference M.A 60.

The cover and frame shall be made from ductile iron and the cover shall be of the
loosely bolted double triangular type with three-point suspension to provide stability
under load.

Medium Duty

All manholes installed external to buildings, but not in roadways or trafficked areas,
shall be medium duty to BS 497 Grade B1.

The over and frame shall be of grey or ductile iron and the cover shall be either
rectangular or circular as specified in the Manhole Schedule. Such manholes shall
incorporate a single seal between cover and frame. Following flushing out and testing
of the drainage system, the sealing groove shall be filled with grease to provide an
airtight seal.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-20-21/27


DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 20

Step Irons

Step irons shall be manufactured from galvanized malleable cast iron and shall
comply with BS 1247 and be of the general purpose or precast concrete manhole
pattern as applicable.

The tail length shall be 230 mm for both manhole types.

22.2.09 HOLDING TANKS

The construction of holding tanks shall be in accordance with BS : 8007, 1987. All
cement shall be sulphate resisting and comply with BS : 4027, 1980. All reinforced
concrete base slab walls and cover slab shall be cast in situ using grade 25 concrete
and comply with BS:8110, Part 1, 1985.

The tanks shall be constructed to take into account the ground conditions, strictly in
accordance with the structural engineering details.

Holding tank shall be painted internally with epoxy mortar or pitch epoxy (2 coats)
and externally with one coat of bituminous paoint. Two 600x600 mm. access
manholes shall be provided one at ehach end, with heavy duty manhole covers as
shown in the contact drawing. Galvanized step irons to BS: 1247, 1975 shall be
provided at 300 mm. centers both vertically and horizontally, the first being 450 mm.
below cover level. The inlet and oulet foul sewer shall be cast iron and have a
puddle flange located within the holding tank wall. The inlet shall be via a cast iron
inlet tee complete with access cap.

20.2.10 PROTECTION OF DRAINAGE PIPES

A. Concrete Protection to Pipelines

All underground drainage pipe work shall be surrounded with 150 mm thick Grade
SRC 20 sulphate resisting concrete, along its entire length in the following locations:

1. All drainage below buildings or structural elements


2. All drainage with less than 600 mm cover.
3. Drainage with a cover of between 600 mm and 1200 mm where there is
vehicular traffic over the ground above the drain line.
4. Elsewhere as indicated on the Contract drawings.

The required depths of concrete bed and height of concrete backfill shall be as
indicated on the Contract drawings.

Where a concrete bed and surround is specified, a minimum of 75 mm blinding of


concrete Grade 25 shall first be laid over the full width of the trench.

The pipes shall be laid jointed and supported on precast concrete blocks, which shall
be separated from the barrel by 25 mm thick timber packing.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-20-22/27


DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 20

After the pipeline has been tested and approved by the Consultant the top of the
concrete bed shall be thoroughly cleaned and additional concrete Grade SRC 20
carefully placed and compacted under and around the pipe to a height of at least 150
mm above the crown of the pipe.

Where pipes with flexible joints are to be surrounded 13 mm thick fiberboard or


polystyrene sheets shall be fixed at the pipe coupling joint extending for the full cross
section of the remaining concrete bed and surround, and accurately cut to fit the
profile of the pipe.

B. Pipelines Protection From Extraneous Material

The pipelines shall at all times be kept free of extraneous material and when work is
not is progress the open ends of the pipeline shall be securely plugged with an
approved watertight plug or stopper. Claw type plugs or any type liable to damage
the pipe will not be approved.

The contractor shall clear the inside of each fitting and pipe length immediately prior
to jointing and shall swab all fittings and pipe lengths to remove all dirt sand or other
matter that may contaminate the pipeline.

The entire absence of foreign matter from the completed line shall be a condition
precedent to acceptance.

C. Trenches

All trenches excavation shall comply fully with all the relevant clauses of QCS
Section 20-2 and this specification, Trench depths shall be sufficient to allow the
installation of the required pipe bedding, granular or concrete as specified. Generally,
the depth of cover shall not be less than 600 mm unless otherwise indicated on the
contract drawings.

Trench width shall be in accordance with the following table:

Nominal Minimum Maximum


Pipe Bore Width Width
mm mm mm

100 430 630

150 490 690

200 560 760

The maximum and minimum widths shall apply from the bottom of the trench to 300
mm above the crown of the pipe.

Should the trench be excavated to a depth greater than is required in the opinion of
the Consultant. The contractor shall fill in the bottom of the trench to the required
depth with concrete or other such materials as the Consultant may direct.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-20-23/27


DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 20

In the case of trench excavations made in roads, footpaths, verges, central strips or
within 5 meters of buildings the contractor will be required to execute the works so as
to minimize damage and disturbance. Vertical trench side will generally require
support by timbering or other suitable means. Under-cutting of trench sides will not
be permitted.

D. Granular Bedding Material for Rigid Pipes

Granular bedding material for rigid pipes shall consist of gravel or broken stone and
shall be a suitable "all in" ballast or stone.

For pipes up to 1200 millimeters nominal bore the material shall be graded 12
millimeters to 5 millimeters all passing 12 millimeters and not more than 20 percent
passing 5 percent millimeters B.S sieve.

E. Backfilling Excavation

After compaction of the granular bed and surround or completion of concrete


surround, the trench shall be backfilled using selected excavated material free
from all rocks, large hard on objects and builders debris of greater than 40 mm.
Backfilling shall take place immediately after the specified operations preceding it has
been completed and shall be in layers of 150 mm. each fully compacted over the full
width of the trench. Power rammers and vibrators shall be used to compact
backfilling when the cover over the crown of the pipe exceeds 0.5 meters.

20.2.11 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

All drainpipes shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of BS 8301 and
the requirements of Section 20 5.3.1 of the Q.C.S.

The Consultant shall witness all drainage tests. The contractor shall give the
Consultant a minimum of 24 hours notice of all tests. The contractor shall also
provide test sheets set out in an agreed manner for each drain section to be tested.

The contractor having ensured that water, electricity and other necessary supplies
are available shall set to work the completed works or part thereof, at the instruction
of the consultant and make the necessary adjustments to ensure correct functioning.

After the installation or part thereof has been set to work and adjusted, the contractor
shall demonstrate its operation at a time selected by and to the satisfaction of the
Consultant. Tests shall be in accordance with British Standard BS 6700: 1987.

The tests shall demonstrate:

a. That equipment provided complies with the specification in all particulars and is of
adequate capacity for its full rates of duty.

b. That all items of plant and equipment operate quite sufficiently to meet the
specified requirements.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-20-24/27


DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 20

c. That all instruments protection and control devices etc, are correctly calibrated
and accurate.

d. That all drainage runs satisfy the required water tests.

The details of method of carrying out the recording of tests shall be agreed with the
Engineer. The Client's representative and the Consultant shall be at liberty to be
present at tests and to participate in the tests. This shall not relieve the contractor of
his responsibilities for carrying out the tests satisfactorily.

The contractor shall make all records during the tests and on completion thereof shall
provide the Consultant with a test report and record, both in triplicate. The contractor
shall also provide all test instruments together with skilled supervision and adequate
labor for carrying out the tests.

A. Proving Tests

All under slab, underground drainage, soil, and waste system shall be cleaned down
and thoroughly flushed out to remove all dirt within each pipe work system.

After each system has been flushed and each draw off fitting opened and the
drainage, soil and waste system shall be checked for satisfactory rate flow. Particular
attention shall be given to groups of sanitary fittings to ensure satisfactory flow when
a number of fittings are flushed and air not drawn into the system via any trap.

B. Water Test

All drains shall be tested before backfilling immediately after the drain has been
properly laid on the correct trench bed and after joining materials has had time to set.
A water test pressure of 1.3 m head above the soffit of the drain shall be applied at
the high end, but not more than 2.4 m head at the low end. The test shall be carried
out on lengths of drain not less than half the distance between manholes, all to be
agreed with the Consultant on site. The lower end of the drain shall be plugged and
the higher end shall have a stand pipe not less than 1.2 m high. The drain shall be
filled, taking care to eliminate trapped air. After repair of leakage due to defective
pipes, joints and plugs the drain under test shall be left for one hour to allow water
absorption by pipes and fittings. The loss of water over a period measuring vessel at
intervals of ten minutes and noting the quantity of water required to maintain the
original level in the standpipe. For drains up to 300 mm diameter, the water quantity
added shall not exceed 0.06 liter per hour per 100 linear meters per millimeter of
nominal bore of the drain under test.

All drains shall be tested for a second time as described above after correct bedding
cover and selected backfill have been consolidated and the finished surface
complete.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-20-25/27


DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 20

C. Air Test

A gauge in the form of a "U" tube shall be connected to the plug fixed at one end of
the length to be tested and all junctions and connections to the sewer on drain shall
be plugged. Air shall then be pumped in from the other end of the drain under test
until a pressure equal to 100 mm of water is indicated on the gauge. Without further
pumping, the pressure shall not fall more than 25 mm during a period of five minutes.

Air tests shall be carried out after 3 p.m. and all pipe work shall be shaded from the
sun at all times. Should an air test fail a water test shall be carried out as described in
this specification.

D. Profile Test

A hardwood ball of an approved profile shall be drawn through all foul drains from
manhole to manhole and through branch foul drains before soil pipes, gullies and
W.C's are filled. The diameter of the ball or profile shall differ from the nominal
internal diameter of the pipe by not more than 6 mm or by not more than 45% of the
nominal internal diameter of the pipe whichever is the greater difference.

During commissioning all manhole cover shall be removed and water flow tests shall
be carried out to ensure that the drains are flowing at their designed capacity and
that they are free of debris.

E. Manhole Test

All manholes shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of BS 8301 and the
requirements of Section 20 of Q.C.S.

The Consultant shall witness all manhole tests. The contractor shall give the
Consultant a minimum of 24 hours notice of all tests. The contract shall also provide
test sheets set out in an agreed manner for each manhole to be tested.

All concrete manholes cast in situ and precast concrete manholes shall be water
tests by plugging all necessary connections and filling the manhole with water to a
minimum height of 600 mm above the top of the benching. Water shall be added at
ten minute intervals until absorption has ceased. No change of water level shall occur
for an uninterrupted period of three hours.

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-20-26/27


DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 20

20.2.12 SCHEDULE OF APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

ITEM MANUFACTURER COUNTRY OF ORIGIN

1. UPVC Pipes HEPWORTH UAE


SDQATAR QATAR
TERRAIN UK
MARLEY UK

2. UPVC Fittings HEPWORTH UAE


SDQATAR QATAR
TERRAIN UK
MARLEY UK

3. Rain Water Outlet ZURN USA


JOSAM USA
HEPWORTH UAE
MARLEY UK/ QATAR
COSMOPLAST UAE
TERRAIN UK

4. M.H. Cover SAUDI CAST KSA


CRESENT INDIA
PAM ACCESS UK
ST. GOBAIN FRANCE

5. Floor Gully, Cover WADE USA


ACO USA
ZURN USA
FROST UK
JR SMITH UK
COSMOPLAST UAE

6. Sump Pump NOCCHI ITALY


FLYGT SWEDEN
GRUNDFUS DENMARK
EBARA ITALY
HOMA GERMANY

AEB-1179-11- REV.00 S-20-27/27


DRAINAGE INSTALLATION
SECTION 21

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

21.0. ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

21.1 General

21.1.1 Site

21.1.2 Site Conditions

21.1.3 Definitions

21.1.4 Scope of Works

21.1.5 Compliance - Specifications and Regulations

21.1.6 Electrical Supply System

21.1.7 Program me

21.1.8 Contract Drawings

21.1.9 Working Drawings

21.1.10 Co-Ordination of Drawings

21.1.11 Material Submittals

21.1.12 Material Inspections

21.1.13 Alternative Materials

21.1.14 Setting Out of Works

21.1.15 Safety

21.1.16 Contractor's License

21.1.17 Permits

21.1.18 Damage to Plant and Materials

21.1.19 Protective Finishes

21.1.20 Labels and Identification

21.1.21 Works Testing and Certificates

21.1.22 Operation and Maintenance Manuals

21.1.23 As Built Drawings

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-1/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

21.1.24 Period of Maintenance


21.2.25 Connection Fee

21.2 ELECTRICAL SUPPLY AND DISTRIBUTION

21.2.1 Transformers

21.2.2 MV Panels

21.2.3 Bus-Bar Risers Trunking

21.2.4 Power Factor Correction

21.2.5 Sub-Main Switchboards/Electrical Digital Meter

21.2.6 Distribution Boards

21.2.7 Air Circuit Breaker

21.2.8 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers

21.2.9 Miniature Circuit Breakers

21.2.10 Fuses

21.2.11 Motor Starters

21.2.12 Contactors Overload and Control Relays

21.2.13 Fuse Switches and Isolators

21.2.14 Cables

21.2.15 Conduits

21.2.16 Cable Trunkings and Trays

21.2.17 Electrical Ducts

21.2.18 Light Fittings

21.2.19 Wiring Accessories

21.2.20 DOOR INTERCOM SYSTEM)

21.2.21 Emergency Lighting

21.1.22 Telecoms and Data

21.2.23 Security System

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-2/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

21.2.24 Standby Diesel Generator Set

21.2.25 Uninterruptible Power Supply System

21.2.26 Earthing and Lightning Protection

21.2.27 Lighting Control System

21.2.28 Master Antenna and Satellite Reception System

21.2.29 Testing and Commissioning

21.2.30 Fire Alarm System

21.2.31 Warranty and Guarantee

21.2.32 Spare

21.2.33 Schedule of Mounting Heights

21.2.34 Schedule of Approved Manufacturers

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-3/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

21.1 GENERAL

21.1.1 SITE

For site location, refer to the Project Drawing and Specifications.

21.1.2 SITE CONDITIONS

Unless otherwise specified, all the Electrical Equipments shall be capable of


withstanding without deterioration the following site conditions:

1. Maximum Ambient Temperature: 50oC (Dry Bulb) in Summer Temperature


& 5oC (Dry Bulb) in Winter.

2. Design Ambient Temperature: 50oC.

3. Maximum Metal Surface Temperature Exposed to Sun: 85oC.

4. Altitude: Sea Level.

5. Maximum Relative Humidity: 100 %.

6. Design Ambient Humidity: 100%.

7. Maximum Wind Velocity: 162 Km per Hour.

8. Prevailing Wind: North and North Westerly.

9. Storms: Dusty, sporadic and Irregular.

10. Annual Rainfall: 50mm 100mm between January & April.

21.1.3 DEFINITIONS

The following terms and abbreviations used in these specifications / drawings shall
mean:

1. Site: The Locations where the works are to be carried out.

2. Contractor: The Contractor to be appointed for the works covered by this


section of the specification.

3. Consultant: The Clients appointed representative and advocate with


regards performance of these works and the Author of this specification
document.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-4/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

4. QGEWC: Qatar General Electricity & Water Corporation

5. Q-TEL: Qatar Telecom

6. KAHRAMAA Regulations: Regulations issued by QGEWC for the


Installation of Electrical Equipment, Wiring & Air-conditioning of residential &
Commercial Buildings (February 2006 Edition).

7. IEE Regulations: BS 7671:2008 Requirements for Electrical Installations


(IEE Wiring Regulations 17 th Edition) issued by BSI.

8. BS: British Standard Specifications published by the British Standards


Institute (BSI).

9. CP: British Standard Code of Practice published by BSI.

10. Tender Drawing: The Drawing on which the tender is based and the
schedules contained there-in.

11. Working Drawings: The Drawings prepared by the Contractor for the
purpose of execution of work at site.

12. As Built Drawings: Which form an accurate and true record of the actual
work carried out at site.

13. Works: To include the provisions for all the materials and tasks to be carried
out by the contractor as per this specification and for the satisfactory
completion of the installation.

14. Approved: Shall mean APPROVED by the consultant in writing.

15. Submitted: Shall mean SUBMITTED to the Consultant in writing.

16. Accepted: Shall mean ACCEPTED by the Consultant in writing.

17. Provide: Shall mean, supply, install, test and commission.

18. Install: Shall mean install, test and commission.

19. Furnish: Shall mean supply only.

20. Concealed: Shall mean hidden from the normal line of sight in shafts, ceiling
spaces, walls, slabs, partitions, enclosed voids..

21. Exposed: Shall mean visible to building occupants in spaces, which may be
reached without the use ladders or any other temporary means of access.

22. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association (USA).

23. NEC: National Electrical Code (Standard 70) (USA) published by the NFPA.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-5/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

24. IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission.

25. EN: Euronorm (European Harmonized Standards).

26. UL: Underwriters Laboratories.

27. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (USA).

28. ANSI: American National Standards Institute (USA).

29. DIN: German Industrial Standards.

30. VDE: Verband De Utscher Elektro Techniker (Germany)

21.1.4 SCOPE OF WORKS

The scope of works to be executed under this contract includes the supply,
installation, testing and commissioning of the electrical materials and equipment as
per the specifications drafted in these sections and the drawings.

The contractor shall provide complete installations for the project and other
associated works such as supporting structures, ancillary works etc. A brief
description of electrical works will be as follows:

1. Transformer: The transformer scope shall be by the Infrastructure


Consultant/Contractor.

2. MV Panels: Provide the MV Panel(s) within the Sub-Station as shown upon


the drawings, inclusive of the main cables and connections to the
associated Sub-Main Distribution Boards, fixed loads and Distribution
Boards.

3. BUSBAR TRUNKING: Provide The Bus-bar risers including the accessories,


used for the project as shown upon the drawing and shall conform to BS EN
60439-2 (IEC 439) and with the relevant provisions of the 16th edition of
the Wiring regulations BS 7671.

4. Power Factor Correction: Provide the MV Power Factor Correction


Cubicle(s) within the Sub-Station as described within this specification and
as shown upon the drawings.

5. Sub-Main Distribution Boards: Provide the Sub-Main Distribution Boards


within the development as described within this specification and as shown
upon the drawings.

6. Distribution Boards: Provide the lighting & power Distribution Boards within
the development as described within this specification and as shown upon
the drawings, inclusive of the final circuit cables and connections to the
associated lighting & power loads.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-6/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

7. Motor Control Centres: Provide the Motor Control Centres within the
development as described within this specification and as shown upon the
drawings.

8. HVAC Plant: Provide the power & controls wiring to all the items of HVAC
plant within the development as described within this specification and as
shown upon the drawings.

9. Lighting & Power: Provide the lighting & power installations within the
development as described within this specification and as shown upon the
drawings.

10. Emergency Lighting: Provide the Central Battery Emergency Escape


Lighting installations within the development as described within this
specification and as shown upon the drawings.

11. Wiring Containment: Provide the Wiring Containment for all the electrical
systems within the development as described within this specification and
as shown upon the drawings.

12. Security System: Provide the CCTV, Access Control & Intruder Alarm
installations within the development as described within this specification
and as shown upon the drawings.

13. Audio-Visual System: Provide the Audio-Visual System installations within


the development as described within this specification and as shown upon
the drawings.

14. Telecom & Data: Provide the Telecom & Data networks and installations
within the development as described within this specification and as shown
upon the drawings.

15. Standby Generation: Provide a complete Standby Generator installation


within the development inclusive of the change-over switch gear and
essential power distribution within the development as described within this
specification and as shown upon the drawings.

16. Uninterruptible Power Supplies: Provide the UPS units, power distribution
and connections installations within the development as described within
this specification and as shown upon the drawings.

17. Earthing & Lightning Protection: Provide the earthing networks,


conductors, connections & bonds for the complete Earthing & Lightning
Protection systems within the development as described within this
specification and as shown upon the drawings.

21.1.5 COMPLIANCE - SPECIFICATIONS AND REGULATIONS

The installations shall comply with the following regulations:

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-7/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

1. Electrical Installations: These shall comply with the KAHRAMAA


Regulations issued by QGEWC for the Installation of Electrical Equipment,
Wiring & Air-conditioning of residential & Commercial Buildings (2010
Edition).

2. Equipment & Fittings: All equipment & fittings shall conform to the relevant
British Standard specifications & codes of practice (current editions including
all amendments).

3. Fire Detection & Alarm Installations: Shall comply with the coordinated
requirements of NFPA 72, BS 5839-1:2002 and the Qatar Civil Defense
Department whose requirements shall take precedence over all others.

4. Emergency Lighting Installations: Shall comply with the coordinated


requirements of NFPA 101, BS 5266-1:2005, and the Qatar Civil Defense
Department whose requirements shall take precedence over all others.

5. Earthing & Lightning Protection Installations: Shall comply with the


requirements of BS7430:1998 & BS EN 62305:2006.

6. Qatar Construction Specification Shall comply with the requirements of


latest Edition from QCS.

If the Contractor wishes to use installations or equipments other than those


specified and conforming to different standards, then a written approval from the
consultant shall be obtained. However the consultant reserves the right to reject
any applications for such approvals without the right to appeal.

Any apparatus, appliance, materials or works not shown on the contract drawings
but mentioned in the specification or vice versa, or any incidental accessories or
work necessary to make the work complete and perfect in all respects and ready for
operation, even if not particularly specified shall be supplied and installed or carried
out by the contractor without any additional costs to the contract sum.

Clarification shall be obtained at the tendering stage by the Contractor from the
Consultant in writing for any installations where it is perceived that the extent of
specified installations and the expected content or works are not clear. In case of
any discrepancy arises afterwards or during the construction, the Consultants
decision shall be final and binding on all such matters.

21.1.6 ELECTRICAL SUPPLY SYSTEM

The following supply system is prevails in the state of Qatar:

1. Supply: Alternating current (ac), 4-wire.

2. Nominal Voltage: 415 V phase-phase & 240 V phase-neutral or earth


(tolerance 6%).

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-8/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

3. Nominal Frequency: 50 Hz (cycles per second) (tolerance 0.5%).

4. Number of wires: 4 (3 phases + 1 neutral) + Earth conductor.

5. Neutral: Full capacity and same size as phase conductor, solidly earthed to
transformer star point at MV Panel (TN-S).

NOTE:

All the equipment and accessories shall be fully rated and compatible with the
above Qatar electricity supply parameters. No other variants will be permissible i.e.,
220/380 V or 115/220 V etc. equipments will be summarily rejected.

Throughout this specification and on the drawings references are made to the
ranges of nominal voltages (rms values for ac) and these are defined as follows:

1. Extra Low Voltage (ELV): Normally not exceeding 50 V between the


Conductors or to Earth.

2. Low Voltage (LV): Normally exceeding Low voltage but not exceeding 250
V between Conductors or to Earth.

3. Medium Voltage (MV): Normally exceeding 250 Volts but not exceeding 650
Volts, whether between the Conductors or any conductor and Earth.

4. High Voltage (HV): Normally exceeding 650 Volts between conductors or


between any Conductor and Earth.

21.1.7 PROGRAMME

The Contractor shall produce the work program based on the CPM (Critical Path
Method or Bar chart, indicating the time required for various activities and
operations to complete the project on time. The following construction milestone
dates shall be highlighted in the Program:

1. Mobilization
2. Drawings and Material Submittals
3. Approvals
4. Equipment Deliveries
5. First Fix
6. Main and Sub-Main Distribution Equipment
7. Second Fix
8. Fixing of Light Fixtures
9. Testing
10. Power-on dates for each phase of the works for both temporary and
permanent power supplies.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-9/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

11. Commissioning and Handing Over.

21.1.8 CONTRACT DRAWINGS

The electrical tender drawings related to this project have been listed in the
Schedule of Drawings enclosed with the specifications. The tender drawings have
been prepared to show the bidder the principal equipment and general arrangement
required for the project.

These drawings do not indicate every detail of the work and as such are not to be
interpreted as working drawings. It is the Contractors responsibility to check the
positions / locations at site. All dimensions are tentative and shall be checked
against the Architectural and Structural drawings. Any discrepancy found shall be
brought to the attention of the consultant in writing at the time of tender.

Particular attention shall be paid to the positioning of lighting points in relation to the
furniture and equipments. The Contractor is deemed to have studied the services
drawings based on all the local regulations and have included in his prices for all the
necessary installations and builders work associated with these drawings.

21.1.9 WORKING DRAWINGS

The contractor shall prepare the working drawings to a scale of 1:50 for plans, 1:5
for details and 1:200 for site plan, and submit them for the Consultants approval.
The contractor shall detail the following in the working drawings:

1. Actual conduit routes with circular junction boxes indicating the size of
conduit, number and size of wires it is carrying, where it is to rise up or fall
to below etc.

2. Separate drawings shall be prepared for both the small power and lighting
layouts.

3. Reflected ceiling plans showing coordinated services, light fittings and


other ancillary equipment such as fire alarm, A.C diffusers etc., with
respect to the ceiling.

4. Mounting arrangement of light fittings, cables, cable trays, trunking etc.

5. Sectional views for coordinating the electrical wiring and other services i.e.,
Air-conditioning, Drainage and Plumbing to the Consultants requirements.

21.1.10 CO-ORDINATION OF DRAWINGS

The Main contractor will produce working drawings for building works required for
the services showing the integration of all the services i.e., Electrical, Mechanical,
Plumbing and Drainage systems.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-10/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

The Main contractor is to ensure that all the working drawings are properly
coordinated before submitting to the consultant for approval. All the services shall
be installed in such a manner so as to avoid conflict with each other and maintain
the clearances required between each of them as per the QGEWC Regulations.

21.1.11 MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

a. General

The materials offered for approval shall be strictly in accordance with the
specifications and tender drawings.

The contractor shall submit in triplicate, the technical literature for each item of the
equipment intended for use on the project, to the consultant for the necessary
approval.

If in case the technical literature is not available, then a sample shall be submitted:
in the absence of either of these, typed technical data shall be submitted duly
supported by the written confirmation from the manufacturer for confirmation.

In the event that items involving aesthetics, like light fittings, wiring accessories,
smoke / heat detectors, etc., samples must be submitted for approval along with the
materials submittals.

Each copy of the submittals shall be numbered and signed with the technical
literature clearly highlighted, indicating the model, type and capacity of the
equipment offered. The consultant shall retain two for copies and return one, either
Approved or Not Approved, to the contractor.

The contractor shall maintain and submit to the Consultant a status report every
month, of all the materials submittals for electrical equipment in the format that
follows:

1. Submittal Number
2. Equipment / Model Number
3. Manufacturer / Local Agent
4. Date of Approval
5. Date of Order / Order Number
6. Mode of Delivery ( Air, Land or Sea )
7. ETA on Site
8. Status as at the date of the Report

b. Equipment Supply

All the equipment for the project shall be procured only through the appointed local
agent in Qatar, who shall be the authorized agent and be able to supply the spare
parts etc., for the items anytime in the future. The Contractor shall mark the same
clearly on the submittals (item No. 3. above).

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-11/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

In case of any item/s required to be purchased direct from outside the country (only
for valid reasons) then the contractor shall mention the same in the submittal and
obtain prior and specific written approval from the consultant.

c. Equipment Size and Delivery

Each item of equipment shall be delivered to site in sections suitable for installation
in the position designated, bearing in mind the location, type of structure,
construction program and the method of access.

d. Design References

Any design, for any of the systems, detailed on the Tender drawings, that require
amendments or differs from that available at the time of construction, due to the
change in the manufacturers range of production or availability etc., then the
contractor shall discuss the matter with the Consultant and obtain an approved
readily available alternative. Accordingly, the contractor shall make a fresh
submittal based on the Consultants advice and obtain approval to provide the
revised system.

In such cases, no cost consideration will be applicable, as the contractor is deemed


to have studied the drawings and specifications thoroughly as well as obtained
clarifications during the tender stage, before submitting his quotation for the
execution.

21.1.12 MATERIAL INSPECTIONS

The contractor shall inform the consultant within one week upon receipt of all the
materials at the site and arrange for the inspection of the same by the Consultant.
Any material used at site not approved specifically prior to delivery shall stand
rejected.

Any item of supply found found at site that differs from the examples shown in the
submittal catalogue or the submitted sample will also be rejected at site. In such
cases, the contractor shall make a fresh submittal for the item and obtain approval
from the Consultant. Any time-delay caused due to the above shall be on the
Contractors account.

The contractor will have to remove the rejected materials from the site and replace
with approved materials at his own expense. In the event the contractor fails to do
so, the client will have the liberty to carry out such works with the assistance of other
agencies and debit the ensuing amount to the Contractor.

The contractor shall be responsible for the safe keeping and storage of the
materials at site and provision of such protective covering as may be necessary to
ensure that on completion, all items are handed over in sound condition with all

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-12/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

protective finishes undamaged. The material storage, handling & protection at site
shall be strictly as per the relevant QCS sections.

21.1.13 ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS

Equipment and materials that shall be used as the basis for the design are listed in
the Schedule of Manufacturers. The bidder may submit alternative proposals for
any of the equipment or material for the Consultants consideration but only in cases
where the specified item(s) are not available due to valid reasons. The Consultant
will only consider such alternatives before the tender is accepted and the
Consultants decision will be final regarding the matter.

If the proposed alternatives are accepted, the Consultant will confirm the
acceptance of the same in writing. During the execution of the contract, no
alternative equipment, materials or fittings will be permitted other than the approved
and the Contractor is cautioned that any item provided by him which is not up to the
specification requirements, must be replaced at his own expense. In cases where
time will not permit, then such replacements shall be at the clients convenience, but
nevertheless at the Contractors expense.

21.1.14 SETTING OUT OF WORKS

The location of switches and other electrical accessories as indicated on the tender
drawings is tentative and may require some variation to suit the site requirements.
The exact positions must be checked and shown on the detailed working drawings
as indicated on the detailed Architectural drawings and coordinated with the Interior
Design scheme and other services.

21.1.15 SAFETY

The Contractor shall maintain all the necessary safety procedures at site to protect
manpower and machinery. Temporary electricity supplies either generated on-site or
obtained from supply authorities shall be effectively earthed and protected with
suitable earth leakage circuit breakers.

The socket outlets used for construction shall have enclosures and construction with
ingress protection rating IP67, and shall be of the industrial type with suitable plugs
etc. to comply with BS EN 60309. The cables and socket outlets shall be protected
against mechanical damage at site. The assembly of the socket outlets shall be
properly wired and mounted on purpose made racks fabricated out of sheet steel
and angle iron. These racks shall be securely fixed on the wall at convenient places
and shall also be earthed. Wooden racks will not be allowed to be used for this
temporary supply.

The cables shall also be properly supported on the wall. Only those wires used for
the final connections from the socket outlets to the tools will be allowed to lie on the
floor preferably protected against mechanical damage.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-13/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

The Contractor shall provide single line wiring scheme for the construction site
temporary power supplies for the approval of the Consultant and carry out the works
strictly in accordance with QGEWC Regulations.

21.1.16 CONTRACTORS LICENSE

The Main contractor shall ensure that the Sub-Contractor appointed for Electrical
works shall have a valid license from the QGEWC. The grade of license shall also
be in accordance with the total load of this project. A copy of the License shall be
submitted to the Consultant.

The Contractor shall submit the qualifications and experience particulars of the
Electrical Engineers, Electrical Foreman and Electricians to be employed on the
project along with their QGEWC license copies, and obtain approval from the
consultant. Once the approval is obtained, the contractor shall not replace the staff
from site. In case the same becomes necessary, re-approval should be obtained
and the new staff shall continue with the old staff for a minimum period of 30 days
before the later is withdrawn from the site. In such cases, the proposed
replacement personnel shall have a minimum of 5 years local experience. The
consultant will reject any application with less than 5 years of experience.

21.1.17 PERMITS

The contractor shall obtain all necessary permits prior to commencement of work
and obtain current record drawings of existing services already installed. All
applications for permits etc., shall be made in writing to the relevant authorities, a
minimum of 7 days prior to the execution of the work. The Contractor is fully
responsible for obtaining the necessary permits from the authorities for his work site
as well as for any works in connection with others.

21.1.18 DAMAGE TO PLANT AND MATERIALS

Any plant or material that is damaged by any means whatsoever shall not be used
in the works. Should the contractor wish to rectify such damage in order to utilize
the plant or materials in the permanent works, the matter shall be brought to the
attention of the Consultant, who in turn shall conduct a proper survey after which
the necessary instructions will be issued. Only after obtaining written permission
from the Consultant shall any remedial work be carried out.

Any damaged plant or material allegedly brought to an as-new condition following


such a procedure, shall only be accepted after the technical appraisal and only at
the discretion of the Consultant, whose decision in such matters shall be final and
binding.

21.1.19 PROTECTIVE FINISHES

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-14/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

The protective finishes must be provided on all materials and Equipments used in
this contract to ensure that no deterioration is caused by the interaction of local
climatic conditions.

The Contractor or his representative shall before shipment inspect all materials and
equipment to ensure that the finishes are in accordance with the specifications and
protected against deterioration.

21.1.20 LABELS AND IDENTIFICATION

All main switches, isolating switches, distribution boards and main switch boards
shall have labels fixed to the outside by means of four small round-head screws.
Labels shall not be less than 50 mm x12 mm high, and engraved with 6 mm or
more, black lettering to indicate the purpose of the switch or distribution board. The
labels shall be of white / black / white Traffolyte substrates. The minimum height of
lettering for switchgear equipment shall be 6 mm.

Each distribution board shall be provided with a type-written circuit chart on


cartridge paper protected by a perspex envelope (pocket) and fixed to the inside of
the door. The circuit list shall give the number and details of points served by each
circuit and the rating of the fuse or circuit breaker. Sample lists shall be submitted
to the Consultant for approval before installation.

Each underground cable shall have its size and feeders name engraved / punched
on an aluminium strip 12 mm wide of 16 gauge thickness and shall be tightened on
each end where cables enter / come out of the trench or soil.

All accessible switchboards and distribution boards shall be provided with warning
plates DANGER - 440 VOLTS having 8 mm red letter on white vitreous enamel
plate.

21.1.21 WORKS TESTING AND CERTIFICATE

Provision shall be made by the Contractor for the Consultant or the Client or the
Client's representative to witness tests of major items of equipment at the
manufacturers works.

The Consultant will advise the contractor at the time of commencement of the
contract of the list of equipment to be inspected and the contractor shall give the
Consultant the required notice of the date on which the plant will be ready for
witness testing.

The Consultant will signify his intention to attend the tests or accept the contractor's
test sheets without witness. The contractor shall supply all the original test
certificates to the Consultant / Client at the time of handing over the project.

21.1.22 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-15/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

The contractor shall provide six copies of the project Operation & Maintenance
Manuals in the form of Lever Arch type bound documents indicating the following:

1. Step by step operating procedures.


2. Preventive maintenance schedule.
3. Technical literature.
4. Spare parts list.
5. Manufacturer's name, address, telex no., Fax no. Telephone no., and
contact person. - Local as well as overseas.
6. Works test certificates.
7. Routine Test results carried out at site.
8. Record Drawings (complete set).

The O&M Manuals shall also be provided as full content soft copies (x6) recorded
upon DVD discs.

21.1.23 AS BUILT DRAWINGS

After the working drawings have been approved, no alteration to the drawings shall
be carried out without the consent of the Consultant. These changes shall be
supported by sketches and incorporated on the AS-BUILT drawings, which are to
be submitted to the Consultant within one month of on-site project completion.

21.1.24 PERIOD OF MAINTENANCE

The contractor shall guarantee the entire Electrical System installed against faulty /
inappropriate materials and or workmanship for the period of maintenance of 400
days (Four Hundred) from the date, the installation is tested, commissioned and
accepted by the Consultant, and shall commence only after the availability of the
QGEWC mains Electric Supply at site. Also where longer guarantee or warranty
periods are otherwise declared, for any equipment or materials such longer terms
shall apply to these items.

The Contractor shall submit a single guarantee for the entire contract works, which
states that all parts of the work are in accordance with the contract documents. For
the duration of the maintenance period, the contractor shall repair any deficiencies,
within 24 hours of notification at no additional cost to the contract.

If the Contractor fails to promptly attend to any such faults as mentioned above
within the specified time, then the client shall make his own arrangements to rectify
the fault but nevertheless at the Contractors expense.

21.1.25 CONNECTION FEE

The Contractor shall allow for the KAHRAMAA connection fee in his price based on
the KW connected load for the project. However, if there is a change in the fee tariff
by KAHRAMAA at the time of Construction, / Connection, the Contractor shall not
be paid for any additional cost.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-16/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-17/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

21.2.00 ELECTRICAL SUPPLY AND DISTRIBUTION

21.2.01 TRANSFOMERS

1) SCOPE

a. This specification details about the requirements for design, manufacture,


testing, transporting, and delivery of 11/0.433KV Cast Resin (Dry Type)
distribution transformers,

b. The transformers shall be two winding, cast resin, natural air cooled (without
any forced ventilation) with metallic enclosure, and connected through
bushings in cable boxes.

c. The transformers are intended to be installed in Indoor Applications, in non-


air conditioned rooms. These transformers need to withstand the harsh
ambient and climatic conditions prevailing in the state of Qatar, as specified
in subsequent sections.

d. The rated capacities of the transformers shall be 1600KVA for continuous


service at 50 Hz to transform energy from 11kV (nominal) to 415/240V
(nominal).

2) ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

The following conditions prevail throughout in the State of Qatar

a. Altitude - low lying, generally close to sea level, no part exceeding 100m
above sea level.
b. Maximum air temperature 50oC ( 46oC typical).
c. Minimum air temperature 0oC ( 10oC typical)
d. Mean maximum summer air temperature, 45oC typical.
e. Mean maximum exposed sunlight temperature, 75oC
f. Solar radiation- peak, 1030 Watts/sq.m.
g. Humidity - 100% humidity is common throughout the year and may occur at
air temperature of 30oC or more.
h. Rainfall - very low on average. The winter season may bring infrequent very
heavy rainfall.
i. General atmospheric conditions: A hot atmosphere containing very fine,
highly penetrating dust particles. In parts the atmosphere contains a highly
corrosive salt laden sea mist. Prevailing winds generally from the north west,
mostly light but occasionally gusting in excess of 30 knots

3) SYSTEM CONDITIONS

The 11kV system has three phase, 3-wire system with star point earthed through
earthing transformer at 66/11KV primary sub-station.

1) Nominal Voltage ....................................................................11kV

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-18/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

2) Maximum Voltage .................................................................12kV


3) Maximum Symmetrical fault level .........................................25KA
4) Limited earth fault current through earthing transformer....4.5KA
5) Impulse Voltage.....................................................................75kV
6) Rated Frequency ...................................................................50 Hz

The LV System has 5 wires i.e. 3 Phase + Neutral + Earth. Neutral and earth is
directly shorted at the Distribution Substation end. A consumer earth terminal is
provided.

7) Nominal Voltage.................................................................. 415/240V


8) Highest Symmetrical fault level............................................44kA

1) The highest fuse rating(at LV Distribution Feeder Pillars).....400 A

Fault duration is limited by HRC fuses, Type-J to BS 88 (at LV Distribution Feeder


Pillars).

4) APPLICABLE STANDARDS

This Specification makes reference to the following documents:

Transformers
IEC 60076-11 Dry type Power Transformers.
IEC 60076 Power Transformers
IEC 60076-10 Power Transformers Determination of Sound Levels.
IEC 60905 Loading guide for Dry Type Power Transformers.
BS 2562 Specifications for Cable Boxes for Transformers, Flanges,
Bushings
BS 6435 Un-filled enclosure for dry termination of HV Cables for
transformers
Surface Preparation, Coating & painting Works
ISO 8501-1 to 4 Preparation of Steel Substrates before application of paints
and r elated products.

BS 381C 1980 Specification for Colours for Identification, Coding, and


Special Purposes.
BS EN ISO 1460 Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings on Ferrous metals Gravimetric
determination
BS EN ISO 1461 Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings on Ferrous metals- Specification
& test methods
ISO 2081 Electro-plated coatings of zinc with supplementary treatments
on iron or steel
ISO 2063 Thermal spraying- Zinc, aluminum and their alloys
BS 2569-2 Sprayed Metal Coatings Protection of Iron & Steel against
Corrosion
ISO 4628-1 to 5 Evaluation of Degradation of paint coatings
ISO 9227 Salt spray test
ISO 1519 Paints & Varnishes Bend test
ISO 2808 Paints & Varnishes Determination of film thickness
ISO 2409 Paints & Varnishes Cross cut test

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-19/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

ISO 1520 Paints & Varnishes Cupping test


ISO 6272 Paints & Varnishes Rapid deformation (Impact resistance)
test
ISO 6270 Paints & Varnishes Determination of resistance to humidity
ISO 11997 Paints & Varnishes Determination of resistance to cyclic
corrosion conditions

5) GENERAL DESIGN FEATURES

1) The design, construction & testing of Cast-resin transformers shall be generally


in accordance with IEC 60076-11, unless other-wise specified. Cable boxes,
mounting flanges, bushings shall generally conform to the respective standards
mentioned above, unless other-wise specified.

2) The transformer shall be fitted inside sheet steel enclosure having IP protection
degree of IP23D with natural air ventilation. However, all ventilation louvers and
other openings (if any) at top or bottom of enclosure should be closed with
strong non-corrosive metallic vermin screens (aperture size not more than 2mm
dia)

3) The Transformer or its Enclosure shall not be fitted with any forced ventilation or
exhaust fans. Only the natural air ventilation available in the civil building room
shall be able to provide necessary ventilation needs. The manufacturer needs to
provide necessary air flow requirements and sizing details for ventilation of
indoor civil room construction.

4) The transformers shall be capable of delivering full rated power continuously,


under specified service and ventilation conditions, without any thermal
overloading. The design & construction of transformer shall be such that, no de-
rating factor shall need to applied on account of specified temperature rise
limits, enclosure IP protection, and ventilation requirements.

5) The no-load LV output voltage of the transformers shall be 433/250V, when HV


side is applied with 11kV at center tap. This is to provide consumers with a
nominal supply voltage of 415/240V (three phase 4 wire/Single phase 2 wire,
50Hz), after permitted system voltage drops.

6) The sub-assemblies of the transformer shall be so designed that they should not
un-duly increase the vibrations or cause resonance. Anti-vibration mounts shall
be incorporated to reduce vibration & noise levels.

6. RATINGS AND CHARACTERISTICS

1) Service conditions & maximum winding temperature rise limits

a. Average of hottest month temperature of cooling air outside enclosure is


350C
b. The maximum temperature of cooling air outside enclosure may exceed
500C any time

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-20/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

c. The relative Humidity surrounding the transformer may reach 100%


d. Frequent Condensation may occur during high humid conditions
e. The surrounding air may contain very fine, highly penetrating, sand dust with
highly corrosive salt laden sea mist.
f. The maximum temperature rises of the windings shall not exceed by 850K
over an ambient temperature of 500C, when fully loaded inside in the
specified enclosure (along with vermin screen), without forced ventilation.

2) Ratings

a. Rated Power of Transformers : 500KVA/1000KVA/1600KVA


b. IP protection of Enclosure : IP23D + Vermin screen (not less than 2mm
aperture)
c. IK protection of Enclosure : not less than IK7 (2.0 joules)
d. Ventilation : Natural air cooling-AN (no forced ventilation)
e. Th. Insul. class of windings(HV/LV) : Class F/F
f. Winding material (HV/LV) : CU/CU
g. Voltage ratio : 11000/433V
h. No. of phases : 3-Phase
i. Connections : Delta- Star, as per vector group Dyn11
j. Rated frequency : 50HZ
k. Rated voltage (U) : 11kV
l. Maximum flux density : 1.6 Tesla at normal voltage and frequency
m. No-load current : 1% of transformer rated current
n. Tapping range & steps : +5% to -5%, in 4-steps each of 2.5%
o. Rated Insulation Levels

Parameter Name HV Side LV Side


Rated Voltage(U) 11KV 433/250V (at no load)
Rated Highest 12kV 1.1kV
Withstand Voltage(Um)
Rated Lightening Impulse 75Kv -
Withstand Voltage (peak)
Rated Power frequency 28kV 3kV
withstand voltage

p. Guaranteed values of losses (load & no-load), percentage impedances


measured at principal tap and corrected to reference temperature of 750C
shall be as mentioned below.

KVA Rating Max. No-load losses* Max. Load Losses* %


Impedance
1000KVA 2300 8800 5.45 10%
1600KVA 2875 12500 6.00 10%
*Note: The values specified for No-load & load losses are maximum values.

q. The climatic class of the transformers shall conform to: Class C1


r. The Environmental class of the transformer shall conform to: Class E2
s. The Fire behavior class of the transformer shall conform to: Class F1
t. Maximum dimensional limits of Enclosure: 2300 (L) x 1500 (W) x 2300 (H),
mm

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-21/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

u. IP protection of HV & LV Cable boxes: IP43

3) Short Circuit Ratings

Verification of transformers ability to withstanding short-circuit conditions, shall be


made through type testing in accordance with IEC 60076-5, at reputed independent
laboratories.

a. Thermal ability of the transformers to withstand short circuit current shall be


verified for a duration of 2 sec. The value of ambient temperature shall be
considered as not less than 500C for calculation of initial winding
temperature.

b. Ability to withstand dynamic effects of short circuit shall be verified by tests


(not by calculation method)

4) Tapping Range & Tapping Method

a) Off-circuit tapping selection shall be made by the use of bolted links on the HV
winding. The tapping range shall be 5% in steps of 2.5% For total 5 tap
positions.

b) Current carrying capacity of the bolted links for tapping shall be capable of
withstanding the rated short-circuits capacity.

5) Magnetic flux density

a) The flux density at any point of the magnetic circuit when the transformer is
connected on normal tap (3) and operating at normal voltage and frequency
shall not be more than 1.6 Tesla, and well below the saturation level. Proof of
this shall be submitted for verification in the form of B/AT magnetizing curves of
the magnetic core assembly

6) Thermal insulation Class of windings & temperature rise limits

a) Thermal insulation class of HV & LV windings shall conform to the class-F/F


(Insulation system temperature - 1550C) as defined on IEC 60085.

b) The maximum temperature rises of the windings shall not exceed by 850K over
an ambient temperature of 500C, when fully loaded the transformer inside the
specified sheet steel enclosure without forced ventilation.

7) Noise (Sound) Levels

a) Verification shall be done by conducting type test, through reputed


independent laboratory, for sound level measurements in accordance with
IEC 60076-10 under indoor conditions.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-22/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

b) The maximum values of sound pressure and sound power levels, measured
at a distance of 1 meter from the principal radiating surface, are as
mentioned below

8) Climatic, environmental and fire behavior classes

a. Special tests for climatic, environmental and fire behavior classes shall be
carried out as per the tests specified in clauses# 26, 27 and 28 of IEC
60076-11 in a reputed independent testing laboratory.
b. A transformer is considered to be passed these tests, when all the
prescribed tests are conducted on same transformer in the sequence as
given in table-5 of IEC 60076-11.
c. The climatic class of the transformers shall conform to: Class C1
d. The Environmental class of the transformer shall conform to: Class E2
e. The Fire behavior class of the transformer shall conform to: Class F1

7. RATING AND CONNECTION PLATES - MARKING OF TERMINALS

1) Rating and Connection Plates (as per IEC 60076-11/Cl-9)

Each Transformer, as well as the associated enclosure, shall be fitted with individual
rating plates of weather-proof materials, in a visible position, showing all the items
indicated below. The entries on the plate shall be indelibly marked (that is, by
etching, engraving, stamping, or by a photo-chemical process)

a. Dry-Type transformer
b. Compliance standards reference
c. Manufacturer Name
d. Manufacturers serial number
e. Month & Year of manufacture
f. KM Contact/Tender number
g. Insulation system temperature of each winding
h. Number of phases
i. Rated frequency
j. Rated voltage including tapping voltages
k. Rated current
l. Connection symbol
m. Short circuit impedance at 750C
n. Type of cooling
o. Insulation Levels
p. Degree of Protection

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-23/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

q. Environmental class
r. Climatic class
s. Fire behavior class
t. Total mass with and without enclosure

2) Marking of Terminals & start of windings

a. HV and LV Terminals shall be identified by characters of a type which


cannot be obliterated, marked on plates of durable and non-corrodible metal
securely fixed to a visible position.
b. The sequence of markings on HV terminals when read from left-to-right,
facing HV cable box, shall be as: A, B, C
c. The sequence of markings on LV terminals when read from left-to-right,
facing LV cable box, shall be as: c, b, a, n
d. Suitable markings to identify the start and end of windings shall be marked
on each physical winding.

8) GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND FITTINGS

1) Magnetic Core & connecting bus bars

a. The magnetic core shall be constructed from high grade, low watt loss, cold
rolled grain oriented silicon steel sheets, having specific watt loss of not
more than 0.95w/kg at 1.7T and 50Hz, and conforming to IEC 60404-8-
7:2008 and IEC 60404-1: 2000.

b. The construction of yoke and limbs shall be such that best space factor and
highest dimensional accuracy is achieved to ensure low core losses and
nose levels.

c. The core shall be coated with high performance surface insulation


material(s), conforming to the requirements of IEC 60404-11, to obtain good
insulation resistance and anticorrosion protection.

d. The clamping structure shall not allow any bolt piercing the core lamination in
order to avoid circulating current in the core and local concentration of the
flux in the yoke

e. The limb & yoke core joints shall be interleaved using modern step-lap
technology to achieve optimum conformity of magnetic flux pattern.

f. The core shall be pressed and banded and shall be clamped and bolted at
the top and bottom in such a manner as to ensure that no distortion shall
take place when the transformer is subjected to magneto motive forces
equivalent to those which would be present in the event of a total short
circuit being applied across the low voltage terminal with an infinite power
supply at normal voltage and frequency available, at the high voltage
terminals.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-24/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

g. All bus-bars shall be made of hard drawn high purity electrolytic copper with
electro-tin plating.

2) Windings

a. The HV windings of the transformers shall be made of high purity electrical


grade copper wire and shall be totally encapsulated in a glass-fiber
reinforced resin-cast insulation. The casting shall be made under vacuum in
such a manner that all air shall be totally evacuated from casting.

b. The casting shall be such that the composite structure shall have sufficient
resilience strength against stresses developed due to differences in co-
efficient of thermal expansions between insulation materials and copper.

c. Laying pattern of HV winding wires shall ensure to achieve superior linear


lightening voltage distribution characteristics

d. LV windings shall be made of copper foil with impregnated type interlayer


insulation. The interlayer insulation shall be made of solid polyester foil with
impregnated fiber glass film which thermo-sets by curing, or by an equivalent
process having same or higher performance levels.

e. Sufficient numbers of cooling channels shall be provided in both the LV and


HV windings to restrict the temperature rise of the windings within the
specified values and thereby minimizing the damage due to hot spot. The
cooling channels are arranged in a vertical manner and all coils have even
surface to minimize dust accumulation and to give maximum cooling
efficiency.

f. The completed winding stack assembly and connections shall have sufficient
mechanical rigidity to ensure no distortion or movement of any one winding,
or to any other winding or section of windings, shall take place when the
transformers is subjected to the short circuit stresses created by a total short
circuit at the low voltage terminals with an infinite power supply at normal
voltage and frequency available for two seconds at the high voltage
terminals.

g. Sufficient barriers shall be provided between windings and core, and


between HV and LV windings.

h. The winding insulation shall be such that the transformer may be operated at
155 C with no deterioration of the insulation properties as per IEC 60076-11
requirements. It shall comply with the requirements of Class F/F insulating
materials.

i. The high voltage and low voltage connections shall be brought out on
opposite sides of the transformer

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-25/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

j. The windings shall be connected Delta Star in accordance with Vector Group
reference Dyn11.

k. All leads or bars from windings to the termination points, shall be rigidly
supported. Stresses on coils and connections must be avoided.

l. The insulation materials used on windings and connections shall be shall be


free using any insulating compounds prone to shrinking or collapse during
service life. Further, there shall not be any joints either in the LV foil or
insulation.

3) Enclosure

a. The Transformer shall be contained in a sheet steel ventilated enclosure


suitable for indoor service. The overall limiting dimensions of the enclosure
and fittings attached there-in shall not exceed the values specified below:
i. Length: 2300 mm
ii. Width : 1500 mm (excluding cable boxes)
iii. Height: 2300 mm.
b. The enclosure degree of protection shall not be less than IP 23D including
its bottom surface.

However, all ventilation louvers and other openings (if any) at top, sides, or
bottom of enclosure should be closed with strong non-corrosive metallic
vermin screens (aperture size not more than 2mm dia). If so desired, number
of ventilation louvers may be increased to take care of ventilation
requirements, but these must be closed with vermin proof metallic screens.

c. All side panels and top of the enclosure shall be removable type using
standard metric spanners. No handles or other aids to easy removal of
panels shall be employed. All bolts & nuts shall be electro-plated to prevent
from corrosion.

4) Fittings & Accessories

The following accessories are required to be fitted on the transformer:

a) Earthing Terminal

Two stainless steel earthing flags, of size 63x63mm , and 6mm thick each, having
hole suitable for connecting M14 bolt, or an equivalent arrangement shall be
provided at bottom of the transformer frame work on either side. All exposed
metallic conductive non-live parts shall be connected to earth terminals by
construction through full earth fault rated conductors/braids.

b) Lifting Lugs on Total assembly

The transformer with enclosure assembly shall be fitted with two lifting lugs enabling
lifting of transformer and enclosure assembly. The position of the lugs facilitates

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-26/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

easy attachments of lifting slings. The transformer shall be suspended absolutely


vertical when it is lifted by means of the lifting hooks.

c) Lifting (hoist) eyelets on transformer (active part)

Four lifting (hoist) eyelets shall be provided on all four corners (one at each corner)
of upper press-beams/clamp-bars of the transformer, to facilitate lifting of
transformer alone (without enclosure) when required.

d) Haulage holes on under base

Four haulage holes shall be provided on all four corners of lower press-
beam/clamping-bar (one at each corner).

e) Bi-directional rollers at base

Four bi-directional flat rollers with blocking facilities (as mentioned below) are to be
fitted at base of the transformer, on to which entire load of transformer & enclose
assembly shall be transmitted.

f) Anti-vibration pads and Roller blocking devices

Anti-vibration pads made of polycarbonate material, having capability of carrying


loads of the transformer & enclosure, shall be provided at base to dampen the
intensity of vibrations and avoid resonance. They should also serve as roller
blocking devices to arrest the movement of transformer unit after installation.

g) Rating & Connection Plate, and colour coding

Rating and connection diagram plates with details as described in clause # 5.1 shall
be provided both on transformer and enclosure. Colour coding (Red, Yellow &
Blue), with indelible markings, shall be provided at suitable locations on the frame of
active part, to identify phase of each core, and inside cable boxes to identify phases
of HV & LV terminals.

h) Danger Boards

Danger Boards, prepared as per KM specification # ED-01-400 (Drg # STD-PRT-04)


shall be fixed permanently on all four sides of the enclosure. [Note: Removable
labels or stickers are not acceptable]

i) Viewing Window

A transparent viewing window, of 6 inch x 4 inch size, with 5mm thick clear
polycarbonate sheet shall be fitted on enclosure at front, to view the tapping
position of transformer. This fixture shall have IP 65 protection with necessary
gasket(s).

j) Chart of tap-changing link positions

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-27/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

A chart showing the combination of links positions for each tap position shall be
permanently fitted on enclosure at front. The details on the chart shall be indelibly
marked by etching, or engraving, or stamping, or by photo-chemical process

k) Temperature monitoring unit for thermal protection

1. At least 2 sets of PT100 based, high accuracy, RTD type PTC Temperature
sensors shall be embedded into to each phase of LV winding.
2. The sensors & its associated wiring shall be insulated, to avoid occurrence
of any short circuits with the transformer winding. The sensors shall be
placed as close as possible to the hottest spot in the winding.
3. The insertion of sensors shall be made through capillary tube to enable them
to be replaced whenever necessary.
4. The first set of the sensors shall be set to give alarm signal at 1400C, and
the second set shall be set to give trip signal at 1500C. These values shall
be in conformity with Class F insulation.
5. The alarm and trip signals shall be in the form of voltage free relay output
contacts. Each output relay contacts shall have at least 2NO+2 NC and each
rated for 6@240Vac.
6. The temperature monitoring unit (i.e Electronic converter with relays and
wiring terminal block) shall be capable of operating in the specified local
ambient conditions. It shall be flush mounted on front side of the enclosure.
The unit shall be capable of operating on 240Vac @50Hz power supply.
7. The monitoring unit shall have features of circuit-fault indication, storage of
maximum value of temperature, live voltage indication, status of relay
positions with different coloured light indications, reset facility, etc.
8. The power supply for the monitoring unit shall be connected from
transformer LV output (240Vac, 1-Phase) through suitably rated terminal
blocks. The terminal block shall have additional spare terminals, to facilitate
connecting external power source (auxiliary source), when required.
9. All wiring, to and fro, from the temperature monitoring unit shall be routed
through properly clamped and insulated trunking-channels. No wires shall be
left loose or hanging inside the enclosure.
10. The monitoring units shall not cause any false tripping. It shall be sourced
from reputed brands and its source and technical details to be submitted
along with tendering information.

l) Thermometer

1. In addition to the temperature monitoring unit as described above, a dial type


thermometer, having nominal dia of 100mm, with stainless steel bezel and
casing, shall be fitted on the transformer (not on enclosure) with suitable
sensing element. The thermometer shall indicate the temperature of the
winding and maximum temperature.

2. Its dial shall be graduated in degrees Centigrade and cover the range 0C to
160C with increment marks at not more than 5C intervals. The dial shall be
fitted with pointers to indicate the winding temperature, and maximum
temperature value with a RED pointer. The maximum temperature pointer
shall be manually re-settable. The thermometer shall be located in a safe
and suitable place to have clear view.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-28/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

5) Corrosion protection and Painting of Enclosure.

1. The definitive guideline documents are BS EN ISO 12944 Parts #1 to 8, &


BS EN ISO
2. 14713. The painting procedure selected by the manufacturer should clearly
indicate its relationship to the appropriate parts and tables of BS EN ISO
12944 and BS EN ISO
3. 14713
4. It is the responsibility of the manufacturer to assess environmental
classification, select suitable surface preparation process, protective paint
system, execution and supervision process, in accordance with above
referred standards and requirements.
5. The painting work should render a service life of at least 20 years to the
equipment, withstanding local ambient climatic & environmental conditions.
6. The exact Specification & painting procedure going to be followed by the
manufacturer shall be submitted at time of tender.
7. The manufacturer should posses required laboratory testing equipment, in
their factory, to test the painting work samples in accordance with BS EN
ISO 12944-6. The test reports should be submitted along with each
consignment of delivery.
8. The paint work shall nee to pass following tests

a. Measurement of thickness of protective coating (ISO 2808)


b. Specular gloss factor at 60 deg (ISO 2813): 905%
c. Falling weight test (ISO 6272): 1kg/50cm
d. Cross cut test (ISO 2409): classification: 0
e. Cupping test (ISO 1520): 08mm
f. Bending test Cylindrical mandrel test (ISO 1519): 3.0mm
g. Salt spray (fog) test (ISO 7253): 1000hrs

6) Cable Boxes

a. 1)-generally comply with the requirements of BS 2562 and, where applicable BS


6435. The details are as explained in APPENDICES-A, B & C.

b. 2)- High Voltage and low voltage cable boxes shall be mounted on opposite
sides of the transformer.

c. HV & LV Cable boxes shall be suitable for vertical bottom entry of cables.
However LV cable box shall also have suitable facility (in addition to this bottom
cable entry) for top entry bus-bar connections, when required. [Note: Bus-
connections shall be made through cable box only, they should not be made
through top of enclosure directly]

d. The bushing heights of HV and LV shall be 1320 mm from the enclosure base to
centre of bushings assembly.

e. The construction shall be such that the accumulation of water is avoided and the
box is effectively sealed against weather and insects

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-29/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

f. The minimum size of any fixing stud or bolt for securing a front cover plate shall
be M10 mild steel. All bolts used in assembly of cables boxes or enclosure shall
be electroplated for corrosion protection

g. Gaskets, where applicable shall be of nitrile rubber-bonded cork and shall not be
less than 5mm thick. [Note: Neoprene based cork gaskets are not to be used]

7) QUALITY CONTROL

The manufacturer of the equipment specified shall possess certification, issued by a


body authorized to do so, which indicates that the manufacturing unit operates to a
standard equivalent to ISO 9001. Copies of valid ISO 9001 certificates need to be
submitted along with tender documents.

8) TESTS

1) General

a. Manufacturers shall submit copies of test certificates, as prescribed below,


issued from reputed independent testing laboratories. All type tests & special
tests are to be carried out on representative specimen transformers
essentially of the same design & ratings.

b. KM reserves the right to verify the original test certificates & reports, if
required.

c. Special tests for climatic, environmental and fire behavior classes shall be
carried out as per the tests specified in clauses# 26, 27 and 28 of IEC
60076-11. A transformer is considered to be passed these tests, when all
the prescribed tests are conducted on same transformer in the sequence as
given in table-5 of IEC 60076-11.

d. Each transformer shall be subjected to all routine tests prescribed below,


and one set of routine Test report shall be attached with the body of
transformer in a strong water-proof envelope, at the time of delivery.

2) Type Tests & Special Tests on Transformer

a. Lightning Impulse test (type test) as per IEC 60076-3.


b. Temperature Rise test (type test) as per IEC 60076-2.
c. Partial discharge tests (routine & special tests) as per IEC 60076-11/Cl-22
d. Measurement of sound level (special test) as per IEC 60076-10
e. Short circuit test (special test) as per IEC 60076-5
f. Environmental test (special test)
g. Climatic test (special test)
h. Fire behavior test (special test)

3) Routine Tests on Transformer

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-30/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

a. Measurement of winding resistance.(IEC 60076-11/Cl-15)


b. Measurement of voltage ratio and check of phase displacement (IEC60076-
11/Cl-16).
c. Measurement of short-circuit Impedance and load loss(IEC 60076-11/Cl-17)
d. Measurement of no load loss and current (IEC 60076-11/Cl-18)
e. Separate source AC withstand voltage test(IEC 60076-11/Cl-19)
f. Induced AC withstand voltage test(IEC 60076-11/Cl-20).
g. Routine partial discharge test (IEC 60076-11/Cl-22.4.1.1)
h. Transformer Noise level Test at 1meter distance.
i. Check of vector group by voltmeter method
j. Measurement of Insulation resistance of LV winding at 2500V, DC
k. Over-voltage test at 2000V, AC, for 60sec, on secondary wiring & equipment
l. Measurement of thickness of painting work

9) TESTING, INSPECTION AND DELIVERY

a. Before commencing the production/manufacturing of 1st lot, against KM


tenders, the manufacturer is obliged to produce samples of Transformer with
enclosure and inform Kahramaa for inspection and acceptance through
witnessing factory acceptance tests, and routine tests.
b. For every subsequent lot, the manufacturer is obliged to inform Kahramaa,
at least 20 days before dispatch, and obtain clearance for dispatch. KM
Engineers have the option of inspecting & witnessing all factory acceptance
tests (FAT), including routine tests, at manufacturers factory premises for
each lot.
c. Acceptance by KM Engineer(s)/Representative(s) of any Transformer shall
not relieve the manufacturer from any of their responsibilities, guarantees, or
from other obligations, to manufacture the product fully complying with KM
specification.
d. Type tests are to be carried out on specimen Transformer with enclosure,
essentially of same design and ratings, as being offered. Manufacturer is
obliged to provide details of test procedures being followed, to the KM
inspection team before commencing factory accepting tests.
e. Each Transformer unit need to be subjected to all routine tests at factory
before delivery. Further, each unit may be subjected to inspection on
receiving them at DOHA to verify its healthiness and its conformity with the
guaranteed design data.
f. All tests should be performed in accordance with the latest issue of relevant
IEC standards
g. Three sets (copies) of routine tests & FAT reports to be prepared. One set to
be attached with the body of transformer enclosure, in a strong water-proof
envelope. Second copy to be sent along with delivery note. Third copy to be
sent to the end-user department.[This is mandatory requirement]
h. FAT report shall include copy of quality control report containing list of
check points verified/inspected at factory against each transformer.
i. Each delivery note shall include the details of serial number and
month/year of production of each transformer.
j. Both the manufacturing date (i.e month/year) and delivery date should be
shown on the rating plate of each transformer, and the time difference

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-31/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

between manufacturing date and delivery date should not be more than 6-
months.

10) WARRANTY

Manufacturers need to provide a warranty of minimum 5 years from the date of


delivery, or 4 years from the date of installation (whichever is earlier) for each unit
supplied, against any design, manufacture, or material defects.

Any Transformer unit failed while in service, with-in the warranty period, need to be
replaced with new unit free of cost. Further, the manufacturer/supplier need to
arrange for fault or abnormality analysis of any units(s) by reputed independent
agencies, when required by Kharamaa and respective abnormality and fault-
analysis report(s) to be submitted.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-32/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

21.2.2 MV PANELS

a. General

Main MV switch board [MV Panels] shall be provided for the connection of incoming
mains and / or standby electrical power supplies and subsequent mains distribution
as shown on the single line drawings. The Switchboard shall be provided complete
with all the necessary functional, protective and control devices and be fit for
purpose.

The MV panels shall be constructed to comply with BS EN 60947-1:2007 and the


internal separation shall be of Form 4B, Type-6 . The panel shall have facilities for
bottom entry of the incomer cables and top entry for outgoing cables. The Panel
manufacturer shall take the above matter into consideration during panel
construction.

The main horizontal bus-bars shall be so positioned within the panel to account for
the most efficient and safe connection of the functional units and shall be
segregated from all other parts by a separate enclosure. The outgoing functional
units shall only be tapped from the branch bus-bar sections.

The panel shall have adequate space for the termination of the cables and facilities
shall be made from connecting parallel cables to the outgoing MCCBs where this is
required. All cables shall be terminated direct onto extension bus-bar sections
appropriately routed, supported and braced from the circuit breaker terminals.

The electricity supply shall be 415 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz alternating current.
The switchgear and bus-bar system comprising of three phase and neutral shall be
of fully insulated tinned copper bus-bars, including heavy duty shrouds or boots to
all connection joints and terminations. incorporating withdraw able motorized and
manual main Air Circuit Breakers and MCCBs shall be of cubical type having a
minimum fault rating of 44 kA for 3 seconds. The ratings shall apply to the whole
switch board including main air-circuit breaker, main bus-bars, MCCBs etc.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-33/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

All components and workmanship utilised in the construction of MV switchgear


assemblies shall conform to the appropriate standards listed in this specification.

Conformance with the standards and this specification are mandatory and shall be
both assured and traceable by the application of comprehensive verification and
testing activities commencing with the manufacture of individual components
through to final assembly.

All MV switchgear assemblies shall always be selected from a single approved


switchboard manufacturer whom will be listed in the schedule included in this
specification and must be from the specified product range and of the type
specified.

b. Switchboard Enclosures

The Construction of switchboards shall be in the form of multiple cubicles or


sections each manufactured from a rigid steel frame work and clad with steel plates.
Each of the sections will be further partitioned or segregated to achieve the
specified form of separation. The partitioned spaces shall be segregated into:

1. Enclosure.
2. Main and distribution bus-bars.
3. Functional units (circuit breakers, metering & protection relays).
4. Chambers for the induction and routing of cables.
5. Terminals for connection of external conductors.

The switchboard sections shall be floor standing and modular in construction and
assembled into a single block that can readily be dissembled at the manufacturing
plant and shipped to site for reassembly. These operations shall only be performed
by the manufacturers own trained and skilled factory and field operatives.

Separate sections shall be provided for the devices that follow:

1. Main incomer - ACB (1 per section only).


2. Standby supply incomer ACB (1 per section only).
3. Bus-coupler ACB (1 per section only).
4. Outgoing ACB (1 per section only).
5. Outgoing - MCCB (multiple units may share a section).
6. Power factor correction plant.

The assembled switchboard dimensions shall not exceed those shown on the layout
and details drawings but in any event the height shall be limited to no more than
2200 mm above finished floor level. As a minimum the installed switchboard shall
have front and rear clearances from nearest walls / columns of 900 mm from the
outer edge of the largest hinged access panel which is fully in the open position. In
addition the minimum clearances at the switchboard ends and nearest walls /
columns shall be 1900 mm as this dimension includes 1000 mm for possible future
extensions. (refer to the approval civil substation).

All panels provided for front and rear access shall be installed on robust hinges
which can be readily demounted by use of a hand tool if so required. The size and

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-34/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

weight of each access panel shall be limited to minimum sizes for adequate access
and be split into twin doors where possible in order to reduce the necessary
clearances specified above.

The switchboard shall be made to be extensible at both ends and be provisioned


with facilities and features to readily accomplish this without the need to remove
sections for modifications in a workshop. At a minimum the bus-bars will terminate
just short of both ends of the panel and be provided with adequate pre-drilled holes
for coupling and extending the bus-bars. The necessary bus-bar coupling plates
shall be provided and fitted in place. The end panels shall also include a bolt on
steel plate cover in line with the bus-bar ends to permit unimpeded extension of the
bus-bars without the need to cut or further modify the switchboard.

Each switchboard shall be provided with a made to measure supporting plinth


designed to adequately support and stabilize the unit where it over-laps the cable
trenches.

Each section of the switchboard shall be provided with removable heavy duty
threaded lifting eyes installed in position on the top at each corner. The lifting eyes
shall be designed and installed to comfortably withstand the dynamic weight of the
MSB section spread over all four lifting points with a safety factor of x2 or more.

The MSB enclosure and framework shall be manufactured of hot dipped galvanised
mild steel channels and plates. The minimum thickness of mild steel used shall be
as follows:

1. Plinths and base framework 3.0 mm.


2. Framework 2.0 mm.
3. Covers and doors 3.0 mm.

It is an important requirement for the MSB framework and enclosure to be designed,


selected and constructed to be rigid and resist distortion or the visible deflection of
mild steel plates caused by reasonable force or pressures. If thicker steel than
specified is required to achieve this then it should be utilised and included for in the
bid price.

All the enclosure and frame metalwork shall prior to painting be first cleaned and
degreased before being primed with zinc spray ready for the application of acrylic
stove enamel paint coats. Two paint undercoats shall be applied before final cover
with a finishing coat. Between each coat the surfaces shall be rubbed down and
washed ready to receive the next coat. Surfaces within the enclosure interior shall
be coloured white while the exterior surfaces shall have a Green finish to BS 4800,
shade 14E53. Minor damage caused to paint surfaces during transit or installation
may be repaired at site by the manufacturers own skilled site operatives. Damage
to large areas of paint or denting of metal plates will require either the switchboard
or the steel plates (if removable by undoing set screws or bolts) to be returned to
the manufacturer for repair at cost to the contractor.

c. Cabling Facilities

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-35/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

Each cubicle shall include cabling and termination chambers for all the cables
connecting to devices to be housed within that cubicle plus any specified spare
capacity. Cables shall not be permitted to gland or terminate at one cubicle en-route
to another cubicle.

All switchboards shall be arranged for both front and rear access for cabling and
maintenance operations.

All switchboards shall be arranged to allow for both top and bottom entry for each
cable plus top and bottom glanding facilities to give full flexibility during cable
installation operations on site.

Cable gland plates provided for the incoming and outgoing cables shall be made of
a non-ferrous material. The gland plates shall be pre-drilled to accept the
appropriate number and sizes of cable glands for the actual cables to be installed at
each cubicle plus the spare capacity.

Where outgoing cables are to be connected to the terminals of circuit breakers then
this shall be achieved by HDC bus-bars extended to the designated integral cabling
and termination chambers where the bus-bars shall include sufficient pre-drilled
holes and space to readily terminate the number of cable cores specified including
multiple cables to be connected in parallel.

All cable connections to bus-bars shall be made via compression type cable lugs
secured to the bus-bars by nut, spring washer & bolt fixings through the pre-drilled
holes. Screw down clamp connections or cable terminal blocks shall not be
permitted.

d. Anti Condensation Heaters.

Anti-condensation heaters shall be provided inside each compartment in strategic


positions, these shall be controlled by an internally mounted humidistat and an
external overriding ON/AUTO switch

e. Conductors

The switchboard bus-bars shall be fully rated for the maximum incoming circuit
breaker frame size to be provided and subject to a 2500 Amp minimum rating.

The fault-withstand capacity of each switchboard and the assembled components


shall be as follows:

1. The minimum ultimate breaking capacity {ICU} shall be rated at 25 kA for


3 seconds duration.
2. The rated service breaking capacity {ICS} and rated short time withstand
current {ICW } shall also be equal to or greater than the {ICU}.

Bus-bars shall be made of tinned hard drawn copper [HDC] bars of the appropriate
cross-section rated for the maximum design and fault currents to be expected.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-36/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

All main bus-bar sections and subsidiary sections and connectors shall be
adequately braced and rigidly supported throughout the entire lengths as
appropriate. No signs of distortion, deflection or creepage shall be visible through
the effects of physical or thermal stress or strains once all cables are connected.

All circuit breakers shall be connected to the bus-bars by HDC bus-bar link sections
and not cables.

f. Earthing

Each switchboard shall be provided with an externally mounted earth bar made of
50 mm x 6 mm tinned hard drawn copper bar and provided along the full length of
the board fixed to the topside and adjacent the front edge.

This earth bar shall be connected to the neutral bar by means of a bolted and
removable test link positioned on top of the mains incomer switchboard section.
This link is required for the star point earthing of the associated distribution
transformer and should suitable constructed for this purpose. A permanent
engraved warning label is to be provided alongside the test link in a normally visible
position to read IMPORTANT STAR POINT EARTHING DO NOT REMOVE.
Label to have red foreground and white text.

It is important that the test link is installed in position at the manufacturers works to
link the earth and neutral bars.

A combined neutral and earthing bar will not be accepted.

The top mounted earth bar shall be extended into the cabling compartments of each
switchboard section to be provided for the termination of circuit protective
conductors for each of the functional units.

Throughout the entire length of the earth bar a selection of M6, M8, M10, M12 pre-
drilled holes shall be provided in the appropriate locations for termination of all the
cables planned plus 20% extra provision.

An adequately designed and constructed coupling piece shall be supplied to link the
earth bar on top of each section to the neighbouring sections.

g. Operating handles

All moulded case circuit breakers shall be housed in individual cubicles with hinged
front opening doors. The circuit breaker shall be operated by means of specially
designed and robust moulded plastic rotary handles in conjunction with steel shafts
and spring loaded mechanisms. The action of opening or closing the circuit breaker
shall be smooth and precise and the service status positively indicated: Open
/Closed/Tripped.

The hinged cubicle doors shall be prevented from opening while the circuit breaker
is in the closed position by means of an interlock that cannot be readily defeated
with or without a tool.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-37/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

The rotary handles shall all be provided with mechanisms that can be padlocked in
both in the open or closed positions.

h. Labels

The switchboard shall be provided with a full complement of labels, tags and plates
that will assist the permit the safe and informed switching or maintenance
operations to be performed throughout the service life.

All such labels, tags and plates shall be permanent in nature and meet the minimum
quality requirements outlined here.

The labels shall all comprise high quality durable traffolyte plaques with substrate
layers revealed by the process of engraving to form the intended label text or
graphic. The material and finish shall be resistant to discolouration and degradation
through the effects of the environment. The labels shall be a minimum of 3.0 mm
thickness and the edges of each shall be neatly chamfered.

Labels shall be fixed to the panel by countersunk brass set screws neatly and
accurately fixed to the switchboard fascia. The use of adhesives for fixing shall not
be permitted.

Prior to ordering any labels the contractor shall present the Engineers for approval
with a schedule to identify all labels that will be produced with proposals for the
information to be included, letter height and colours of the label foreground and the
text.

As a minimum the contractor will be deemed to have included in the bid for 3
foreground and 3 text colours offered in any combination. The label text should be
of a size to be clearly read from a distance of up to 3 metres in front of the
switchboard.

i. Inspection and Testing

Each switchboard may be covered by a type testing report issued by LOVAG


(ASTA, KEMA OR ASEFA) registered test house. The report must unequivocally
demonstrate the proposed switchboard will comply fully the type of construction and
required performance specified. Where such a report has not been commissioned
for the type of switchboard intended to be supplied then the manufacturer must
commission such a report from an ASTA or KEMA test house on either the actual
switchboard to be provided or another of the same type. If this route of compliance
is chosen then it must have no detrimental effect upon the construction programme
or incur additional charges to those contained in the manufacturers bid for the
project.

While undergoing manufacture and at completion the switchboard shall be subject


to progressive inspection and testing activities to verify the successful completion of
each stage.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-38/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

The inspections activities shall verify but not be confined to the following:

1. All components are present and of the correct type as compared to the
workshop drawing.
2. The arrangement displays no non-conformities in relation to the relevant
standards and good working practices.
3. All conductors are present and configured correctly.
4. All insulation sheaths and boots are fitted and adequately applied or fixed in
position without any damage.
5. The insulation colours match the functions of the conductors identified.
6. All barriers and partitions are present and correctly installed to screen off the
intended live parts.
7. All terminations and joints have been correctly made and to the
recommended torque or tightness.
8. The correct type and quantity of washers have been selected and used.
9. The type, ratings and settings of all circuit breakers and fuses are correct.
10. All relays, indicators lamps and metering are present and correct.
11. All operating handles are correctly engaged and positively actuate the
devices without undue effort.
12. All labels and warning notices are provided and adequately fixed in the all
the locations required.
13. The enclosure panels are free of damage or blemishes.
14. The enclosure colours are in accordance with the specification requirements.
15. The enclosure surfaces are clean and not debris of any kind remains within.

The testing activities shall verify but not be confined to the following:

1. Polarity.
2. Earth continuity.
3. Insulation.
4. Flash and impulse.
5. Operation of protection relays, indicator lamps and metering.
6. Operation of residual current devices to verify compliance with BS EN
7671:2008.

Each switchboard section shall undergo a full pre-delivery inspection at the


manufacturers works prior to shipping. This exercise shall be conducted with
checklists and the purpose of which is to actively record, witness and verify the
following:

1. All component parts are provided and cross referenced to the shop drawings
and specification.
2. All components are correctly assembled and configured.
3. All components and surfaces are free from damage and blemishes.
4. The test Engineers comprehensive inspection and testing reports and
results are present and the switchboard section is signed off as completed
by both the Production Engineer(s) and the Testing Engineer(s). Copies of
these documents along with the completed and signed PDI checklist are to
be placed inside the switchboard section within a durable Perspex wallet.

TRIPPING BATTERY

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-39/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

A 30 D.C supply is required for tripping of the MV ACBs through a DC shunt trip of a
restricted earth fault relay. The Contractor to provide for this unit complete with
trickle charger and long life batteries.

The unit shall be designed to operate on 240V, 1 phase, 50 Hz A.C supply and for
continuous duty at an ambient temperature of 50oC and 98% relative humidity.

The capacity of the unit is to be determined by the manufacturers and based on


number of trip units.

One DC supply unit shall be provided per switchboard.

21.2.03 BUS - BAR RISERS (Trunking)

The Bus-bar risers including the accessories, used for the project shall conform to
BS EN 60439-2 (IEC 439) and with the relevant provisions of the 16th edition of the
Wiring regulations BS 7671.

The 5 bar 3-phase Bus-bar risers shall be constructed to the British standards
requirements; with Extruded aluminium housing and side flanges and be suitable for
both Horizontal and Vertical Installation The trunking shall be of the ventilated totally
enclosed type to provided a degree of protection not less than IP 54 for vertical runs
and IP65 for horizontal runs.

All the Phase and Neutral conductors shall be of copper and of same size and
rating as mentioned in the drawings and shall be supported individually within the
housing of the riser and insulated by high di-electric strength sleeves. Class F

The minimum certified short circuit ratings of the bus-bar trunking shall be as
follows:

Rating kA / 1 Sec. kA Peak kA, N & PE


200A-630A 44 74 21
800-1250A 50 105 30
1600A- 60-70 132-150 36-44
2500A

The busbar trunking shall be of the totally enclosed sandwiched insulated type
provided with busbars and with suitable tap-off positions as specified in later
clauses.

The moulded bus bar insulation and insulating supports will be made from insulation
possessing flame retardant and self-extinguishing, die-electric and non-hygroscopic
properties.

The Bus-bar risers shall be suitable of operating at an ambient of 50 Deg.C, and


suitable derating factors shall be considered during the selection, and the
temperature rise shall not exceed 55 deg.C, when the Bus-bar riser is carrying the
full load current continuously.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-40/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

Suitable fire barriers of intumescing compound shall be installed when the bus-bar
riser passes through the floors and fire integrity for at least 2 hours shall be
maintained

The joints shall be of single bolt pressure design providing optimum electrical
contact and mechanical strength.

The busbars shall be of rectangular section tinned hard drawn high conductivity
copper.

Jointing of the busbars shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the


manufacturer, using purpose-made links throughout.

Where straight length of busbar trunking are installed in excess of 15 meters


expansion joints shall be fitted in the busbar run.
Phase bus bars will be completely enclosed with molded or extruded insulation,
except where provisions will be made for splicing adjacent sections together.

The joints for splicing adjacent sections together will be silver plated and enclosed
by either moulded insulation bolts or approved taped insulation system.

After assembly, all conductor joints shall be accessible by the removal of covers in
the enclosure. Such covers shall be weather-proof by neoprene gaskets or other
suitable means.

Tap-off Points

1. All lengths of trunking shall be provided with tapping positions at not greater
than 600 mm center.

2. Each tap-off position shall be provided with covers or shutters to screen entry to
live busbars when the position is not occupied with a tap-off unit.

3. The tap-off positions shall be arranged so that the plug- in connectors self align
with the busbars.

4. Tap-off positions shall be suitable for tap-off units to be plugged in either below
or above the busbars.

Tap-off Boxes and Accessories

1. Tap-off boxes shall be rated as detailed in the schedule and drawings attached
to this Specification.

2. Tap-off boxes shall be constructed of sheet metal and shall be complete with
hinged lids and entry gland. The boxes shall house MCCB and neutral link and
have polarity and rating as detailed in the schedule.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-41/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

3. Where tap-off boxes are to be inserted into live busbar trunking, they shall be
designed and constructed so that current carrying metal is not exposed during
insertion or removal and that the box in connected to earth before contact is
made with live busbars. The box shall remain earth during removal until all live
connections are disconnected. The design shall ensure that the tap-off can only
be inserted to give the correct polarity.

4. Where change of direction or termination occurs in a busbar run, the


manufacturer's purpose-made bends, tees pieces, cross-overs, reducers, and
end covers shall be used.

5. Where switches are connected to the busbars through tap-off points an interlock
shall be provided to prevent removal with the switch in the 'ON' position. These
switches shall comply with the requirement in the LV switchers section of the
Specifications.

6. Each tap-off unit shall be fitted with terminal blocks in order to hook up the
outgoing cables. The size and rate of these terminal blocks shall be chosen
according to the prospective outgoing cable size as indicated in the drawings.

FACTORY TESTING

The manufacturer on each piece of busbar trunking shall carry out the following
tests before it leaves the factory:

3.5kV Dielectric Test for 4 seconds.


1000V Meggar Test

A Factory Certificate of Testing and Inspection shall be submitted to the Engineer.

SITE TESTING

1. Before installation each piece of busbar trunking shall be Meggar tested at


1000V
2. On completion of the installation each busbar run shall be Meggar tested at
1000V
3. A temperature heat rise test in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendation/procedure shall be carried out on site.

All test results shall be recorded and submitted to the Engineer for approval.

21.2.4 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION

a. Summary

This Section includes automatic power factor correction equipment rated 600 V and
less.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-42/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

b. Submittals

The Contractor shall be required to make submittals of the following:

1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include dimensions;


shipping, installed, and operating weights of multiple capacitor cells or
elements; and data on features, ratings, and performance.

2. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions,


weights, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of
each field connection. Show access and workspace requirements and
required clearances.

3. Wiring Diagrams: Provide Details of both internal and interconnecting wiring.


Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

4. Factory Test Reports: Evidence of products compliance with specified


requirements.

5. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements.

6. Maintenance Data: For equipment to include in maintenance manuals.


Include lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended for
storage at the project site.

7. Detailed instructions covering operation under both normal


and abnormal conditions.

c. Quality Assurance

Comply with IEEE 18, IEC 60070A and NEMA CP 1.

d. Co-ordination

Coordinate sensor-communication module package with B.M.S data network for


successful transmission and remote readout of remote monitoring data specified in
this Section.

e. Capacitors (General)

Construction: Multiple capacitor cells or elements, factory wired in three-phase


groups and mounted in metal enclosures.

Capacitor Cells: Dry, metallic-dielectric, self-healing type. Each cell shall be


encapsulated in thermosetting resin inside plastic container.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-43/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

Cell Rupture Protection: Pressure-sensitive circuit interrupter for each cell.

Capacitor-Bank Fuses: Current limiting, non-interchangeable type; factory installed


in each phase and located within the equipment enclosure. Features include the
following:

1. Interrupting Capacity: 200,000 A, minimum.

2. Fuse Ratings and Characteristics: As recommended by capacitor


manufacturer.

3. Neon Indicator Lamp for Each Fuse: Connect to illuminate when fuse has
opened, but is still in place, and locate so it is visible from outside the
enclosure.

4. Discharge Resistors: Factory installed and wired.

5. Enclosure: NEMA 250, steel or aluminum, arranged to contain the fluid


leakage from Capacitor cells; factory equipped with mounting brackets
suitable for type of mounting indicated.

6. Indoor Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 12 or as indicated.

f. Fixed Capacitors

Description: Integrally fused, unless otherwise indicated.

Internal Wiring: Factory wired, ready for field connection to external circuits at a
single set of pressure terminals.

g. Automatic Power Factor Correction Units

Shall comply with NEMA ICS 2.

Description: Capacitor banks, contactors, controls, and accessories factory installed


in independent enclosures. Units include a separately mounted current transformer
to sense current in the power circuit being corrected and to provide input to unit
controls.

Performance Requirements: Controls permit selection of a target power factor,


adjustable to any value between unity and 0.90 lagging. Controls continuously
sense the power factor on circuits being corrected and, when the power factor
differs from the target setting for more than 10 seconds, operate a contractor to
switch a capacitor bank into or out of the circuit. Contactors are opened or closed as
required to bring the corrected circuit power factor closer to the target setting.
Switch only one capacitor bank at a time.

Controls: Solid-state, microprocessor-based controls, including the following:

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-44/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

1. Under voltage relay that interrupts capacitor switching and disconnects


capacitors for power supply interruptions longer than 15 minutes.

2. Advance and Retard push buttons on the control panel to permit manually
controlled capacitor-bank switching.

Contactors: Three pole; rated for the repetitive high-inrush-switching duty of the
capacitor application.

Buses: Tinned hard drawn copper.

Fuses for Protection of Capacitor Banks: Rated to protect contactor, interconnecting


wiring, and capacitors.

Inductors: Air-core type, connected in capacitor circuits; rated to limit switching


surges to within contactor ratings.

Mechanical Bracing for Current-Carrying Parts: Adequate to withstand the maximum


fault current to which they may be exposed.

Identification of Energized Capacitor Banks: LED indicating lamps on front panel.

Enclosure Access: Hinged door with hand-operated catch. Door is interlocked with
controls or main circuit breaker to de-energize capacitors when door is opened.

Local Display: LED or liquid-crystal digital type, mounted in door of enclosure.

1. Indicated target and actual power factors.

2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent.

3. Mounting: Flush or semi flushes in unit door.

Current Transformer: Type, configuration, and ratio to suit sensing and mounting
conditions.

Main Circuit Breaker: Operable from outside the enclosure to disconnect the unit
and the Operating handle can be padlocked.

1. Remote Monitoring Components: Sensors, associated communication


modules, and network interface units, matched to and compatible with
B.M.S. Communication module transmits data to remote monitoring devices.
Data includes actual corrected power factor number of capacitor steps
connected.

h. Source Quality Control

Factory test the power factor correction equipment before shipment. Comply with
NEMA CP I. Include the following:

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-45/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

1. Routine capacitor production tests, including short-time overvoltage,


capacitance, leak, and dissipation-factor tests.

2. Functional test of all operations, controls, indicators, sensors, and protective


devices.

i. Active Harmonic Filtering


1. The contractor shall make provision in the main LV panels for the future
addition of external (from the panel) active harmonic filtering equipment, this
shall include space for future CTs

2. The contractor shall allow within his tender to undertake a power


quality/condition survey of the new LAD building following practical
completion, in order to determine the extent of harmonics present during
normal daily operation of the system.

3. The contractor shall employ a specialist and use suitable power monitoring
equipment at each of the main LV switch room locations to monitor and
record power quality. Upon completion of assessment of harmonic distortion
the contractor shall prepare and present a detailed report of the findings to
the contract administrator.

4. If appropriate, the contractor shall select and install active harmonic filtering
equipment to meet with the requirements of the local wiring regulations.
Companies such as Group Schneider or ABB shall be considered for this
work.

5. The contractor shall include within his tender for a provisional sum of QR
360,000 for the supply, installation and commissioning of the active
harmonic filtering equipment only, to correct any main power supply
distortion as a result of installed equipment within the building.

Active harmonic filtering equipment shall be connected to each main LV switch


panel via a spare way as detailed on the LV Distribution schematic drawings.

21.2.5 SUB-MAIN SWITCH BOARDS/ELECTRICAL DIGITAL METER

The complete sub main switchboard shall be capable of withstanding, without


damage, a symmetrical prospective fault current of the system which shall be
assumed as 25 kA for 3 seconds duration.

The switch board shall be of panel board type suitable for Wall mounting as
indicated upon the drawings and comprise of both an incoming and outgoing
moulded case circuit breakers as indicated on the drawings. The switchboard shall
comply with BS EN 60947-1:2007 and as a minimum the internal separation shall
be of Form 2b plus ingress protection to IP32.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-46/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

The sub-main switchboard shall incorporate all the items detailed on the drawings
and as detailed in this specification. The sub-main switchboards shall be installed so
as no operating handle is placed at a height that exceeds 2100 m from the finished
floor level.

The main incoming isolator shall form an integral part of the unit and be of the
moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB) type with adjustable thermal and magnetic
settings complying with BS EN 60947-2:2006.

The bus-bars shall be of tinned hard drawn copper type and insulated with PVC
heat shrink sleeves, supported on non-hygroscopic insulating material conforming to
BS 159 and suitably de-rated taking into account insulation applied to the bus-bars
and connections.

The equipment current ratings that have been indicated are the minimum
acceptable but the manufacturers standard items may be utilized provided that they
are not lower ratings than those specified.

The switchboard shall contain a suitable earth bar to at which all circuit protective
conductors, cable glands and required bonded metalwork shall be connected. The
minimum cross sectional area of this earth bar shall be not less than the csa of the
feeder cable conductors. Similarly the neutral bar shall be provided of the same
cross section as the live bus-bars. The neutral and earth bars shall remain
electrically isolated from each other.

The manufacturers blank insulated fillers shall be securely fitted to fill and shield all
unused outgoing circuit breaker spaces plus bus-bar connections. In addition the
circuit breaker sections shall be provided with a hinged metal cover complete with
locking mechanisms.

The switchboard shall be constructed to conform to the specified requirements of


KAHRAMAA and the relevant British Standards. The drawings of proposed
arrangements should be forwarded by the Contractor to the Consultant and
KAHRAMAA for approval prior to commencement of manufacture.

The contractor shall be responsible for checking access plus builders work details in
order to confirm that the switchboard is constructed and installed as required by the
KAHRAMAA regulations and the relevant British Standards.

The rated service short-circuit breaking capacity (ICS) of all outgoing MCCB shall be
equal to or greater than 25 kA for 3 seconds duration.

All outgoing MCCB in the sub-main switchboards shall be of the selective type to
provide full discrimination with the downstream circuit breakers and conform to BS
EN 60947-2:2006, and shall be of triple-pole in construction with magnetic and
thermal overload protection, de-rated for an ambient temperature of 50oC.

The rating of all MCCBs to be provided in the sub-main switchboards are indicated
upon the drawings.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-47/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

All sub-main board panel fascia shall have installed 3 no. maximum demand
indicating ammeters (1 no. for each phase), a voltmeter with selector switch, control
fuses and 3 No. phase live indication lamps.

Electrical Digital Metering

1. All MSB/SMB shall be provided with digital meter as per shown in the Power
Single Line Diagram to measure/monitor utility consumption downstream
network.

2. Meters use both current and voltage input to calculate energy consumption.

3. Solid core CTs shall be used for all digital meters.

Digital Metering Features

1. ANSI accurate current transformer (CTS) deliver superior revenue-grade


accuracy, for high quality, long term reliability.

2. Built-in communication features allow for future automation.

3. All meters shall be equipped standard with an isolated pulse output channel for
BMS interface.

4. UL listed for energy monitoring equipment.

5. Color coded current transformers.

6. Solid core with high quality for CTS with 0.3% maximum error accurate Class
0.1A.

7. Measures kWH and demand load.

8. Up to 3 sets of CTs per phase connection be paralleled.

9. LCD display shows kWH, spontaneous and peak demand with manual keyed
rest.

10. Load indicator LED verifies meter functionality.

11. Reverse phase indicator LED illuminates if the meter is improperly installed.

12. Ten year warranty.


13. Rated voltage (Un) : 3 x 240/415 Volts

14. Working Voltage : 07Un - 1.3 Un

15. Rated Frequency : 50Hz + 5%

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-48/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

16. Power Consumption : < 8VA

17. Working Temperature : -25OC to 55OC

18. Unit Temperature : -40OC to 70OC

19. Working Humidity : <85% RH

21.2.6 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

General

Distribution boards shall conform to BS EN 60439-3:1991+A2:2001 and be suitable


for operation at 415 V / 240 V, 50 Hz, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz. The required fault
minimum withstand fault level shall be 10 kA.

These boards shall be Type B factory assembled suitable for flush or surface
mounting as indicated on the tender drawings. Distribution boards shall be
complete with all the specified outgoing circuit protective devices eg. MCB / ELCB /
RCCBs, incoming isolators and other accessories as indicated or required.

The enclosures shall be fabricated from zinc coated sheet steel having adequate
gauge to ensure a rigid and robust construction free from distortion. Each enclosure
shall be of adequate size to accommodate all components specified and be finished
in stove enamel.

The enclosure shall be fitted with a sheet steel front panel, which shall be firmly
fixed by a minimum of 4 no. cheese-head screws of minimum of 6 mm in length.

The front panel shall be manufactured with neatly cut apertures to allow, the MCBs
/ RCCBs levers to comfortably protrude through. The front panel shall however
effectively conceal and segregate all conductors, contactors, bus-bars and any
other live parts installed within the enclosures. Each enclosure shall be fitted with a
rigidly constructed double-hinged sheet steel door with locking mechanisms.

All doors shall be provided with gaskets and fitted with at least two robust hinges.
The bus-bars shall be of the electrotinned copper type. Multi-terminal bus-bars
shall be provided for all the neutral & earth conductors and shall not be shared (a
single conductor per terminal only).

Each enclosure shall be fully equipped to accommodate the number of MCBs /


RCCBs of ratings as indicated on the drawings. The contractor shall supply and
install additional spare circuit protective devices of the ratings / types indicated upon
the drawings / circuit schedules. The manufacturers purpose made blank shields
shall be provided and securely fitted to the blank spare circuit ways.

Distribution boards located remote from the Main Panel, or sub-main boards shall be
mounted at a height of not less than 1200mm to the center of the board from the
finished floor level and the maximum height from the finished floor level to the top of
the board shall be 2200mm.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-49/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

Where single phase distribution boards are specified, they shall be complete with
double-pole incomer isolator and where 3 phase distribution boards are specified,
they shall be complete with triple-pole incomer Isolator and removable /
demountable neutral link. An ELCB shall not be accepted or used as the DB main
disconnect switch for any distribution board.

Earth and Neutral bars located in distribution boards shall have the same number of
connections as there are for phase connections.

All phase and neutral bars shall be sized to carry the full rated current of the
associated protective device and shall be of the flat tinned-copper type rigidly
mounted, supported on shock resisting, non-hygroscopic, high-grade insulators with
high resistance to tracking, not subject to mold growth or termite attack with
adequate space and clearances.

Connections from the bus-bars to the breakers shall be made by using solid circular
conductors or insulated and tinned copper strip neatly set and formed. Each
connection to or from the phase or neutral bar shall have its own brass fixing
screws, washers and locknuts. Each distribution board shall be fitted with an
identification label on its front cover.

The label shall be suitably inscribed stating the distribution boards reference
number / rating in volts and amperes and the number of ways in both English and
Arabic.

In addition to the above a reference card shall be fitted inside the distribution board
giving details of each circuit, MCB size, cable size, the SMDB to which it is
connected and the location etc., The reference cards shall be fixed to the inside of
the distribution boards door within a protective transparent plastic envelope.

All live terminals and parts shall be shrouded with insulating materials in the form of
shields, barriers and applied insulation to ensure that it is impossible for any live part
to be touched while withdrawing or replacing the MCBs. All distribution boards
should conform to a minimum ingress protection of IP 30.

Outgoing circuit breakers shall generally be MCB that comply with BS EN 60898-
2:2006. The circuit breakers with the indicated ratings (calibrated for an ambient
temperature of 50oC) but the rating must never exceed the declared current carrying
capacity of the final circuit conductors.

All distribution boards and the circuit breakers shall be selected and sourced from a
single manufacturer and the same range throughout the whole of the works.

21.2.7 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Air circuit breakers shall be triple pole, for main in comer ACBs certified by KEMA,
ASTA or other test station approved by the Engineer in writing prior to acceptance
of Tender, for a rated short time current of 44KA at 415V for 3.0 seconds minimum.
Meeting with BSEN60947-2 or IEC 974-2 sequence I, II, III and IV tests (for circuit

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-50/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

breakers of utilization category B), tested in same enclosure as which they are to be
installed unless otherwise is indicated on the drawings.

Air Circuit breakers shall be electrically fully motorized of the horizontal draw out
pattern with full load current ratings, all as detailed on the drawings.

Electrically operated ACB to have integrally mounted spring charging motor


mechanism automatically recharged upon closing.

The ultimate breaking capacity (ICU) shall be minimum of 44 Ka for 3 seconds.

The rated service breaking capacity (ICS) and rated short time withstand current
(ICW) shall be equal to or greater than ICU.

The ACB section of the switch board shall be in separate cubicle separated from
other parts of the switch board. This section shall not have any outgoing feeders.

The gland plate for the incoming cables shall be no-ferrous material with brass
compression type glands, earthing tags and shrouds. In case single core cables are
used, the clamping arrangement is to be supplied as per the sketch nos.7,8,9 and
10 shown on KAHRAMAA regulations.

ACBs (Electrical or Mechanical) shall have charging lever and a direct acting, open
and close push buttons, stored energy shall allow open/ close/ open sequence of
operation without a use of external energy. Safety features is to allow discharging
stored energy without closing ACB.

Withdrawable circuit breakers shall have auxiliary terminal shield /Arc chute over,
inter phase barrier and automatic safety shutters for screening the fixed contacts
when the breaker is withdrawn to the inspection position. It shall be possible to
padlock the shutters in the closed position.

It shall not be possible to withdraw or rack in a withdrawable circuit when it is close.


The action of withdrawing a circuit breaker shall necessitate a deliberate action
distinct from any other operation. It shall not be possible to inadvertently fully
withdraw a circuit breaker from its housing.

The control unit shall be of solid-state type with the following minimum facility /
functions:

Adjustable ampere setting (0.5-1.0 X full rated Amp.)


Adjustable long time setting
Adjustable long time delay
Adjustable long time delay
Adjustable Instantaneous trip
Adjustable Earth fault protection up to 40% of frame size with adjustable delay
between 0.1- 0.4 seconds.
Time delay and over ride Instantaneous discriminator
Short time delay to be adjustable in steps of 2-10 Times Sensor rating
with settable or adjustable time band between 0.1 and 0.4 seconds.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-51/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

Circuit Breaker Accessories are to include the following:

1. Padlocking or key locking provisions for all positions (Disconnected, test,


connected, closing blocking, open)
2. Overload, Short-Circuit, ground fault trip LEDS
3. Trip indicator and re set button
4. Operations Counter
5. On/ Off pilot lights
6. Shunt trip coil and closing solenoid for remote control.
7. External on-off push buttons to operate the breaker through the shunt close and
shunt trip coil.

Auxiliary Contacts : To include N.O. and N.C contacts on switch gear as required,
plus 2 N.O. and 2 N.C spare contacts.

21.2.8 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

The Contractor shall provide the moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) as indicated
on the tender drawings for the outgoing sub-main circuits. They shall be triple-pole,
415 volts, 50 Hz, with both thermal and magnetic over load protection complying
with BS EN 60947-2:2006+A1:2009. At sub-main distribution level the fault
withstand capacity of the circuit breakers shall be not less than 25 kA for 3 seconds
duration. If installed at the Main MV panel level then the fault withstand capacity
shall be not less than 44 kA for 3 seconds duration.

Circuit breakers of 100 A frame size and above shall be supplied complete with
adjustable thermal and magnetic trip settings plus shorttime / delay trip selection.

Circuit breakers shall be constructed of high quality mouldings with all essential
parts treated for corrosion resistance and plated for good electrical conductivity. The
declared over-current capacity of the MCCBs is not to be less than 125% of the
current rating (In) for a time to trip duration of 90 minutes.

Where MCCBs are mounted individually, then, the enclosure shall be manufactured
from heavy sheet steel with removable front plate, and removable gland plates at
top and bottom. Knockouts shall not be accepted. These enclosures shall also
include the necessary cable spreader boxes to comfortably terminate all the cables
to be installed.

21.2.9 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Miniature circuit breakers (MCB) shall be utilized to protect all outgoing circuits and
shall be of an approved make to comply with BS EN 60898-2:2006. The trip
mechanisms shall be of the temperature compensated thermal overload and short
circuit trip type. MCB shall be of the single or triple pole type rated and calibrated
as shown on the drawings for an ambient temperature of 50oC. All MCB shall be of
hermetically sealed type with a minimum rated breaking capacity (ICU) of 10kA rated
at 415 V.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-52/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

The rated short circuit withstand capacity of all distribution boards shall be a
minimum of 10 kA.

The modular frame size of all MCBs shall be identical so that they can be easily
interchanged. The MCBs shall be of the DIN-rail mounting type (plug-in type are not
acceptable). Circuit breaker dollies shall be of the trip free pattern to prevent
closing the breaker on a faulty circuit without resetting and shall also clearly indicate
the ON/OFF positions. The standard commonly available ratings of MCBs shall be
used for ease of availability.

Earth leakage protection shall be afforded final circuits of distribution boards that
feed power to socket outlets, water heaters and domestic appliances. For three
phase circuits a four-pole ELCB device shall be used and double-pole device for a
single-phase supply. The trip setting shall be 30 mA, unless specified otherwise.
The ELCB device shall be supplied integrated with the MCB (RCBO) as a single
device and shall comply with BS EN 61008-1:2004.

MCBs shall be suitable for use without any distinction to be made between supply
side & load side.

The fault withstands rating for the combined MCB / ELCBs shall not be less than 6
kA.

21.2.10 FUSES

High rupturing capacity (HRC) cartridge fuses shall be used for overload protection
and short circuit protection only where indicated upon the drawings.

The contractor shall include for the provision of HRC fuses of the maximum rating of
all equipment, in compliance with BS 88 for AC 46 Category of Duty and Class Q1
fusing factor.

Confirmation of fuse ratings shall be obtained from the Consultant before placing
any order. HRC fuses provided on this contract shall be supplied by the same
manufacturer and be of the same class or type to ensure adequate discrimination
and grading throughout the distribution system.

Exposed or Semi-enclosed fuse elements shall not be provided or used. Cartridge


fuses for use in conjunction with lighting and small power accessories shall be
comply with BS 1362.

2.2.11 MOTOR STARTERS

a. Description

Starters shall be manufactured and type tested in accordance with BS EN 60947-4-


1:2001.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-53/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

All motors shall be provided with heavy duty contactor type motor (fuse-less)
starters, generally complying with the following and protected by means of moulded
case circuit breakers for both overload and short circuit fault conditions. The type of
motor starter to be employed shall be governed by the motor electrical input rating
as follows:

1. 11 kW and below > Direct on-line starting


2. 11 kW to 37.3 kW > Star-Delta starting.
3. 37.5 kW and above > Reduced voltage electronic soft-starter.
4. REFER TO POWER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

All motor starters shall be grouped and housed with motor control centre (MCC)
panels as indicated upon the drawings. Each MCC panel shall be provided with a
main incoming MCCB capable of carrying the full-load current.

Each starter shall comprise as a minimum:

1. On load triple-pole MCCB with two normally open and one normally closed
auxiliary switches. The MCCB shall be mechanically interlocked with the
starter component door and capable of breaking the motor starting current
and of making onto a fault located at the motor terminals. Provisions shall be
made for padlocking the MCCB in the 'OFF' position.

2. Four-pole contactors to be fitted with three normally open and three normally
closed auxiliary contracts. All the auxiliary contacts shall be wired down to
the starter terminal block.

6. One triple-pole thermal over current relay incorporating over current (with
adjustable trip settings), phase sequence and lost phase protection. An
external panel fascia mechanical hand reset button is also to be provided.

7. An appropriately rated (6 A) MCB and one copper link provided to protect the
controls power circuit.

8. Each starter shall be fitted with one set of local start/stop push buttons and a
local/remote/auto selector switch (hand/off/auto) as required. Each starter
control wiring terminal block shall include terminals for connection of remote
push buttons, automatic control circuits and local / remote emergency stop
push buttons.

9. Where more than one motor with a duty/standby (duty/backup) function are
used, the starter control wiring shall be arranged to automatically change
duty upon a fault condition tripping the manually selected duty motor. A
duty/standby sequence selector switch shall also be provided for automatic
timed (hours run) duty sharing between the selected motors.
10. Each starter shall be fitted with transformer operated lamps indicating
i. Motor running (green)
ii. Motor stopped (red)
iii. Overload tripped (amber)

11. Each starter shall be fitted with an ammeter and selector switch for motors of
rating 3 kW and above.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-54/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

12. Each starter to be equipped with labels both in English and Arabic giving
drive designation, plant number and control operation.

13. Each starter shall include the wiring terminals and control relays as
necessary to achieve electrical interlocking as may be specified elsewhere.

Starter units that include manual operation facilities shall have push buttons
provided for both starting and stopping operations, together with auxiliary contacts
for remote indicator lights where specified. Starter units arranged for automatic
operation shall have hand/off/auto controls and remote push buttons.

All Star-Delta starters shall be provided with mechanical and electrical interlocks
between the star and delta contactors to prevent short circuiting. Star-Delta starters
shall also be provided adjustable time-delay devices for the automatic change-over
from star to delta.

b. Enclosures

MCC Panels enclosures shall be constructed of minimum 2mm thick electro-


galvanized coated steel plate with a high quality solid polyester enamel electrostatic
spray paint finish.

Enclosures shall have a minimum ingress protection rating of IP54.


All MCC panels shall be arranged for front access for cabling and maintenance
operations to be carried out and be equipped with robust hinged lift-off doors (only
by means of a tool). Dust and damp proof gaskets shall be provided around the
door panel edges. Each access door with MCCB located behind shall be fitted with
lockable cam type chromium plated handle that shall be mechanically interlocked
with the starting MCCB to require electrical isolation before the door can be opened.

All equipment shall be mounted on sheet steel mounting plate with screws into
tapped holes and all live parts shall be shrouded to a minimum IP2X.

The minimum short circuit withstand rating for the different components shall be 25
kA for 3 seconds duration. However, the contractor shall forward a short circuit
calculation and upgrade the components if found necessary.

c. Internal Wiring

The MCC panels shall be fully wired internally at the manufacturer works to terminal
strips.
The control panel internal wiring shall accord with BS 7671:2008. All internal wiring
of the control panel shall utilize 600/1000V grade single core, circular Tri Rated PVC
(heat resistant) insulated cables of appropriate current carrying capacity complying
with BS 6231.

The control circuits live conductors shall be wired using white colour insulation while
the neutral conductors shall have black colour insulation.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-55/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

All cabling within the panel shall be run within appropriately sized purpose made
slotted, plastic trunking, fitted with appropriate retaining clips and arranged to run
continuously around inside the panel. Cables to items of control gear shall then
leave the trunking slots adjacent to their location, with any quantity of cables from
the trunking to control item being formed into a loom using flexible plastic loom
wraps.

d. Fixings

No item of equipment secured within the control panel shall incur penetration of the
main cabinet enclosure for riveting, bolting, etc.

All fixings shall be achieved with adequately sized brass bolts and nuts (or threaded
inserts).

Any fixing bolt visible from the front face of the panel shall be mushroom headed
and bright chromium plated with similar sized visible bolt heads generally used, with
the possible exception of main panel fascia plate retaining bolts which may be
larger.

e. Identification & Referencing

Each isolator switch, indicator lamp and panel component shall have its function
clearly identified and labeled.

Adjacent to each external connections terminal block shall be fixed a label


identifying each field device to be connected with each wiring terminal individually
referenced to the main wiring diagram. Each circuit breaker and starter shall be
labeled to define the item protected and the rating or overload settings to be used.

For ease of tracing cabling, at each termination position the cable shall be identified
with a numbered Helerman cable identification ferrule corresponding to the
workshop wiring diagram provided with the control panel.

All label plaques shall be screw fixed engraved black traffolyte having white
substrate with clear and legible letters / numbers, graded in size for emphasis and
positive identification. The intended labeling text and formats shall in all cases be
submitted to the Consultants for approval prior to manufacturing. Warning labels
shall be provided in all compartments and spaces fixed in prominent locations to
warn of any dangerous voltages that may be present eg. 415 V and 240 V.

Engraved traffollyte mimic diagrams plaques shall be provided fixed to all MCC
panel fascia to clearly chart in a single-line format the configuration of electrical
connections. The intended labeling diagram, text and format shall in all cases be
submitted to the Consultants for approval prior to manufacturing.

f. Compensated Equipment

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-56/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

Any motorized valves and damper controlled via a compensated system, shall be
arranged such that a manual selector switch is provided to override compensated
selection and enable manual opening/closing or on/off control, as appropriate. Any
compensator unit mounted within the control cabinet shall remain in the
manufacturer's purpose made enclosure and be installed strictly in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations.

The panels shall contain all the necessary devices for the automatic restart of units
after power failure where required.

21.2.12 CONTACTORS - OVERLOAD AND CONTROL RELAYS

Contactors used for any application in the project shall be type tested to AC3 duty
and comply with BS EN 60947-4-1:2001.

The contactors shall be 4-pole units designed for use on ac electrical systems. The
magnet and contact movements shall be horizontal. The contacts shall be double
break, butt- type and each moving contact shall be individually spring-loaded. All
fixed and moving contacts shall be of the silver-cadmium oxide type.

The contactor coils shall be of the continuous rated type. These coils shall be
wound on moulded formers and shall be vacuum impregnated.

The contactors shall be factory calibrated and compensated for operation at an


ambient temperature 50oC and be sealed.

Each contactor shall be provided with an adequate number of auxiliary switches of


N/O and N/C types.

Contactors shall be complete with provisions for manual operation (ON/OFF),


indications and overload relays.

a. Overload Relays

These are to be used in conjunction with motor starters to provide protection against
overloads, phase sequence, phase failure (single phasing) and under voltage
conditions.

The relays shall be selected such that the full-load current of the equipment
protected falls at the centre of the relays adjustment range.

For Star-Delta starting, the overload relays shall be placed on the mains supply
contactor.
b. Control Relays

Shall be of the encapsulated plug-in type and incorporate positive visual indication
that the operating coil is energized. Bases for relays shall be mounted horizontally,
to ensure relay is vertical above the base when the control cabinet is in its intended
location. Cable terminals shall be of the screw type, suitable for receipt of spade
type crimped/soldered lugs.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-57/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

Adjustable time-delay relays used for Star-Delta starters shall ensure precise
tolerance for the timing function. The relay shall have a linear setting scale over a
350o rotation by means of a knurled knob with calibrated timer setting marks. The
relay shall be equipped with two electrically separated time-delayed contacts, one
normally open and one normally closed.

21.2.13 FUSE SWITCHES AND ISOLATORS

a. General

These shall be metal clad with front operated handles interlocked with the enclosure
to prevent opening while the switch is closed and Shall comply with BS EN 60947-
3:2009.

The switches shall have clear and positive "On/Off" indications and a means of
locking in "Off" or out of service position.

Enclosures shall have a minimum ingress protection rating of IP65 for external or
damp locations and IP54 for other situations.

Load break switches and switch-fuses should be ARC TESTED (complete system
along with enclosure) and type tested from by a reputed international testing
laboratory for the degree of ingress protection as well as electrical arc testing.

The enclosure should have a reliable position indicator so that in the event the
switch contacts are welded together, the handle (front operated) should deviate
from the ON-Position less than 45o.

b. Fuse Switches and Switch-Fuses

Shall comply with BS EN 60947-3:2009.

Fuses shall comply with BS 88 and be of bolted fixing type, class Q1, certified for
415V and AC3 duty, rated as indicated.

Fused switch carriages shall be of the withdrawable type.

Fuse switches shall be ASTA certified to 50 kA minimum.

c. Disconnect Switches (Isolators)

These shall be of the same design as the switch-fuses, fitted with solid copper links
in place of the fuses.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-58/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

Single-pole and neutral (SP&N), or triple pole and neutral (TP&N).

Ratings: Minimum rated fused short-circuit current, 50 kA RMS.

Enclosures shall have a minimum ingress protection rating of IP65 for external or
damp locations and IP54 for other situations.

Some applications (as identified upon the drawings) may require 2-pole (SPN), 4-
pole (TPN) or 6-pole versions of these switches and these shall be provided where
ever indicated.

21.2.14 CABLES

a. Trunking and Conduit Wiring

Wiring to general purpose lighting and power circuits shall be via PVC insulated
single core cables with stranded copper conductors which shall be contained within
adequately sized cable Trunkings and conduits. The cables shall be of 450/750
volts grade conforming to BS 6004:2006 and be sized and configured for each
circuit as described upon the drawings and in conformance with the KAHRAMAA
regulations.

The number and sizes of cables drawn into the conduit / trunking shall not exceed
than that given in the appropriate tables of the KAHRA MAA regulations. In all
cases, it must be possible to draw-in and withdraw any cable(s) without incurring
damage to the remaining cables. The cables to be used shall be colour coded
insulation - Red, Yellow and Blue for the respective phase wiring. Black shall be
reserved for the neutral cables and Green/Yellow stripe for the earth conductor.
The cables shall be installed on the ' loop-in' system (no through wiring), no joints
being made anywhere in the installation.

Cable ends shall be stripped with purpose made cable stripping tools correctly
adjusted to suit the conductor size. All terminations to fittings and accessories
subject to a temperature rise in excess of 130 oF shall be carried out with conductors
insulated with heat resisting material such as Butyl Hypalon or Equal and approved.

Within distribution boards the wires comprising each circuit shall be bound together
and neatly wired into position in an approved manner in-line with good workmanship
practice.
When cables are installed in trunkings the conductors of each circuit shall be bound
together in an approved manner at 600 mm. intervals. In vertical trunkings, cables
shall be supported by means of racks to prevent stress caused by the weight of the
conductors. The overall cross-sectional area of all conductors installed shall not
exceed the 45% space factor permitted by KAHRA MAA.

To identify the wires, each phase wiring insulation shall be of the designated color
and provided with cable marker ferrules to identify the circuit number.

No more than two cable conductors shall be joined in a terminal of any lighting or
small power accessory including light fittings. The minimum conductor size to be

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-59/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

used for lighting circuits shall be 2.5 mm2, and for 13 A socket ring circuits it shall be
4 mm2.

The cable core identification ferrules or sleeves shall be made of a heat resistant
elastic insulating material which shall be white with a gloss finish. The cable marker
ferrules shall not be adversely affected by contact with oil or moisture. Text
characters shall be suitably and indelibly marked in black.

b. Surface Wiring

Wiring for sub-main wiring and large items of plant shall in general be by multi-core
armoured cables run exposed on the surfaces of cable ladders / trays or fixed and
cleated direct to the building fabric as indicated upon the drawings. The cable
conductors shall be sized to comply with the following:

1. Derating regulations of KAHRA MAA.

2. Switch rating of the load.

3. Allowance for 2.5% maximum voltage drop from the transformer secondary
terminals or KAHRA MAA supply point to the furthest most circuit load.

The contractor shall provide armoured cables where-ever specified. These cables
shall be designed for 600/1000 V systems and shall be either PVC/SWA/PVC or
XLPE/SWA/PVC or XLPE/SWA/LSOH type as indicated on the drawings.

Any armoured cable being used at site must bear the manufacturer's name on the
outer sheath and the voltage rating for which it is manufactured.

1. PVC/SWA/PVC cables shall comply with BS 6346.

2. XLPE/SWA/PVC cables shall comply with BS 5467.

3. XLPE/LSOH/SWA/LSOH cables shall comply with BS 6724.

Cables carrying 3 phase and neutral loads shall be 4 cores, the neutral conductor
having the same cross-sectional area as the phase conductors.

The minimum internal radius of bends in cables shall not be less than that given in
the appropriate Table of the BS 7671:2008.

Parallel cable runs comprising more than one cable shall be fixed by suitable sized
nylon cable cleats at an interval not to exceed 1500 mm along the cable tray or
cable ladder.

Cables shall be installed as indicated upon the drawings. The arrangement of


cables and the methods of drawing and laying down shall be approved by the
Consultant prior to commencing installation. Where cables are installed in areas or
locations that may be subjected to direct sunlight, the contractor shall provide

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-60/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

suitably approved sunshield made of an inverted 20 gauge galvanized steel sheet


and fixed in position with approved nut and bolt fixings.

Cables indicated on the drawings to be installed in floor trenches shall be provided


with adequate cable racking / tray / ladder supports appropriate for the quantity and
weight of cables to be installed. Cables shall be run neatly and arranged to make
the most efficient use of the space provided within the cable trench.

Cables indicated upon the drawings to be buried direct below ground shall be laid at
a minimum depth of 600 mm below the finished grade. The cables shall be laid as
a single layer on a cushion of graded and washed fine builders sand of 200 mm
depth and shall be covered with another layer of 200 mm depth above it. Cable
marking tape shall be installed on the top layer of sand throughout the cable route.
A minimum horizontal clearance of 50 mm shall be maintained between the cables.

Where indicated upon the drawings cables installed below ground shall be drawn
into concrete encased duct banks to cross below roads, paths and paved / concrete
areas. Concrete encased duct banks shall comprise circular PVC ducts of minimum
150 mm diameter buried at a depth of 800 mm. below ground level and surrounded
by a concrete layer of 100 mm. thickness from all sides, unless otherwise specified.

Cable route and joint marker posts of an approved type shall be provided along the
route of buried cables as instructed by the Consultant. Markers shall be installed at
all cable joint positions and all places where the route changes direction and on
straight routes at distances not exceeding 100 m. The provision and installation of
cable markers shall be included in the schedule of rates for excavation and
reinstatement.

Where any part of the cable is buried in the ground, the armouring shall not be used
as the earth and instead a separate PVC sheathed earth conductor shall be
provided and buried alongside the power cable. The size of the earth conductor
shall not be less than half the associated phase conductor but not less than 16
mm2.

The Contractor will be responsible for removing and replacing of all cable trench
covers, free of charge, during the execution of his work as directed by the
Consultant.

All single core and multi-core main power cables shall be installed with cleats or
saddles when fixed along vertical routes. Small power cables, those having
conductor areas of 16 mm2 and less, shall be installed on trays but segregated from
other cables on the same tray by a space of at least 30 mm. All multi-care / pair
control cables shall also be installed on trays dedicated to controls cables.

All cable terminations shall be carried out using compression type cable glands
designed to adequately and firmly secure the steel wire armouring. All armouring
and all faces of armour clamps making contact with them shall be thoroughly
cleaned during installation and all clamps shall be adequately tightened to ensure
good electrical contact. The installation shall be such that there will be no electrical
discontinuity along the armouring and no local hot spots or high resistances. The
means of earthing the armouring to the earth bar at either end shall be provided by
means of an approved metallic bond of adequate conductance and the bonding

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-61/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

connection shall be as short and straight as practicable. All terminations are to be


fitted with PVC shrouds so as no exposed cable armouring exists.

c. Fire Barriers

Where cable ladders, trays, conduits or trunkings pass through fire-resistant


structural elements such as walls and floors designated as fire barriers, the
openings made shall after installation be sealed or fire stopped according to the
appropriate degree of fire resistance of the breached fire wall. In the case of cable
trunkings or conduits an approved internal fire-resistant barrier shall also be
provided to prevent the spread of fires.

d. Mineral Insulated Cables

MICC/PVC covered cables 600/1000 V grades Conforming to BS 6207 Part 1, shall


be used mainly for the sub-station wiring within the HV switchgear and transformer
rooms.

Mineral insulated cables shall have copper conductors with copper sheath and PVC
over sheaths in all applications.

Neoprene conductor sleeves shall be fitted to the exposed conductors and cold
setting compound shall be used packed within the pot seals for normal applications.

Terminations shall comply with BS 6081-1. The temperature classification of the


seal shall be Class 105 unless otherwise indicated or directed by the consultant.
Glands shall be Type Y and a PVC shroud shall be neatly fitted over gland
terminations. Before fitting the shroud in place, all bare metal shall be wrapped with
pressure sensitive adhesive PVC tape.

On three phase circuits, the insulation sleeves shall carry distinctive coloured
(red/yellow/blue) bands identifying each phase, and for single phase circuits then a
red band shall be used to mark the phase conductor. For circuits involving 3
phases, the correct phase identification colour bands shall be used, and the
markers shall conform to BS 1710.

Cables shall be fixed to walls or cable tray by means of PVC covered copper clips.
Cable clips and/or saddles shall be of the correct type fire-resistant as made by the
cable manufacturer, or by special copper saddles for runs of large number of
cables.
The distance between fixing centres shall follow manufacturer's recommendations
and the completed installation shall present a neat, appearance, with all cables held
rigidly, all bends and sets neatly formed.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-62/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

Cables rising from the floor in exposed positions shall have some form of
mechanical protection for approximately 450 mm. above floor level. This may either
be a short length of metal channel (mainly cable tray).
Frequent insulation tests shall be made during the course of the work to ensure that
pot seals have been installed correctly and in the case of cables buried in the
structure a test shall be made as soon as possible after the cables and its protection
channel have been covered.

While crossing expansion joints, a slight horizontal off-set shall be made in the
cable run in order to take up possible expansion movements.

e. Fire Rated Flexible Multi-core Cables

Fire rated flexible multi-core cables conforming to BS 7629-1 shall be used as


shown in the drawing for applications that do not require cable armouring. These
thermoplastic LSOH sheathed / insulated cables shall have stranded copper
conductors with high performance damage resistant insulation and an aluminium foil
/ polyester tape screen in contact with adequately sized bare tinned annealed
copper stranded circuit protective conductor.

The Fire rated flexible cables shall comply with the following fire performance
standards:

1. Resistance to Fire: BS 6387 category CWZ.


2. Smoke Emission: BS 7622.
3. Acid Gas Emissions: BS 6425-1 <0.5% Acid gas.
4. Flame Retardant: BS 4066-1.
5. Reduced Flame : BS 4066-3 Category C propagation.

In addition the cables shall have excellent data/signal transmission characteristics,


manufactured under an ISO9001Quality system and be BASEC certified.

These cable shall be run in PVC conduits or cable tray / trunkings or run in open
execution (no more than two parallel cables) in the ceiling voids by means of LSOH
coated single hole, fire resistant metal fixing clips. Cable clips and/or saddles shall
be of the correct type as made / recommended by the cable manufacturer or by
special LSOH coated saddles for runs of large number of cables.

The distance between fixing centers shall follow the manufacturer's


recommendations and the completed installations shall present a neat, appearance,
with all cables held rigidly, all bends and sets neatly formed.

While crossing expansion joints, a slight horizontal off-set shall be made in the
cable run in order to take up possible expansion movements.

21.2.15 CONDUITS

a. General

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-63/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

Polyvinyl Chloride Conduits and accessories shall be used for lighting and small
power circuit wiring unless otherwise specified. These shall be concealed in cast
within the slabs, walls and floor screeds,. In areas external to sealed voids where
the conduits are exposed then galvanised (GI) steel conduits and accessories shall
be used. The use of black enamel (BE) conduits shall not be permitted.

b. UPVC Conduits

The plastic conduits (uPVC) shall be manufactured from heavy gauge, rigid un-
plasticized polyvinyl chloride compound of the high impact grade. The impact
strength shall be tested in accordance with BS EN 61386. No conduit smaller than
20 mm in diameter shall be used.

The minimum wall thickness for the conduits shall be as follows:

20 mm dia.: 1.8 mm
25 mm dia.: 1.9 mm
32 mm dia: 2.5 mm
38 mm dia.: 2.5 mm
50 mm dia.: 2.5 mm

All PVC conduit accessories shall be manufactured from rigid uPVC of the same
manufacturer as that of the conduits.

Where a solid fixed joint between a conduit and accessory is required, use shall be
made of an adhesive recommended by the manufacturer of the plastic conduits
selected. When making a joint, care must be taken to ensure that the plastic
conduit is thoroughly cleaned at the ends to ensure good adhesion.

Flexible joints shall be made using a non-hardening adhesive and shall be used in
conjunction with approved expansion couplers. Conduit installations that become
distorted or flexed through thermal expansion will not be accepted.

Where bends or off-sets are required, these shall be made in accordance with the
manufacturers instruction without altering the section of plastic conduit/s. For plastic
conduits up to 25 mm diameter, cold bends shall be acceptable. The bends shall
be formed with the use of a bending spring obtained from the plastic conduits
manufacturer.

For large sizes of conduit/s, bends shall be formed by pre-heating the tube before
inserting the spring to prevent shrinking. Pre-heating shall be done with a suitable
electrically heated and powered blow lamp (NOT a naked flame) and sufficient care
shall be taken to avoid physical damages of the conduits (deformation). Any other
method of bending can also be considered subject to the approval of the consultant.

Deep circular boxes shall be used where more than 10 nos. of 2.5 mm 2 cables are
crossing within the box. Plastic conduits shall not be installed in situations where
the continuous ambient temperature exceeds 50 oC or where, for intermittent
periods, the ambient temperature exceeds 70 oC; badly formed or damaged plastic
conduits shall not be permitted to be installed. Expansion couplers shall be used on
all straight runs of plastic conduits exceeding 6000 mm in length. The plastic

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-64/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

conduit shall be free to slide within saddles to if used in a surface mounting


application..

Special consideration should be given to fixing of all accessories in situations where


the temperature fluctuates excessively. The plastic conduits shall be fixed at 1000
mm intervals by spacer bar saddles; draw-in points shall be provided at every 8000
mm interval along straight runs or after not more than one right angle bend; where
such points are provided exclusively for draw-in purpose, they must comprise
inspection couplers.

Where the conduit system are required to be laid concealed then all the lighting
conduits shall be laid at the roof level and dropping down to each point and all the
power circuit conduits shall be laid in the screed of the floor wherever possible or in
the floor slab using only the correct manufacturers fittings and accessories.

The Electrical Contractor shall exercise care when installing plastic conduits to
prevent interference with or from other services and shall keep at least 300 mm
clear of any hot water pipes.

No equipment weighing more than 12 kg shall be suspended from the circular


plastic boxes. For loads more than 12 kg in weight then approved and purpose
made supporting systems shall be used with flexible cable and plug-in type roses
used for the final wiring connections.

Where purpose made junction boxes are used to draw-in the cables, then the
covers of these boxes shall be of the same finish as that of the switch / socket
plates.

Where enclosed bulkhead type light fittings are fixed directly to a high impact
circular uPVC conduit box, steel insert clips must be used for fixing the luminaries
on the box.

c. Galvanised Steel Conduits

Steel conduits shall be new, heavy gauge, solid drawn, galvanized (GI) and shall
comply with BS EN 61386. Each length of the conduit shall bear a stamp
guaranteeing it to be as per the required specifications. The use of conduits less
than 20 mm in diameter will not be permitted.

All conduit fittings and accessories including screwed couplers, ordinary clips,
saddles, pipe hooks, screwed reducers, stopping plugs, lock nuts plus male and
female brass bushes shall comply with BS EN 61386 as applicable. All screwed
couplers, screwed reducers, and locknuts shall only be used on surface
installations, Screwed or push-fit inspection elbows, bends and inspection couplings
must not be used.

Galvanized steel sheet adaptable inspection boxes shall be provided and fixed in
inspection and in locations where more than two conduits cross. These boxes shall
be 150 x 150 x150 mm deep, (inside measure). Where the boxes are fully
recessed, they shall be provided with 14 SWG galvanized steel lids, overlapping the
boxes by 6mm all round.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-65/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

d. Methods of Installation

Conduits buried in concrete shall have 37 mm depth minimum of cover over the
entire length; conduits buried in plaster shall have 6 mm depth minimum of cover
over its entire length. Conduits penetrating through the roof slabs shall be complete
with goose neck and sealed. Conduits laid on concrete floor slabs shall be fixed by
means of corrugated steel saddles and secured by hardened steel pins at 1200 mm
centres. On pre-stressed concrete floor slabs fixings must be in to the joints
between the beams unless otherwise instructed by the Consultant.

In the case of cast in-situ applications, the contractor shall ensure that adequate
precautions are taken for the secure fixing, positioning, alignment and protection of
all conduits and boxes during the construction operation. These conduits and fittings
must also be suitably plugged to prevent the ingress of foreign matter in order to
prevent the conduit system from becoming blocked during the building construction.
Any additional costs resulting from blockages or damage to conduits due to
negligence or lack of attendance shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

Female brass bushes shall be fitted on to all free ends of the conduit system.

Conduit systems shall be electrically and mechanically continuous and water tight
after the installation is completed.

Immediately before wiring, all conduit systems shall be thoroughly swabbed out until
dry and clean. No steel conduit installations shall be used as a sole earthing
system. Separate circuit protective conductors shall be installed within the conduits
in all cases.

All spare ways in junction boxes etc., left for possible future extensions shall be
fitted with brass stopping plugs. For wiring purposes, all draw-in and inspection
boxes must be installed in readily accessible positions, as agreed by the Consultant.

No more than one right angle bend or equivalent sets must be made in conduit runs
between inspection boxes. On straight runs, inspection boxes must be inserted
after each second conduit length.

Corners shall be turned by easy bends or sets made cold without altering the
section or opening the seams of the conduit. No bend shall have an inside radius of
less than three times the external diameter of the conduit. All bends must be
machine made.

The inside surface of the erected conduit and conduit fittings shall be smooth and
free from burrs and other defects. Exposed GI conduits shall be painted with two
coats of paint to match with the color of the walls.

21.2.16 CABLE TRUNKING AND TRAYS

a. Steel Trunking

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-66/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

Cable trunking shall be used where it is accessible and can replace numerous final
circuit conduit runs.

A reputed and approved Engineering company shall manufacture all the trunking
and fittings.

Galvanised (GI) sheet metal cable trunking shall be used throughout in all vertical
rising ducts, in the positions detailed on the drawings or for terminating conduits and
cables at distribution boards etc. Cable trunking must be used in ceiling voids
where otherwise large runs of multiple conduits would occur.

Cable trunking and fittings shall comply with BS EN 50085 and shall be Class 3
galvanized (G) protected as detailed in the following specifications and drawings.

All cable trunking shall consist of abutted sections manufactured from Zintec coated
high-grade steel sheet of not less than 16 swg. All accessories such as bends,
tees, offsets, reducers etc., shall be of the same manufacture and finish and be of
the gusseted type to aid the installation of cables.

Multi-compartment trunking shall be divided into the required number of


compartments by means of continuous steel sheet separators running the full length
of the trunking. Each partition shall be at such a height that when the trunking
cover is fastened in position there shall be no gap between the top edge of the
partition and the inside face of the cover. Corresponding separate compartments
shall be provided in all tees, angles, reducers etc., to ensure that segregation of the
various services is effected as detailed in the specifications and drawings.

All tees, reducers and angles for trunking shall have folded and welded corners. All
angles formed in wall trunking shall have fillet corners.

Adjoining lengths shall be correctly aligned and the trunkings shall be joined
together by means of internal fishplate connector and mushroom headed set screws
or purpose made coupling pieces depending on the design of the trunking. After
joining, there shall be no gap visible between sections of the trunking or
compartment partitions.

Internal fish plate connectors shall be not less than 2.5 mm. thick and attached by
means of not less than 4 nos. cadmium plated steel mushroom headed M4 screws
for trunking having a total cross sectional area below 5700 mm2 and 8 nos.
cadmium plated steel mushroom headed M4 screws for trunking having cross
sectional areas in excess of 5700 mm2 each passing through clearance holes,
shake proof washers and nuts. Two pairs of screws on either side of the joint shall
be connected by tinned copper links with split washers under the nuts to provide
guaranteed electrical continuity across the joints.

The nuts shall be located on the outside of the trunking and the tinned copper
straps shall be provided across all joints formed by straight lengths, angles, tees
etc. The copper straps shall be fixed on the external faces of the trunking to be
visible.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-67/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

All joints shall be securely bolted together and the whole assembly shall be fixed at
intervals not greater than 1200 mm dependent upon the size of the trunking and
number of cable contained.

The trunking shall be fitted with a continuous lid made from the same material which
shall be secured to the trunking by means of cadmium plated mushroom head
screws spaced not greater than 450 mm. Where trunking terminates at
switchboards, distribution boards and equipment enclosures, a proper-flanged
coupling piece shall be used, securely bolted to the trunking and to the enclosure.
Solid end stops shall be a manufacturers purpose made steel sheet terminal piece.
In case of trunking covers, which are cut, the contractor shall ensure that the cut
edges are true and match with the adjacent covers. The over lapping of covers will
not be permitted and under no circumstance either will gaps be accepted.

Where trunkings passes through walls or floors, sections of cover plate shall be
permanently fitted before erection such that the cover plate extends a minimum of
50 mm. beyond the finished surfaces of the walls or floors.

The wiring within the trunking shall be securely held in position by means of the
manufacturers own clips or bars fitted at regular intervals throughout the run of
trunking, with separate cable clips being provided for each compartment of the
trunking.

Where cables are to be enclosed in the same trunking compartment and connected
to different distribution boards i.e. single phase and 3 phase power circuits, they
shall be distinguished by separating the cables and binding with insulated tape at
intervals of 1200 mm together with an approved means of identification sleeve
adjacent to each binding that clearly denotes the circuit type and reference.

All connections between trunking and/or bus-bar chambers and to each item of
switch, switch-fuse or distribution boards are to be made direct and without
intermediate conduit or conduit couplers. The top and/or bottom glanding plates of
the items being connected are to be removed and a suitable dimensioned slot is to
be cut to accommodate passage of all the cable plus a further 6 mm. all around with
similar slot in the appropriate position in the trunking or busbar chamber. A
laminated paxolin fillet 5 mm. thick is to be inserted between the item plate and
trunking and bus-bar chamber with a slot 6 mm to be smaller all around than the slot
cut in the metal parts so that damage to the cable is avoided.

All covers shall be easily removed with a hand tool and the trunking shall be
properly spaced away from any surface which may prevent this.

Dimensions obtained from site shall determine the shape of purpose-made pieces
of trunking. On-site welding shall not be allowed. Flexible expansion joints shall be
provided in trunking runs where they cross building expansion joints and as
required.

Cable trunking shall have 25% spare capacity minimum for the installation of any
future cables. Due precaution shall be taken to ensure that the correct space factor
of the fully loaded trunking is provided.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-68/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

Cable trunking installed either in voids or on the soffit of exposed ceilings wherever
possible shall be installed with the compartments arranged in a horizontal plane with
the access lid at the lower edge of the trunking and all conduits connected to the
top and sides of the assembly.

The cable trunking shall be installed immediately above the false ceiling structure
and below the concrete soffit.

Conduits shall be used to complete the final containment of each circuit from the
general trunking system installed in the ceiling voids unless otherwise stated and
shall emanate from the top of the appropriate compartment of the cable trunking
and rise vertically to the structural soffit. The conduits shall then be taken through
the structural slab or be arranged to drop vertically to terminate at the various
lighting, power, telephone or auxiliary service outlet points.

For recessed cables terminating in recessed DBs, a recessed trunking shall be used
with cover flush with the outer surface of wall. In case of new cables being installed
on the surface of existing wall, surface trunking shall be used. In both cases, cables
shall be terminated with glands of appropriate type and size.

The whole of the trunking shall be installed in a skilled workman like fashion so that
it presents a neat appearance and shall ensure that continuous cable access is
maintained so that cables may be laid in the trunking and not drawn-in.

b. Cable Trays

The cable trays shall be of the conventional perforated pattern with return flanges
manufactured from a minimum of 2 mm or above Aluzink steel.

Aluzink is a sheet steel known for it inherent strength with an alloy coating
consisting of Silicon (1.6 %). Aluminium (55%) for protection against corrosion and
zinc (43.4%) safeguarding the steel. The Aluzink used should be of grade B500A,
AZ150 in conformity with grade DX 51D +AZ 150 as per EN 10215.

Sections of tray shall be jointed together with mushroom head screws, nuts and
spring washers. These shall be plated or treated with rust inhibitor. The screws and
nuts shall be so arranged to ensure that no projecting screw threads occur on the
part of the tray upon which the cables are laid.

The cable trays shall be securely fixed to purpose made brackets with space behind
to allow the insertion of tools for the tightening up of nuts. The brackets shall be
spaced in such a way so as to prevent sagging. The contractor shall ensure that
overall tray arrangement is rigid. The contractor shall include for all the cable trays
necessary to complete the works and as indicated upon the drawings.

The cable trays shall be of sufficient width to take all cables without crowding and
shall allow for possible future additions to the proportions of the present
requirements. Cables shall be run as a single layer: Stacking will not be permitted.

Cable trays fixed to walls or flat ceilings shall be installed with the flange outwards
or downwards respectively to suit and shall be anchored with an approved fixing

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-69/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

with spacing and washers such that the tray is spaced at least 25 mm from the
surface of the wall or ceiling. Earth continuity shall be maintained between each
section of cable tray and each total run of tray shall be effectively bonded to the
nearest earth continuity conductor.

Each section of tray shall be securely bolted to the next with sufficient overlap to
prevent sagging and twisting. Normal bends of not less than 450 mm radius shall
be used.

The method of fixing each run of cable tray shall be approved by the Consultant
prior to installation. In all instances, the cable trays shall be supported from the
structure of the building. The method of fixing the cable tray and brackets shall be
approved by the Consultant before installation.

The manufacturer shall confirm a guarantee of at least 12 years for the cable trays
against any corrosion in the Qatar climatic conditions.

Wherever tees or flat bends are required to be used, they shall be factory made.
No cutting of tray shall be permitted. Wherever necessary, the same shall be
properly painted with the prior permission of the Consultant. Deviation from the
straight shall, if possible, be made with purpose made bends. Where purpose
made bends cannot be used, the tray may be cut and the bends fabricated on site
to the approval of the Consultant.

All the supports shall be fabricated out of appropriately sized galvanized steel
channels.

21.2.17 ELECTRICAL DUCTS

For electrical power and low current system cables to be buried below ground the
cables ducts shall be made of high impact resistant uPVC compound. Ducts shall be
of the diameter and number indicated upon the drawings. In any event any duct run
run / bank shall include at minimum 1 no. spare duct (not indicated on the drawings)
of the same size to be installed in parallel.

Each duct shall include a suitably sized nylon draw rope to protrude at both ends for
the future drawing-in of cables. Power cable ducts shall be as follows:

1. Material - High Impact Resistant uPVC.

2. Internal Diameter - 150 mm / 100 mm / 75 mm / 50 mm.(as indicated


upon the drawings).

3. Minimum Wall thickness - 3.6 mm for 150mm Dia.


- 2.4 mm for 100mm Dia.
- 2.4 mm for 75mm Dia.
- 2.4 mm for 50mm Dia.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-70/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

4. For Telephone Cables - 90mm Dia., as per Q-Tel Standards.

uPVC pipe ducts shall be installed for the incoming Qatar Telecom(QTel) cables in
accordance with the configuration and methods detailed QGEWC (Electricity)
standard drawing for road crossings and elsewhere as described on the drawings.

uPVC pipe duct continuous pathway systems shall be installed in accordance with
Qatar National Telephone Service (QNTS) publication, with which the contractor is
deemed to be familiar.

Electrical Ducts used for Cables etc., shall be of the following types, as per QGEWC
regulations & Q-Tel standards and supplied by an approved manufacturer.

21.2.18 LIGHT FITTINGS

The contractor shall include in his costs for supply, erection, and connection of all
specified light fittings complete with suitable lamps in the positions shown upon the
drawings, unless otherwise directed.

No lighting fittings shall be purchased until the express authorization has been
received, in writing, from the Consultant to do so. This authorization shall be sought
by the Contractor in good time in order to allow the programme of works to continue
unaffected.

All light fittings shall be of types specified or be both equal and approved by the
Consultant. No alternative light fittings will be considered unless the Contractor
receives in writing the express approval from the Consultant.

All fluorescent lamp fittings, as a minimum, shall be complete with low loss epoxy
filled ballasts, switch start control gear and power factor correction condensers to
give a minimum power factor of 0.9 lagging and the control gear noise level shall be
limited to 24 dB.

The Contractor shall provide fluorescent lamps with electronic high frequency
ballasts if this is required on the schedule of light fittings. The units shall be of high
quality, low loss and low noise level units superior in all respects to the equivalent
conventional wound ballasts. These units and the lamps shall also be compatible for
use with the standard available dimming technologies.

The light fitting shall not be considered complete without the lamps of specified
wattage.

The connections between the circuit wiring and the light fittings mounted upon the
underside suspended ceilings shall be effected by means of plug-in type ceiling
roses and 1.5 mm2 3 core heat resistant flexible cable. The same method shall be
used for lighting fittings installed with chain or steel wire suspensions.

For light fittings fixed direct to conduit systems the cables shall loop-in to the light
fitting via a neoprene bush provided to protect the cables. The cables shall then be
terminated in the light fitting terminal block. No through wiring shall be permitted in

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-71/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

light fittings and the cables that do enter shall be kept as short as possible and be
fitted with heat resistant sleeves. All metal work shall be bonded to earth.

Where surface mounted light fittings are installed, conduit boxes, either of the loop-
in type or standard type shall be installed above each fitting position. Extension
rings shall be fitted as necessary so that the bottom of the ring is flush with the
underside of the ceiling. White break joint rings shall also be provided between the
fittings and conduit box to mask the joints as shall be deemed necessary by the
Consultant.

In areas where the ceiling is of the suspended type, the weight of the conduit and
light fittings shall under no circumstance be carried by this type of ceiling and
suitable independent suspension fixings shall be provided and installed by the con
tractor to carry the weight of the fittings.

All lamps throughout the installation shall be supplied and fixed in position as per
this contract. They shall be of the sizes and types specified. All lamps over 150 W
shall be of the Edison screw-cap type. The lamps shall be supplied complete with
end caps compatible with the fittings into which they are to be inserted.

Fluorescent lamps shall be of correlated colour temperature of 3000oK unless


otherwise specified.

Each and every light fitting shall be fitted with power factor correction capacitors to
raise the power factor to 0.9 lag or better.

All lighting luminaries shall comply with BS EN 60598.

The contractor shall ensure that fluorescent fittings are connected to the three
phase distribution boards such that there is no stroboscopic effect.

With the exception of certain light weight domestic and commercial pendant types
of light fittings, no fittings shall be suspended by means of flexible cables. Where
light fittings are suspended they shall be by means of purpose made metal
supports.

The contractor shall supply and install all necessary materials and equipment to
provide external lighting as shown on the drawings.

All excavation of cable trenches shall be carried out by the Main Contractor with the
Contractor in attendance. The Contractor shall supply all the electrical cable ducts,
warning tapes and marker posts required to complete the works. The electrical
contractor shall include for the necessary liaison with the Main Contractor in the
instruction and execution of this work. Before excavations are backfilled the
Consultant shall be notified by the Contractor in writing that the cable installation is
complete in order that an inspection may be made of the exposed cable installation.

All cables serving the luminaries shall loop in and out of the designated fittings and
joint boxes. No other intermediate cable joints shall be permitted.

An efficient and durable earth connection shall be made between the metalwork of
the luminaries and the wire armour of the cables.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-72/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

All cables used for the external lighting installation unless otherwise detailed, shall
be of PVC/SWA/PVC sheathed type supplied and installed in accordance with the
relevant clauses of this specification and the details indicated upon the drawings.

21.2.19 WIRING ACCESSORIES

a. Switches

The switches shall be single-pole type rated for 240 V and a 10 A inductive load. No
de-rating of the switches shall be required in the case of use fluorescent light fittings
or other inductive loads.

All 1 way lighting switches shall be arranged to switch on the lights when the rocker
is pushed downwards.

Switches shall be of robust construction to provide a long trouble free operational


life.

All the cover plates, switches, grid mounted systems and mounting boxes shall
conform to BS EN 60670 and BS EN 606691:2000.

Wherever more than one switch is shown on the drawings, they shall be multi-gang
grid switch assembly and where they are powered from different phases, then the
manufacturers phase barriers shall be provided and correctly installed.

Switch terminals shall be of the screw down type to avoid any to give firm and
secure electrical connections.

b. 13 A Socket Outlets

All 13 A socket outlets shall be of the switched type with 240 V, 13 A rated 3-pin
socket. The socket outlets shall comply with BS 1362-2:1995. Twin socket outlets
shall be used wherever two adjacent sockets are indicated together unless
otherwise mentioned.

All socket outlets shall be adequately earthed, the circuit protective conductor shall
terminate direct and a flying lead shall be installed between the outlet earth terminal
and outlet box. For switched socket outlets exposed to external environmental
conditions or internally in damp areas shall be weather proof (IP65 rated) and
corrosion resistant.

The switched socket outlets shall be provided with integral neon indicating lamp to
indicate the 'ON' status of switch, unless otherwise instructed by the Consultant.

All switch socket outlets shall be connected in ring circuits unless otherwise
specified and no spurs shall be permitted.
c. Connection Plates

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-73/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

All connection plates shall be provided flexible cable outlets and shall be installed
adjacent the equipment served such as fan coil units, water heaters and exhaust
fans. The connection plates shall be of a suitable rating having 3-way terminal
blocks and brass screws for direct connection of the flexible heat resistant cables.
They shall be of robust construction, of approved finish and of very high quality. All
flex outlets shall conform to BS 5733:1995.

d. Ceiling Roses

Ceiling roses shall be of an approved manufacture and be constructed from plastic


with a white finish conforming to BS 67:1999. All ceiling roses shall be fitted with an
integral 3-plate (high capacity) terminal block with earth terminal to comply with the
KAHRAMAA regulations. Where ceiling roses are mounted direct to recessed
conduit boxes they shall be fitted with a break joint ring (halo).

e. Double-Pole Switches

The switches for window A.C s. water heaters, hand dryers units etc., shall be
double-pole, rated for either 20/30/50 A as appropriate and the selection made
based on the connected load. The switches shall have indicating lamps and the
face plates to match the finished required for the area concerned. These switches
shall conform to BS EN 60669-1:2000.

f. Time Switches and Photo-Cell Controls

Photo-cells shall be of the photo-resistor type mounted externally in suitable location


to be approved by the Consultant. These photo-cells shall be equipped with
adjustment for the trigger light level.

A robust electro-mechanical time switch shall be provided. The time switch shall be
of the solar dial type suitable for the geographical latitude at which it shall operate.
It shall have a spring-reserve winding so that during power failure the clock
mechanism shall automatically keep accurate time for a minimum period of 12
hours.

The time-switch and photo-cell shall be wired and configured as shown upon the
drawings. The lights shall be switched by a multi-pole contactor also wired and
configured as shown upon the drawings. The contactor shall be of the rating
indicated on the drawings and shall be equipped with a coil that operates at 240 V
50 Hz, single phase ac.

The contractor shall also provide an override switch to switch on and switch off the
lights in the event the time and photo-cell controls fail to operate.

21.2.20 DOOR INTERCOM & DOOR BELL (ENTRY PHONE SYSTEM)

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-74/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

SCOPE
1. The Part specifies the general requirements for door intercom and
door bell. It shall be read in conjunction with other parts of the Project
Documentation.
2. Related Parts and Sections are as follows:
This Section General Provisions for Electrical Installations.
Cables and Small Wiring.
Conduits and Conduit Boxes.
Trunking.
Cable Trays.
Wiring Accessories and General Power.
Inspection & Testing.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1. The system shall be used to serve the Flats only. The system shall be
capable of serving Indoor and Outdoor Call Units.
2. The Digital Intercom System shall include, but not in a way of
limitation, the following:
Digital Color Video Door-station at Flats Main Entrances.
Power Supply.
Bus Control/Video Control Unit.
Indoor Color Video Hands Free Set in the Flats.
3. The Door Bell system shall be an integral part of indoor call
units at every Flat.

DIGITAL COLOR VIDEO DOOR ENTRANCE STATION


1. The color video door entrance station shall consist of Audio, Video,
and Digital Keypad & LCD Directory.
2. The color video door entrance station shall be made of anodized
aluminum or as approved by Architect, with 4 steel buttons, and
Electronic index (LCD Display). The Electronic index shall be
equipped with rear-lit display; it shall consist of call button of the
selected internal station and it must be installed along with the door
entrance station
3. The video door entrance shall be inserted in recessed box into the
wall. The Electronic index shall display names with extension numbers
and make the call directly. The Electronic index LCD display shall
show the letters in alphabetical order.

BUS CONTROL/VIDEO CONTROL UNIT


1. Bus control/ Video control units shall be provided according to the
system requirement.

POWER SUPPLY

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-75/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

1. The power supply provided with switching adjuster stabilized power


supply. The outputs of the power supply should be protected against
overloading or short-circuiting by temperature.
Technical Characteristic:
Main Power supply 2404V AC
Frequency 50 Hz
Output Voltage As required for the system

HANDS FREE COLOR VIDEO INTERCOM STATIONS


1. Intercom station shall be hands-free. It shall be suitable for desktop or
wall mounting fixing with purpose made bracket. The station shall be
able to record the visitor and store up to 8 images in memory.
2. The station shall be equipped with a press to talk bar, set, play record,
call and monitor button.
Technical Characteristic:
Video-Monitor: 3-1/2" direct-view TFT color LCD

INSTALLATION
1. Examine pathway elements intended for cable. Check raceways and
other elements for compliance with space allocations, installation
tolerances, hazards to cable installation, and other conditions affecting
installation.
2. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where intercom
equipment is to be installed.
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
4. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to
terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's
limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and
distribution spools.
5. Pulling Cable: Do not exceed manufacturers recommended pulling
tensions. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded
cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points.
Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace
it with new cable.
6. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: For power and control wiring, use
numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal
cabinets; and equipment enclosures. Tighten electrical connectors
and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening
values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in U486.
7. Grounding: Provide independent signal circuit grounding
recommended by manufacturer.

21.2.21 EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEM

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-76/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

a. General

The Emergency lighting system and all its components shall be designed & installed
to meet the local fire department requirements & the respective EN & BS standards
and regulations applicable on the project. The products shall have a binding agency
agreement with a local company in Qatar and the product shall have installation
references in Qatar and shall have installations in the Middle East for at least 5
years. Spares parts and engineering support shall be continuously available for the
product both during installation / commissioning as well as the operational life. Local
Civil Defense Department approval shall also be granted the product.

Emergency lighting shall fulfill the functions that follow:

1. Illuminate the escape routes.


2. Indicate the escape route direction clearly.
3. Provide EXIT signs on escape doors and routes to such doors.
4. Ensure fire alarm call points, fire fighting equipment and other life saving
equipment on the premises are adequately illuminated.
5. Permit operations concerned with safety measures & to shut down all
hazardous processes.

Each emergency lighting circuit shall be used for the supply, automatic testing &
monitoring of a maximum of 20 no. emergency light fittings per circuit. The quantity
and locations of the panels shall be as indicated on the layout / riser drawings. The
system shall be fully addressable type with individual light monitoring facilities as
follows:

1. Input Voltage: 240V ac.


2. Output Mains: 240V ac.
3. Output Emergency: 220V DC.

Battery back-up shall be provided for a minimum duration of three hours under full
load emergency operation, with a minimum of 75 -100% light output on all
connected light fittings.

b. Mechanical Construction

The battery housing shall be a sheet steel, powder coated housing (IP21) with
removable screwed front, rear & top doors to provide complete access to the
batteries and components. The electronics section shall have I(P21) sheet steel
enclosure with transparent polycarbonate window. Within electrical sub-stations
panels shall have IP54 ingress protection.

The electronics module shall have large cabling compartments with cable entries
from the top via four or more undrilled removable metal flange plates. All incoming
cables & looping circuits shall be connected on protected & fused terminals as per
ENVDE0100. All outgoing light fitting circuits shall be connected direct to relevant
components via plug-in type terminals able to accept 2.5 mm2 conductors.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-77/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

c. Electrical Construction

For the change-over module the system shall be built up in a modular format with all
modules being of the plug-in type and encapsulated design. The outgoing circuits
shall be fed through change-over modules. Each module shall be capable of
switching two separate circuits with a maximum load of 3 Amps or 20 Nos. light
fixtures connected to it. Emergency & Exit lights will be connected to each circuit,
thereby allowing connection of luminaries of all switching modes, namely
Maintained, Non-maintained and Switched Maintained in the same circuit. All the
change-over modules will be plug-in type and are no load and short circuit protected
with independent fuses for mains and battery supply and will have LED type status
indication for operation and failure.

d. Batteries

Each panel will have maintenance free sealed lead acid batteries with rated 10
years service life at 25 0C and capable of supporting the connected load for 3 hours.
The central batteries shall be located in air conditioned room with maximum room
temperature of 250C. The room shall be air-conditioned using a re-circulation air-
conditioning system without any special battery room ventilation requirement.
Where the space required for the batteries does not permit the installation of same
in standard enclosure, the batteries shall be installed in a fire rated room, on
purpose built support stand / enclosure.

e. Battery Charger

The battery Charger module shall be a fully encapsulated plug-in type,


microprocessor controlled module with temperature controlled voltage charging to IU
characteristics. An automatic boost charging facility shall be built-in to the system
depending on the required total battery capacity. It shall have charging &
supervising via battery monitoring at intervals of 5 minutes or less for failure
indication of battery circuit as well as battery charger. The charger shall be designed
for a 90% recharge of a fully discharged battery set within 20 hours.

The charger shall come complete with earth leakage monitor for the battery circuit
and shall be provided with LED indications for:

1. Operation
2. Charger On
3. Booster On
4. Mains Operation
5. Battery capacity > 10%, >50%, 100%
6. Charging Failure
7. Insulation fault

The charger shall also have potential free indicator contacts for remote indication of:

1. Charging failure.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-78/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

2. Fast charge.
3. Insulation fault.

The charger shall have a push button to test and simulate earth leakage failures. It
shall include plug-in-type terminals as well as the protection fuses for mains and
battery accessible via the front plate of the charger

f. Control Module

Each panel will have modular plug-in type freely programmable control module with
4x20 character contrast controlled liquid crystal display, touch pad keys for
programming and monitoring of the panel & constant memory back up with two year
duration logbook facility. It should have separate buttons for test, function test and
battery duration test. In addition three freely programmable buttons shall be
provided to conduct functions as per users priority. Each control module shall be
programmable as master / slave to access status of the other panels installed on
site.

The control module should have the features that follow:

1. Monitor & control all test cycles & functions


2. Indicate every status of the system & the connected luminaries
3. Display & program the status of each circuit
4. Conduct an Earth Leakage test on each circuit.
5. Luminaries failure will be displayed with text location
6. Communicate and program the function of addressable electronic ballast on
every slave luminaries.
7. Programming for the volt-free contacts for the BMS operation.
8. Programming and status of the Sub-circuit monitoring inputs and the
associated luminaries.

The control module shall also display the battery voltage level, withdrawn battery
current in the test or emergency modes, charge failures, interrupted battery charge
circuit, luminaries failure (address with text location), final circuit or sub-distribution
board supply failure (address with text location), function test, battery test, earth
leakage failure with respect to circuit. Both tests shall be manually programmed.
The control module has three LEDs for status indication of mains supply ON/OFF,
luminaries or unit failure and battery supply.

Failure recognition for each individual safety / EXIT light in conjunction with
proprietary electronic ballast including two wire monitoring module without additional
data line.

Programming of the control module will be possible through a smart card & all the
information including the logbook shall be stored on smart card, which is readable
on PC directly.

An electronically regulated monitoring loop output is included to monitor the mains


failure at distribution boards and sub-distribution boards. Final circuit monitoring
shall be carried out from the panel in such a way that emergency lights pertaining to
specific areas where power has failed will be energized only.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-79/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

Central monitoring shall be carried through an Open Protocol network. Each central
battery/ sub-station panel shall be fitted with a terminal to facilitate communication
to the BMS system / Central monitoring unit via an open protocol to provide the
complete panel status.

g. Automatic Cyclic Function Monitoring & Logging Facility

An automatic monitoring and testing facility shall be installed with permanent cyclic
charger and battery monitor at intervals of five minutes or less with daily / weekly
function testing of the complete load supplied from the battery, charger, wiring,
luminaries, registration and logging of tests and results. A manually operated test
feature shall also be provided in addition to the automatic testing regime feature.
The monitoring system and data transfer shall be carried out based on a current
multiplexed system in DC mode.

h. Central Monitoring Facility

When not centrally monitored through a BMS system, a separate central monitoring
computer shall be provided for the emergency lighting system. The central
monitoring shall be via a central group monitoring hardware & software, monitoring
& programming unit. The unit shall be in the form of an IBM compatible PC with
monitor, INTEL Pentium (latest generation processor), keyboard, mouse and a
printer. The unit shall operate with the latest visualization software to give detailed
address & information of all luminaries connected to system. The program shall be
user friendly with visually clear fault indication screens on the monitor.

Features shall also be provided as follows:


1. Monitor & control all test cycles & functions.
2. Indicate every status of the system & the connected luminaries.
3. Display the status of each circuit.
4. Luminaire status & failure information will be displayed with text location.
5. Log the events on the system in a separate window to facilitate easy access.

i. Sub-Circuit Monitoring Interface

Exit lights shall remain in the Maintained mode of operation. Dedicated luminaries
used for emergency operation shall remain in Non-Maintained mode of operation.
Sub-circuit monitoring shall be carried out for Non-Maintained lights using a 24 V
monitoring loop within the panel wired to phase monitoring relays in the relevant
lighting DBs (all up to the approval of the Consultant). Where mains lighting in
switched-maintained mode are used for Emergency operation, the switching shall
be coordinated using fully encapsulated switching interface modules such that the
same switch is used for switching mains and emergency lighting. A detailed
schematic shall be presented for approval of the Consultant.

21.2.22 TELECOMS AND DATA SYSTEM

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-80/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

A. Contractor and Manufacturer Qualifications

The minimum Contractor and Manufacturer Qualifications shall be as follows:

All equipment and work detailed within this section shall be furnished and installed
by a certified Data & telecommunications contractor, hereafter referred to as the
Contractor. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install the conduit, electrical
boxes, and pull-wires.

The Contractor shall have the following qualifications in Data and


Telecommunication Systems installation:

1. Contractor shall have a minimum of five years experience in application,


installation and testing of the specified systems and equipment.
2. All supervisors and installers assigned to the installation of this system or
any of its components shall have factory certification from each equipment
manufacturer that they are qualified to install and test the provided products.
General electrical trade staff (electricians) shall not be used for the
installation of the premises distribution cables and associated hardware.

3. All operatives assigned to the installation of this system or any of these


components shall have a minimum of five years experience in the installation
of the specified copper and fiber optic cable and components.

4. The equipment and hardware provided under this contract will be from
manufacturers having a minimum of five years experience in producing the
types of systems and equipment specified.

a. Standards and Regulations

Requirements of the service provider (QTEL)

ISO/IEC 11801:2002 - Information technology - Generic cabling for customer


premises
ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standard, with addendums.
ANSI/TIA/EIA 569-A - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunication
Pathways and Spaces
ANSI/TIA/EIA 598-A - Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding
ANSI/TIA/EIA 606 - Administration Standard for the Telecommunications
Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings
ANSI/TIA/EIA 607 - Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements
for Telecommunications
ANSI/TIA/EIA-TSB-67 - Transmission Performance Specifications for Field Testing
of Twisted Pair Cabling System
EIA/TIA-526-7 Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Single Mode Fibre
Cable Plant
EIA/TIA-526-14 - Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fibre
Cable Plant
TIA/EIA-854 Full Duplex Ethernet Specification for 1000Mbps Operating Over
Category 6 Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-81/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers Sixteenth Edition


IEEE 802.1 - LAN/MAN Bridging and Management.
IEEE 802.3 - CSMA/CD Access Methods.

SUBMITTALS

Product Data

For each type of equipment manufacturers data is required for approval including
original catalogues, literature, illustrations, wiring diagrams, installation instructions,
sufficiently detailed for engineering purposes and with full description of
components and operating parameters for:

UTP and fiber optic cables


Outlets, RJ45 modules, faceplates and connectors
Fiber optic panels and RJ45 Patch Panels
Enclosures and cabinets.
Telephone sets (IP & Analog).
All Active components

Workshop Drawings

On architectural backgrounds the supplier shall submit dimensional layout plans,


sections, elevations, single lines, wiring diagrams, detailed equipment routing and
details that show the exact location and installation details of all equipment and its
accessories, wiring, etc. The drawings shall include signal levels throughout the
system as they were on the acceptance date of the system. The drawings shall
show:

Plan drawings indicating locations and identification of information outlets,


Floor Distributors (IDFs), and backbone (cable) riser runs.
Telecom rooms (TR and/or MDF) termination detail sheets.
Cross-connect schedules including MDF main-cross-connects, Distribution
point cross-connects and floor distributor cross-connects.
Backbone (riser) diagrams
System block diagram, indicating interconnection between system
components and subsystems.
Interface requirements including connector types and pin-outs, to external
systems and systems or components not supplied by the contractor.
Fabrication drawings for custom-built equipment

As-Built Drawings

On architectural backgrounds dimensional layout plans, sections, elevations, single


lines, wiring diagrams, detailed cable routing and details that show the as-built
location and installation details of all equipment and its accessories, wiring, etc.

Calculations

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-82/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

The supplier has to submit:

Calculation for all systems and equipment wiring, output levels, attenuation
levels, etc.
Optical loss calculations for each optical fiber run.

Operation and Maintenance Manuals

The supplier shall submit:

Original manufacturer operation and maintenance manuals including original


manufacturer catalogues, list of all contact names, numbers, addresses, etc.
Labeling and administration documentation.
Warranty documents for equipment.
Copper certification test result printout and soft copy.
Optical fiber power meter/light source test result printouts and soft copy.
Optical fiber OTDR cable signatures and test result printouts and soft copy.

Field Test and Commissioning Reports

The supplier must submit field test and commissioning reports that show proper
testing and commissioning signed from manufacturers and system installers.

Spare Parts

The supplier shall provide a detailed list of manufacturer-recommended spare parts


for a period of 2 years.

Samples

Samples produced by the installers or their suppliers shall be inspected for


compliance with the documentations.

Catalogue in Lieu of Sample

Samples shall be submitted to all equipment, accessories, and systems for


inspection prior to installation. However, subject to approval of the Superintendent,
where an item of equipment is a standard item, copies of the manufacturers
catalogue or brochure may be accepted in lieu of a sample provided that all
dimensions and relevant information are shown in the catalogue or brochure.

Identification Labeling

Samples shall be labeled to identify their intended use and relation to these
documents, e.g. server name, data cable. The identified samples shall be
submitted within sufficient time to permit modifications to me made without delaying

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-83/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

the work if such are deemed necessary by the Superintendent and to provide the
Superintendent with not less than seven (7) working days to make his comments.

Technical Data

Samples shall be accompanied by the entire manufacturers relevant technical data.

Return of Samples

Samples given permission to use shall be held in site after inspection and used as a
standard for acceptance or rejection of subsequent production units and then
maybe returned to the Sub-Contractor

EQUIPMENT WARRANTY

A. The system manufacturers shall provide a minimum twenty (20) year warranty on
all Passive and active components included in the structural cabling system.
These warranties shall be provided in written certificate form.

B. The system manufacturers shall provide in writing to the Owner that in event of
the demise or failure of the installing certified system installer/vendor, the
manufacturer shall be responsible for providing another certified system
installer/vendor to fulfill the remainder of the warranty conditions.

B. The Contractor shall provide a guaranteed twenty-four (24) hour response time
to any warranty claims.

STRUCTURAL CABLING AND OUTLET

CATEGORY 6 CABLES

All horizontal structural cabling cables must comply with LSZH Category 6
10G performance, 4 pairs 24 AWG UTP cables as specified in ANSI/TIA/EIA
568-B2 addendum 6 or ISO/IEC 11801 standard. Numbering and coloring
should be in accordance with EIA/TIA 568B, ISO 11801 / EN50173 using
T568B option

Cables shall be run from the user outlet to the cabling rack (as indicated on
drawings) without any transition points.

All UTP cabling must be tested using a level III field tester by the supplier
and full documentation must be provided to demonstrate that the cabling
meet the industry standards (i-e IEEE 802.3, EIA / TIA 568 B.2-1).

Category 6 defines four-wire twisted pair UTP copper cable that can
transmit data and proven support for 100 Mbps fast Ethernet, 500 MHz
Broadband Video, 10Gigabit Ethernet

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-84/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

The Cat 6 cable shall be of lowcapacitance and exhibits low crosstalk.


However, all figures of the cable must be Category 6 compliant.

The cables short term bending radius is 6 times the cable diameter in
operation and 10 times the cable diameter in installation.

MULTI-MODE FIBER OPTIC CABLES

OM3 - 50/125 m multi-mode fiber optic cables LSZH shall be installed from
each IDF up to the main data rock.

The cable shall be suitable for indoor and outdoor use in ducts and risers,
rodent resistance type with LSZH flame retardant outer sheath.

Fiber Optic Cables shall be suitable for 10/100/1000 Base and to be tested
@ 1350 and 1500 nm, Full OFL tested shall be performed before and after
installation.

The cable shall be with tight buffer structure, glass yarn reinforcement and
water- blocking elements

Low friction jacket for ease of pulling through ducts.

RJ-45, CAT 6 OUTLET

The outlet shall be category 6, eight - position angled RJ-45, T568B or


T568A Color Code pinned and modules mounted within the service floor
outlet box or on wall flush mounting. The cabling contractor should
coordinate with the electrical contractor to ensure compliance and matching
between the RJ-45 data connectors with the floor boxes or single gang box
and face plates.

The presentation of the outlets shall be provided for labeling and


identification. The outlet shall be complete with a transparent window to
protect the labeling tag.

All conductors of the 4-pair cat 6 horizontal cable shall be terminated on the
respective contacts. To avoid installation errors, the wire organizer of the
snap-in connector should be identified by the same standard color coding as
the cat 6 cable wires.

Each connector shall provide both T-568A and T-568B color code
identification for the pins at the rear of the connector. The punched down
should be in accordance with the T-568B color code.

Each outlet to receive one 4 pair cable. Submit sample of the socket for
review and approval.

Outlets shall be supplied Complete with Faceplate from the same Wiring
Devices Manufacturer.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-85/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

CATEGORY 6 (10G) RJ45 PATCH PANELS

The Copper Data Patch Panels:

Shall be 24 or 48 ports CAT 6 compliant. Patching Connections at the MDF,


IDF can be made Via RJ45 to RJ 45 patch cords.
Shall have RJ 45 jack terminations in the front and Insulation Displacement
Connectors (IDC) at the rear of the module. All panels shall conform to the
Category 6 (10G) requirements of EIA/TIA 568B, IS11801 and EN50173.
Shall be mounted in a standard 19 rack with wall brackets where applicable.
The 24-port panels shall be 1.75 inches (4.45 cm) high (3.5 inches).
The 48-port panels shall be 3.5 inches (8.9 cm) high (5.25 inches).
The modular patch panels will have insertion life of 750 cycles minimum.
In the rack cabinet, the patch panels shall be separated by metallic patch-
guides to protect the patch cords. The height of these guides shall be 1HU
or 2HU depending on the rack space.

RJ45 Patch panel shall meet the following specifications:

Insertion Life 750 cycles


Plug/Jack Contact force 100 g min
Plug Retention Force 133 N
Operating temperature Range 00C to 600C
Humidity 5 to 95% (non condensing)
Height 4.41 cm (1U)
Width 48.26 cm (19 inch)
Depth 4.06 cm

CATEGORY 6 (10G) RJ45 PATCH CORDS

Cat 6 RJ45 to RJ45 patch cords between the Data switches and RJ45 Patch
panels.

Drop cords at the desktop should also be CAT 6 RJ45 to RJ45 Patch Cords.

Data patch cords used at the telecommunication rack and at the information
outlet shall be 24 AWG, 4-pair assemblies. Patch cords shall be factory-
assembles by the manufacturer of the cabling system using the stranded
conductors. Each patch cable must be individually packaged in a plastic bag
with a label showing the part number and the cable length. The patch
cables must have an Anti-Snag connector and shall be backward compatible
with category 6(10G). Outlets shall require one 3-meters patch cord and one
1-meter patch cable to connect the patch panel to the active equipment.

The patch cable shall meet the requirements warranted to meet ISO/IEC
11801, EN 50173 and EIA/TIA 568A/B category 6(10G) wiring standards
capable of connecting 10 Gigabits high speed information terminal devices
to inform outlets panel applications. The patch cord shall be designed to

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-86/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

provide support for extended multimedia transmission distance over


frequency ranges up to and potentially beyond 100/250 MHz.

The patch cord shall support the computer networking applications over
frequency ranges up to and potentially beyond 500 MHz and shall be
compatible with voice and information applications.

The construction of the cord shall be of stranded type cordage tightly


twisted, 24 AWG, 8 conductor. The cord shall be terminated to an 8-positon
RJ-45 modular plug on one end and a 8-position RJ-45 modular plug on the
other end for Data. The cords shall support the transmission requirements
warranted to meet ISO/IEC 11801 Class E, EN 50173 or TIA.EIA 568CB
Category 6(10G), Class E component specifications and standards.

The Contractor supplied cord shall be of factory crimped plug at both ends.

Category 6 RJ-45 patch cables must be provided for the all project,
considering the structural cabling will be initially used at 50% of its capacity
and two patch cords must be provided for each end to end connection.
Whenever possible on the patch panel side color coded cables will be used
to segregate the nature of the service:

IP Phone (Blue)

Analog Phone, Fax or credit card machine (Black)

TV (Green)

WiFi Access Point (Grey)

Internet (Yellow)
Back Office or Business (Red)

FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANELS

A.Fiber optic patch panels shall be rack mounted with 12 duplex LC ports
and shall take no more than one unit of vertical space on the rack cabinet,
the patch panel shall be complete with splicing tray.

The patch panel shall be equipped with a mechanism that ensures the
retention and support of the incoming fiber optic cables.

The patch panel shall be designed with a sliding mechanism enabling front
installation and maintenance work to be carried out without having to remove
the entire panel. The patch panel shall be delivered complete with top cover.

The patch panel shall provide facilities to recess the front connector plate
deeper than the front of the 19 rails of the cabinet. This will provide
sufficient bend radius for the patch cords once connected to the panel. This
shall also prevent damage to the patch cords when the cabinet door is
closed.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-87/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

Cable management unit shall be provided with the fiber optic patch panel.

Fiber Optic Patch Panels Shall be supplied complete with all LC connectors
needed for terminating the Multi Mode Fiber Cables.

FIBER OPTIC PATCH CORDS

Optical patch cords will be provided with Duplex LC/LC connectors by


default, the provided quantity will be in line with the number of optical active
equipments ports activated within the deployed infrastructure plus 10% for
spare. Connector will have to be adapted to suite connectors provided on
active equipments.
All patch cords will be provided with different appropriate lengths to ensure
efficient usage of cable management.

EQUIPMENT / PATCHING RACKS

IDF

The contractor shall provide the following equipment racks within the equipment
ELV rooms. The racks and their configuration shall be as follows:

All racks must be having standard 19 front and rear adjustable rack rails
and must be, 800mn wide, 800mn deep and NOS OF U high as per
electrical drawings. Rack doors must be having key lock. For open racks it
must be 19 capable, 600mn wide, and 29 U high
All racks panels must be bounded to a common rack earth point. The rack
Earth point must be connected to the room earth bar by a cable of section
not less than 16mm2
All racks must be having a 6 way fan tray with 6 number low noise fans.
All racks must be provided with sufficient screws, washers and cage nuts for
all passive and active components.
AT least 200mn must be available between each open rack for vertical cable
managers.
Racks must be equipped with two single phase 16 PDUs. Each rack PDU
will be connected to one of the rack power feed. PDUs must not be having
any fuse or power switches. PDU must be equipped with 2 x IEC EN 60320
C19 sockets and 16 x IEC 320 EN 60320 C13 sockets at minimum. IEC EN
60320 C19 and C13 male/female power extension cords of length 1.5
meters must be provided. (50% of the total number of sockets)
The cabinet/ rack shall be equipped with removable and lockable side
panels for easy access to the installed equipments.
The cabinet/ rack shall have 180 degree of double swing front and back door
with lock and reversible type door i.e. easy re-hanging to open on right or
left.
Each IDF room must be clear of any pipes handlings either pressurize,
unpressurized liquids, vast or gas. Generally speaking no extra services than

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-88/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

the ones requires for the room itself must be going through the room. IDF
rooms must be dedicated to that purpose.
A clean class 1 earth is to be provided in each IDF room. Earth impedance is
to be less than 1 (Ohm). Earth to be presented on an earth bar
mounted on wall, feeding cable section should not be less than ( (35mn2)).
All racks must be bounded to the earth bar with cable of section not less
than ( (16mn2)).
Each Rack Shall have at least 30% free Space for installing of Active
Equipments.

5. 2 MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME

A. The main distribution frame (MDF) shall be of free standing type enclosure and
shall consist of three parts.

The first part (MDF) is to connect all incoming trunk lines of the Building
Plus 10% spare.
All circuits of this part shall be protected against over voltage and over
current.
The second part (MDF) is to connect all of the Riser Multi-Pair Cables to
all IDF's with at least 10% Spare Capacity.

B. Terminals shall be identified by numbered tags corresponding to the respective


lines or extensions. The contractor shall submit the proposed numbering
scheme for prior approval by the Engineer.

C. Two sets of the special tools required for MDF wiring (e.g. IDC insertion tool) as
well as test cords shall be provided with the main distribution frame.

D. There must be provision for at least five racks. Racks should be provided with
metallic perforated, front and rear door.
E. All racks must be having a 6 way fan tray with 6 number low noise fans.

F. All racks must be provided with sufficient screws, washers and cage nuts for all
passive and active components.

IP PABX

PABX must be provided with a 400 days service guaranty. Any hardware,
software faults or change request will be attended on site by the contractor
within 4 hours on 24/7/400 basis.

PABX must be provided with three days of training for two persons. Training
will be specific to the deployed infrastructure and day to day operations.

PABX must include all hardware and software components to ensure end to
end secured solution taking in account the following business rules:

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-89/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

The PABX will be IP based and be able to support both Analogue and IP
phones. Only IP phones will be deployed at the exception where ever IP
phones are not available with suitable characteristics (like water proof) PABX
must be able to support wireless phones using Wifi IP infrastructure.

The PABX must be redundant for all its functions including voice mail.

The PABX must be able to support SIP and SIP-T protocols.

IP phones must be deployed using an open standard protocol like MGCP /


H323 / SIP. If not it must be understood / guaranteed that all licenses /
software can be converted to standard ones at no cost.

PABX / PABX gateway must be a Telecom Service Provider approved


model.

The PABX must be an IP based IP PABX. The core components of the


PABX must be IP.

The PABX must be redundant for all its components and more especially the
core, the voice mail and the gateways.

The PABX gateway(s) must be able to support the various and localized
versions of public Telecom service provider based connectivity like ISDN PRI
(ETSI) / QSIG / E1 and POTS CO trunk lines. (NT interface at minimum).

The PABX gateway(s) must be certified / approved as per local Telecom


regulation for the required public network connectivity.

PABX must have least call routing features.

The PABX must be able to support IP phones / Meeting room phones


(spiders) / gateways / ICD from different vendors with different features.

The PABX must be able to support analog extensions either directly or


through specific gateways. The telephony features given on an analogue
extension must be similar to the ones given on an IP phone

IP phones must be registering in a secure way to avoid any kind of spoofing


/ hacking.

The PABX must be able to cope with fax services using T38.

The PABX must be SIP compliant and must also support H323, H450, H248,
MGCP, TAPI, JTAPI.

PABX must be supporting auto attending console.

PABX must be able to offer call center functionalities by license addition.


The IVR must be voice XML compliant.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-90/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

PABX must offer follow me features where an incoming call could


simultaneously be ringing on IP phone, WiFi phone as well as GSM phone.
First one to pick up will be having the call.

PABX must be able to offer soft phones on PC and PDA. (Personal data
assistant)

The PABX must be able to support different codec either in A or low


G.711, G.729A, G729B, G726.

PABX must be able to support 3 times the number of deployed extensions


without any major changes other than software licenses.

The PABX must be able to support Wireless Wi-Fi phones and offer
enhanced security functionalities specific to this kind of handset.

When IP phones are used it should be possible to intensively customize the


look and feel using XML based contents / configurations.

The PABX must be able to interface with external software to offer enhanced
Multimedia services.

PABX must be delivered with an easy to use secured web based


management interface.

PABX must be able to deliver usage CDR and to store / buffer them inside
the PABX.

The PABX and the voice mail system should offer an external API interface
compatible with market standard hospitality call accounting and Property
Management Systems. This interface should allow the following controls:

Changing telephony features


Barring / unbarring Local / National / International / Mobile calls
Activating / clearing the voice mail system
Wake up call

The management software should be able to manage a scheduled upgrade


of part or all IP phones / gateways / ICD without end-users interaction.

NETWORK

Network must be provided with a 400 days service guaranty. Any hardware,
software faults or change request will be attended on site by the contractor
within 4 hours on 24/7/400 basis.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-91/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

Network must be provided with three days of training for two persons.
Training will be specific to the deployed infrastructure and day to day
operations.

Network must include all hardware and software components to ensure end
to end secured solution taking in account the following business rules:

Service platforms should never be presented directly to edge devices


(IP Phone, STB) / users directly. It must always go through an
application aware security function performing full packet inspection
and preventing attacks.
Network infrastructure should follow the need to know security
paradigm allowing only required communications in the infrastructure,
and discarding any other traffic.

NETWORK CONCEPT

Network must be hierarchic and composed of at least access and core


levels. Depending on the size of the project an aggregation or multiples core
could also be required especially if there are multiples buildings.

Network must be IP convergent and must offer the appropriate performance


and quality of service required to support today and tomorrow services. All
network points should be offering 10/100/1000 Mbps connectivity. Backbone
must be preferably at 10Gbps, if not aggregated 1Gbps link can also be
used.

Access level and core level will be interconnected by a minimum of two


redundant links at a speed not less than 10Gbps

The core must be based on highly available chassis and consist of two
equipments. Core equipments must be redundant in logic and power supply.
Core must be using a passive backplane and pluggable modules.

Each IT equipment / service platform required to be connected to the core


must be using at least two diverted connections one to each of the core
node.

Network equipments must offer 30% free ports for future usage and 50%
upgrade capabilities in capacity without changing the equipment itself for
chassis.

All edge network ports must be PoE capable of delivering 15.4W per port
without limitations in the number of simultaneously used ports. PoE switches
must be able to deliver the accurate power on demand and only when it is
required.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-92/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

All provided network equipments should be 19 rack mounted.

All provided network equipments must be offering an out of band (RS232)


and an in band (SSH / SNMP / Web) management interfaces.

All network equipments must be capable to handle two simultaneous


software images with a remaining 50% free flash or equivalent memory
space.

Network equipments must be offering the following features:


L2 and L3 based Vlans
Vlan trunking according to 802.1q
Vlan trunking/encapsulation QinQ
L2 Vlan priority according to 802.1p
Trunk based classification, marking based on L2 QoS 802.1p / IP ToS /
IP DSCP / Vlan number
Port based classification, marking based on L2 QoS 802.1p / IP ToS / IP
DSCP
Input and output policing based on layer 3 and 4 headers
Minimum four queues per port
Strict priority queuing
Unicast and multicast routing
10/100/1000 Mbps interfaces
Half and full duplex
Auto MDI-X
Mac address limitation per port (static or learning)
Extended access lists per port or per VLAN
Private Vlans with community, promiscuous and isolated support
LLDP support in addition of proprietary protocols like CDP
DHCP server service
DHCP snooping
DHCP option 82
IP source guard / ARP poisoning prevention
Broadcast storm control
802.1d spanning tree protocol, PVST, 802.1w
Spanning tree BPDU guard
Spanning tree fast reroute
Hardware based IP V4 and IP V6 routing
Virtual IP interface redundancy by HSRP or VRRP
Bridging STB
Unicast routing protocol RIP, OSPF and BGP for the core
MPLS or multiples virtual routers for the core
Multicast routing protocol as PIM-Dense Mode and PIM-Sparse Mode
Fast join, fast leave, IGMP-V2 and IGMP-V3 snooping protocols
802.3ad for link aggregation including LACP
802.3af for PoE with minimum capacity of 15.4W on all ports
simultaneously
802.1x user authentication associated with radius allowing VLAN(s)
assignments and port security through dynamic access list
400 Gbps Switching capacity for the core and 100 Gbps for the edge.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-93/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

100 Millions PPS in routing (64 Bytes Packets) for the core and 50
Millions PPS for the edge.

Network equipments must be offering the following network management


features:
Local RS-232 console port
SSHv2 for remote access
SNMP V2c at minimum for remote management
Radius for centralized authentication / authorization and accounting
Syslog
SFlow or Netflow traffic accounting capabilities at the core level
RMON
Port mirroring

When doing the Fiber / copper patching in IDF / MDF all patch cables must
be uniquely labeled at each end, allowing easy identification of patch cords
usage and interconnection points.

A Network management solution should be offered as part of the network


support. This solution should be able to monitor network components; third
parties element managers as well as systems using either agent or windows
build in WMI capabilities.

Network Management should be offering:


Configuration management / archiving,
Inventory / asset management,
Faults,
Radius authentication,
Radius authorization,
Performance collection / indicators,
Been able to report fault or performance related alarms using both E-mail
or SMS,
Receive, categorize and raise alarm for syslog and snmp based events
Discovery of network devices and calculate Layer 2 relationships to
provide views of the network by different views including
LAN edge view and a general Layer 2 view.
Topology maps to indicate the discovery and Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP) status of network devices.
Tools for creating, deleting and editing VLANs.
User tracking functions to correlate MAC address and IP address to
switch ports.
Path analysis tools to perform path analysis for Layer 2 and Layer 3
devices using the device host name or IP address.
Change monitoring log recording users and applications which are active
on the network.

Network Security

A Layered approach to Network Security shall be adopted as follows:


s
Perimeter

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-94/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

Individual network zones shall be firewalled and protected via software antivirus and
intrusion detection applications. End point security shall be provided so as to
validate and authorize wired and wireless connectivity.

Core

Network access control shall be provided incorporating Host ID and MAC based
filtering to ensure that unauthorized communication is disconnected.

VLANS

VLANS (Virtual LAN) are utilized within the switch software configuration in order to
segregate services and increase security between users.

The primary security consideration is to completely segregate the public network


from the Administration network.

The secondary security consideration is to protect the admin servers via a firewall
from the end users.

Additionally, separate V-LANs will be configured for individual networks as follows:-

Administration LAN
WiFi
IPTV / HiTV

Wireless Network

Wireless Network must be provided with a one 400days service guaranty.


Any hardware, software faults or change request will be attended on site by
the contractor within 4 hours on 24/7/400 basis.

Wireless Network must be provided with three days of training for two
persons. Training will be specific to the deployed infrastructure and day to
day operations.

Wireless Network must include all hardware and software components to


ensure end to end secured solution taking in account the following business
rules:
The wireless infrastructure must be based on centralized controller(s).
The controller(s) must be redundant.
Wireless infrastructure must be able to support 802.11a/b/g at minimum.
Depending on availability 802.11n support must also be assessed.
The wireless infrastructure must be able to support multiples SSID with
all models of authentication and encryption. At minimum free
access/WEP/WPA/WPA2 and PSK/TKIP/AES.
The communication between APs and controller(s) must be encrypted in
a tunnel or equivalent secured mechanism.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-95/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

Based on the controller model, it should be able to deploy APs in


configuration less mode, plug and play.
Wireless infrastructure must be able to offer indoor as well as outdoor
coverage.
Wireless access points must be of small form factor, preserving
esthetics, and compliant with PoE/802.3af at the exception of outdoor AP
that could require extra power.
The wireless infrastructure must be self defending at the wireless/air
level as well as at the IP level and include some firewall as well as IPS
features.
The wireless infrastructure should be offering localization services
related to active WiFi end points as well as passive or active RFID end
points.
Wireless infrastructure must be compliant with local Telecom regulation
in term of power transmission and used frequencies.

The wireless access points should be of small form factor, allowing easy
integration and preserving esthetics.

Solution must be able to support the following authentication methods:


No authentication / free access
MAC based
802.1x
WPA PSK (Pre Shared Key)
WPA TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol)
WPA-2 CCMP/AES (WPA-2 Enterprise)
WPA-2 PSK (WPA-2 Personal)

The solution must be able to support local user database or remote


databases using RADIUS, Microsoft Active Directory or standard LDAP.
Solution must be able to support the following encryption /Key management
methods:
No encryption / free access
WEP (Static or through 802.1x)
TKIP
AES

In addition to protocol based authentication the solution must be able also to


support a secured customizable internal web server (SSL enabled) allowing
authentication even in free access mode. Authentication possibilities in that
mode should follow general requested capabilities.

Solution must be able to support per SSID security policies, including


access list and more preferably firewall like possibilities.

Solution must be offering build in NAT/PAT features as well as DHCP


service.

Access points must be available for indoor as well as outdoor coverage.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-96/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

The wireless infrastructure should offer a global building coverage, ROOMs,


common areas, outdoor, back office.

Centralized redundant controller(s) to control distributed Access Points.

Solution must be able to offer one VLAN per SSID as well as combined
VLAN.

Support the following different SSID:

Support Wifi phones

Support localization services for WiFi clients as well as passive or active


RFID.

Wireless network should be provided with a full as built documentation


including:
Bill of quantities including deployed room / equipment / part number and
serial number
Schematic diagrams
Patching schedule including cable references, port number, socket
number
Configuration files

INTERNET GATEWAY

Internet gateway must be provided with a one 400days service guaranty.


Any hardware, software faults or change request will be attended on site by
the contractor within 4 hours on 24/7/400 basis.

Internet gateway must be provided with three days of training for two
persons. Training will be specific to the deployed infrastructure and day to
day operations.

The Internet gateway function must be fully redundant using active/active


model and comprise of one or more hardware or software components from
a functional perspective.

The Internet gateway must be including security functions like firewall with
deep packet inspection as well as intrusion prevention system

The internet gateway must be able to connect directly to the Internet


connection(s) given by the local Internet service providers. There should be
more than one connection, and should be possible to benefit from all
connections.

The Internet gateway must be able to offer multiples VLANs to segregate


users.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-97/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

The Internet gateway must include a DHCP function allowing user based
allocation of private or public IP address simultaneously.

The Internet gateway must offer local authentication through its own
customized web portal. Either an internal or external user database can be
used. The external user database should be reaching either using LDAP or
RADIUS protocols. It should also be able to support authorization and
accounting. It should already been tested and pre-integrated with Fidelio
Opera PMS.

The Internet gateway must be able to apply different IP address schema


(private / public) and to limit or guaranty Internet bandwidth according to
informations given by the PMS at authentication time or statically
configured.

The Internet gateway must be able to prioritize traffic based on define class
of service. By example ensuring smooth browsing / e-mailing while peer to
peer traffic will be shaped.

The Internet gateway must be able to offer remote VPN services either
IPSEC, SSL or site to site using AES 128 minimum encryption.

The internet gateway must be able to support at least a 100Mbps throughput


in each direction and at least 20Mbps of encrypted traffic simultaneously.

GSM INTERNAL COVERAGE

An internal GSM coverage solution must be deployed allowing full coverage of the
building. Both voice and data services must be offered (2G/GPRS/3G/3G+/HSDPA).

The single antenna network should be design in such a way that multiple telecom
service providers can use the same antenna.
Approval must be obtained from the different providers.

Preferably one preferred Telecom service provider will deploy the antenna as well
as the initial active components; other will be sharing the same infrastructure either
at the antenna level or using local rooming at the BTS (Base transceiver station)
level

SERVERS

All required servers must be centrally located in the IT room. Preferably that all
servers should be of blade technology to ensure space and technology efficiency.

Each Individual blade server must be having as a minimum the following


characteristics:
2 CPU Dual-core Intel Xeon processor
4 GB Memory
2 * SAS Disk 72Go 15K rpm

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-98/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

4 * 10/100/1000 Mezzanine Ethernet interfaces


2 * 4Gbps Emulex Mezzanine SAN interfaces

At least one blade chassis should be installed to support the different blade
servers. The capacity and number of blade chassis will be adjust based on
the number of required server blades.

The blade chassis must be provided with enough redundant power supplies
in an N+1 configuration.

The blade chassis must be provided with a redundant SAN switches. Build
in setup will be preferred.

There should be two SAN switches enabled ports per blade server. Provision
for four external fiber interfaces must be done. (Connection to external
storage / external tape).

Blade chassis must be supplied with sufficient physical Ethernet Network


connectivity allowing at least three Ethernet connections per blade. Built-in
Ethernet switching module will not be used. All Ethernet interfaces, including
chassis management ones, will be connected to the Core switches. Each
Blade must be connected to each core switch plus one extra interface for
backup purpose.

External redundant disk storage with redundant power supplies (N+1),


redundant controllers, external SAN connectivity. Disk storage must be
equipped with required capacity depending on the number of blades and
associated locally deployed applications. Minimum offered usable capacity
should not be less than 4To taking in account that disk should be configured
at minimum in Raid 5 groups.

Blade chassis must be from HP vendor C3000 or C7000 series or equivalent


from the same vendor.

Blades should be from HP vendor BL460c or equivalent from the same


vendor.

Blade SAN switches must be Brocade 4Gb SAN for C-Class HP chassis. San
Switches must be redundant in number

The Q-Tel approved Contractor shall submit shop drawings indicating the Vertical &
horizontal cable sizes, MDF size in accordance with Q-Tel regulations.

Telephone outlets shall be of a RJ45 type used by the Q-Tel and to the approval of
the Consultant.

Outlet boxes shall be provided where shown on drawings. Pull boxes shall be
provided according to Q-Tel regulations and wherever needed to facilitate the
pulling-in of CABLES. All internal telephone conduits shall be 25 mm diameter.
unless otherwise specified.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-99/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

PVC conduit, trunking, boxes and accessories shall comply with the relevant
clauses of these specifications.

Manhole covers for telephone manholes shall be heavy-duty type of a manufacture


and shape approved by Q-Tel.

21.2.23 SECURITY SYSTEM

a. Scope of Work

Generally the works shall include the supply, installation, testing, commissioning,
hand-over, training and maintenance of the following:

i. Access Control System.

ii. CCTV System.

The scope for the Contractors shall include the provision of all labour, equipment,
power supplies, cables and ancillaries as detailed upon the drawings and necessary
to render complete functioning systems. This shall include comprehensive testing
and commissioning activities

The various components and major constituents of the system shall be sourced
from manufacturers, who have proper and local representation of the products in
Qatar and can technically support the total system through qualified and trained
personnel.

The system shall be IP based system and shall be wired independently of other
wiring systems. The contract drawings only show the scheme and location of the
processors, monitors, and so on. The actual routes of conduits wires, trunking etc.
to the various equipments shall be clearly shown by the contractor on the working
drawings.

SECURITY ACCESS AND CCTV SYSTEM

Security System Overview


CCTV Cameras shall be installed at various vantage points as indicated at contract
drawings. These locations are based on general safety and security surveillance.
The cameras shall be the following types

General Specification of Security Surveillance System

System must contain a program capable of simultaneous recording,


playback, storage, copying and remote access without any adverse effect on
any of the functions.
Management software should provide camera number, location, data & time
of recording generated by system server, forced masking (password
protected) in recorded video and alarm management.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-100/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

Images recording and storage systems performance must be checked daily.


Cameras used in the system must be vandal proof, tamperproof,
weatherproof and Day/Night according to the environmental requirements.
Cameras must be suitable for operation under extreme temperature, relative
humidity and non-condensing.
System must have sufficient storage system for all camera recordings for a
period of 120 days. In MPEG-4 or H.264 format or better quality
compression techniques. The recording frame rate and resolution must be
programmable from the user level. It should give the ability to customize also
quality of the video output based on the viewing needs and storing capacity.
Cameras used in the system for outdoor and indoor specific areas must
have auto-iris, auto-ICR, auto-exposure, backlight compensation, wide
dynamic range, contrast enhancement, digital noise reduction, digital image
stabilization, privacy masking, motion detection, digital/optical zoom, multiple
gain audio I/O, VPS / interlaced scanning features.
The camera representation of the object for monitoring should be as follows:

1. For identification purposes- the figure should cover at least 120% of


the screen height.
2. For recognition purposes- the figure should cove at least 50% of the
screen height.
3. For detection purposes- the figure should cover at least 10% of the
screen height.
4. For monitoring purposes the figure should cover at least 5% of the
screen height.

For number plate recognition, the recommended screen image


representation must be at least 50% of the screen height.
A single CCTV operator should monitor no more than nine (9) camera
displays at any one time in a standard 32 wall screen. At any given
circumstances, the number of cameras per display screen will depend
primarily as the size of the screen. A separate viewing displays or area may
also be required for reviewing recorded video.
Remote wide area network (WAN) connectivity must be secured with the
latest encryption/decryption techniques to preserve the authenticity without
compromising the good quality video transmission over the network.
The system must also support NTP (network time protocol) to synchronize
the system time of the video to reference time for time stamping.
Camera numbering and location details in display and recording must be
according to site and location to easily distinguish captured scenes.
System must have full function control unit (joystick control unit and touch
screen feature.
The system should ensure that the image and video being produced is
tamperproof and cannot be altered. The recording shall have an audit trail
feature.
System administration must contain different levels of user privileges and
roles in accordance with the users responsibilities.
The system must contain search feature of the camera, location, and time
and date.
The system must have the ability of long term storing on external storge
devices as well as copying on different external media.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-101/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

The system should also allow for backup of specific data on any drives like
CD/DVD/Blu ray recorders or any other device in a format which can be
replayed through a standard PC based software. Log of any such activity
should be mentioned by the system which can be audited at a later date.
The recoded video should be exported in its native file format. (without
converting between format) to maintain image quality and no additional
compression should be applied during the export process.
The system must have a hot standby system with automatic changeover in
case of any fatal failure in the active system.
The system must have a corrective and preventive maintenance contract or
periodical service level agreement (SLA) for its operational life which include
but not limited to the following;

i. Cleaning the equipment


ii. Repairing or replacing faulty equipment
iii. Fitness for purpose checks
iv. Maintaining camera positions and focus
v. Upgrading the system software
vi. Equipment warranties
vii. Maintenance logs and audit report.

a. Indoor Color Network Fixed Dome

1. The camera shall feature an advanced 1/4" Progressive Scan CCD Imager,
380,000 [659(H) x 494(V)] pixels effective, with a microlens on each pixel. The
camera shall be equipped with digital signal processing (DSP) to produce a high
quality picture with a minimum illumination of 0.19 lux with Sensitivity UP Mode
ON (8X) and 1.5 lux in color mode with Sensitivity UP Mode OFF.
2. The camera shall have the capability of password protecting all menu settings.
3. The camera shall be equipped with an auto back light compensation and shall
feature mask setting and level adjust capability.
4. The camera shall feature Automatic Tracing White Balance Adjustment for two
specific applications: Nighttime through Daylight with color temperatures
between 2200K ~ 6000K and manual white balance shall be settable in the
range of 2000K ~ 10,000K.
5. The camera shall also be equipped with an electronic sensitivity up feature to
enhance camera performance in extreme low light conditions.
6. The camera shall feature an alphanumeric title of 20 characters.
7. The Camera's zoom lens shall have a " format and a focal length of 2.8 to
10mm.
8. The zoom lens shall provide digital zoom (3X) for a total maximum magnification
of 10.8X. The aperture throughout this range shall vary from a minimum of f/1.3
at the wide angle setting.
9. The camera shall feature a built-in digital motion detector with four areas and
level adjustment capability.
10. The dome assembly shall come pre-wired from the factory.
11. The power source shall be IEEE802.3af compliant (4.2W) or 12VDC @ 350mA
or 24VAC @ 4.2W
12. The camera shall use a Dual Streaming Codec with MJPEG and MPEG-4 Part 2
Video Compression.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-102/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

13. The camera shall generate a VBS 1V p-p/75Ohm PAL composite signal through
a 3.5mm mini jack.
14. The camera shall be capable of generating and transmitting images to meet the
following specifications.
a. JPEG: VGA (640 x 480) QVGA (320 x 240) max 30 fps
b. MPEG-4: VGA (640 x 480) QVGA (320 x 240) max 30 fps
c. Simultaneous JPEG (5 fps) and MPEG-4 (15 fps)
15. The camera shall be able to support uni-cast and multi-cast transmissions.
16. The camera shall have a built in web server so that access to the IP video
stream can be obtained using Internet Explorer Version 6.0 or better. The web
browser shall permit the user to make adjustments and settings to the camera.
The web browser shall include the ability to electronically zoom the picture at 1x,
1.5x, 2x, 2.5x and 3x.
17. Up to 3 other Network Cameras shall be viewable simultaneously by the user,
when connected to the Camera without any additional software required.
18. The camera shall have built in Audio input and output jacks and be capable of
transmitting and receiving the audio stream through the same Ethernet
connection as the video. The audio shall be encoded using the G.726 or
equivalent ADPCM standard.
19. The camera shall provide an SD Card slot which can support a minimum of a
1Gbytes SD card that can cache images in the event of a network failure. The
camera shall provide bandwidth controls with at least the following throughput
levels. The camera shall also support manual recording to the optional SD
Memory Card
20. The Bandwidth Limit shall be adjustable to
64/128/256/512/1024/2048/4096kbps or unlimited.
21. The camera shall be capable of being configured to automatically transmit alarm
images transfer via FTP file transfer and/or e-mail. In addition the camera shall
support the scheduled transfer of image data via FTP to an FTP server.
22. Supported protocols: TCP/IP, UDP/IP, HTTP, FTP, SMTP, DHCP, DNS, DDNS,
NTP and SNMP.

b. Indoor PTZ Color Network Camera

A semi-flush-mounted digital signal processing (DSP) Super Dynamic III color


CCD camera. The camera shall incorporate a 1/4" Progressive Scan CCD
Imager with Super Dynamic III, 380,000 [768(H) x 494(V)] pixels effective, with a
microlens on each pixel. The camera shall display S/N ratio of 52dB with Super
Dynamic III ON, shutter speed OFF.
The unitized camera/dome assembly shall be a self-contained unit that
incorporates an integral color camera, pan-and-tilt motor, zoom lens and
receiver/driver.
The camera shall feature an advanced 1/4" interline transfer CCD with 768(H) x
494(V) pixels with a micro-lens on each pixel. The camera shall be equipped
with digital signal processing (DSP) to produce a high quality picture with a
minimum illumination of 0.02 lux in color mode with Sensitivity UP Mode ON
(32X) at lens F number 1.4 and 0.5 lux in color mode with Sensitivity UP Mode
OFF, lens F number 1.4, a minimum illumination of 0.0013 lux in black and white
mode with Sensitivity Up Mode ON (32X), 0.04 lux in black & white mode with
Sensitivity Mode OFF at lens F number 1.4

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-103/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

The camera shall use a pixel based dual speed CCD charged with long and
short charges, creating both standard shutter speeds and fast shutter speeds
simultaneously, on a single image field.
The camera shall automatically apply each exposure pattern to bright and
normal areas on a pixel by pixel basis. The camera shall feature a digital signal
processor for image processing of both long and short signals, for a wide
dynamic range of up to 128 times over standard CCTV cameras.
The camera shall feature an image hold capability for retaining images during
preset acquisition phase.
The camera shall have the capability of password protecting all menu settings.
The camera shall be equipped with an auto back light compensation and shall
feature mask setting and level adjust capability.
The unitized camera shall feature Automatic Tracing White Balance Adjustment
for two specific applications: Nighttime through Daylight with color temperatures
between 2700K ~ 6000K and Sodium Vapor and other Nighttime illumination
through Daylight with color temperatures between 2000K ~ 6000K. In
addition, manual white balance shall be settable in the range of 2000K ~
10,000K.
The camera shall be equipped with a built-in digital motion detector with mask
setting and level adjustment.
The camera shall also be equipped with an electronic sensitivity up feature to
enhance camera performance in extreme low light conditions.
The camera shall be equipped with image stabilization capable of electronically
stabilizing the image should the camera mounting become subject to
mechanical vibration.
The unitized surveillance device shall feature an electronic shutter adjustable
from 1/60 to 1/100 second.
The camera shall feature an alphanumeric title of 16 characters.
The camera unit shall include 8 privacy zones that mask areas dynamically with
gray or mosaic; the zones shall change size automatically with camera lens focal
length and camera pan/tilt position. The privacy zone shall feature a supervisor
override function.
The Camera's zoom lens shall have a " format and a focal length of 3.8 to
114mm (30X). The zoom lens shall have an auto iris and auto focus feature that
shall allow manual override if the need arises.
The camera shall provide continuous digital zoom (10X) for a total maximum
magnification of 300X. The minimum aperture throughout this range shall vary
from a minimum of f/1.4 at the wide angle setting to f/3.7 at the telephoto lens
position.
The pan-and-tilt motor shall be a high-speed unit allowing 360 endless panning
with a tilt range of -5 to +185.
The camera shall feature a direct drive motor assembly. Belt driven unitized
camera units shall not be acceptable.
The pan-and-tilt shall allow for preset sort and sequence rotation speed of
approximately 400 per second.
The camera shall use variable manual pan speed control to allow for super fine
pan control of 0.065 to 120/s. Pan speed shall be proportional to zoom setting
The unitized surveillance device shall feature a minimum of 256 preset
positions.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-104/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

The camera shall feature a built-in digital motion detector with four areas per
scene and level adjustment capability.
The unitized camera shall be capable of automatically tracking and following a
single moving indoor target that 10 feet from the camera and occupies
approximately 10% of the field-of view, in indoor light conditions greater than 2
lux. The Auto tracking function shall not require an external video processor to
control the unitized camera. The Automatic Tracking mode shall be able to be
interrupted by manual operator control and automatically resume to its previous
tracking mode.
The camera shall be able to automatically sequence through the preset
positions in logical programming order (sequence mode) or actual position (sort
mode).
The pan-and-tilt section shall feature automatic panning mode. The Automatic
Preset Sequence or Sort mode shall be able to be interrupted by manual
operator control and automatically resume to its previous mode.
Motor driving feedback circuit shall assure pre-programmed preset position
accuracy
The camera unit shall include an autopan feature in which the camera may
rotate 360 endless panning or preprogrammed rotation angle, pausing at the
endpoints for a preprogrammed duration. The Autopan mode shall be able to
be interrupted by manual operator control and automatically resume to its
previous mode.
The dome assembly shall come pre-wired from the factory.
The camera shall use a Dual Streaming Codec with MJPEG and MPEG-4 Part 2
Video Compression.
The camera shall generate a VBS 1V p-p/75Ohm PAL composite signal through
BNC connector for local adjustment
The camera shall be capable of generating and transmitting images to meet the
following specifications.
a. JPEG: VGA (640 x 480) QVGA (320 x 240) max 30 fps
b. MPEG-4: VGA (640 x 480) QVGA (320 x 240) max 30 fps
c. Simultaneous JPEG (5 fps) and MPEG-4 (15 fps)
Picture quality mode is dynamically changed by camera itself upon picture
characteristic to feed 30 fps at MPEG-4 mode.
CCD captured digital signal data is converted from serial to parallel through slip-
ring by keeping digitally transferred and the data is taken over to video encode
process
The camera shall be able to support uni-cast and multi-cast transmissions.
The camera shall have a built-in web server so that access to the IP video
stream can be obtained using Internet Explorer Version 6.0 or better. The web
browser shall permit the user to make adjustments and settings to the camera.
Up to 15 other Network Cameras shall be viewable simultaneously by the user,
when connected to the Model WV-NS950 Camera without any additional
software required.
The camera shall have full duplex two-way audio feature and be capable of
transmitting and receiving the audio stream through the same Ethernet
connection as the video. The audio shall be encoded using the G.726 or
equivalent ADPCM standard.
The camera shall provide an SD Card slot which can support a minimum of a
1Gbytes SD card that can cache images in the event of a network failure. The
camera shall provide bandwidth controls with at least the following throughput

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-105/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

levels. The camera shall also support manual recording to the optional SD
Memory Card
The Bandwidth Limit shall be adjustable to
64/128/256/512/1024/2048/4096kbps or frame priority mode
(4096kbps/unlimited).
The camera shall be capable of being configured to automatically transmit alarm
images transfer via FTP file transfer and/or e-mail. In addition the camera shall
support the scheduled transfer of image data via FTP to an FTP server.
Supported protocols: TCP/IP, UDP/IP, HTTP, FTP, SMTP, DHCP, DNS, DDNS,
NTP and SNMP.
The power source shall be 220-240VAC, 50Hz at 16W

c. PTZ Vandal-Proof Network Camera

26x day/night camera


In low-light conditions, Legends camera automatically switches from color to
monochrome mode.
A 26x optical and 12x digital give you total zoom up to 312x.
Prone to vibration such as light poles and parking garages.
Closed-loop position system
Closed-loop system program presets accuracy of 0.015
Spherical privacy masking
Built-in coax and UTP video connections
32 macros; 16 steps per macro; linkable
16 shadow tours; 20 minutes total duration
127 presets with title and individual camera settings
Auto return:1 to 60 minutes; any preset, tour, macro, auto pan
Continuous zoom adjusted pan/tilt
Electronic image flip
120 programmable areas per dome, each with title
24 total privacy masks; 8 displayed simultaneous; with spherical privacy masking
8 built-in alarm inputs
2 relay outputs Environmental Operating temperature, without heater/blower:32
to 122F (0 to 50C)
Operating temperature, with heater/blower:-40 to 122F (-40 to 50C)
Resolution:470 TVLNTSC; 460 TVLPAL
Synchronization: Internal/line lock
Lens:F=3.5 mm (wide)to 91 mm(tele); F1.6 toF3.8
Angle of view (H): 42.0(wide)to 1.6 (tele)
Sensitivity:2.0 lux at 1/60 sec NTSC or 1/50 sec PAL; 0.14 lux at 1/4 secNTSC
or 1/3 sec PAL
Sensitivity, ICR-on:0.7 lux at 1/60 sec NTSC or 1/50 sec PAL; 0.05 lux at1/4 sec
NTSC or 1/3 sec PAL
Electronic shutter speed:1/1 to 1/10,000 sec, 14 steps, NTSC; 1/1 to1/10,000
sec, 14 steps, PAL
Video output:1.0 Vp-p

D. Outdoor PTZ Color Network Camera

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-106/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

The camera shall incorporate a 1/4" Progressive Scan CCD Imager with Super
Dynamic III, 380,000 [768(H) x 494(V)] pixels effective, with a microlens on each
pixel. The camera shall display S/N ratio of 52dB with Super Dynamic III ON,
shutter speed OFF.
The integrated housing shall have a polycarbonate lens, cast aluminum body
and use tamper resistant hardware. The housing shall have a built in sunshield.
The housing shall be weatherproof to IP66.The unitized camera/dome assembly
shall be a self-contained unit that incorporates an integral color camera, pan-
and-tilt motor, zoom lens and receiver/driver.
The camera shall feature an advanced 1/4" interline transfer CCD with 768(H) x
494(V) pixels with a micro-lens on each pixel. The camera shall be equipped
with digital signal processing (DSP) to produce a high quality picture with a
minimum illumination of 0.02 lux in color mode with Sensitivity UP Mode ON
(32X) at lens F number 1.4 and 0.5 lux in color mode with Sensitivity UP Mode
OFF, lens F number 1.4, a minimum illumination of 0.0013 lux in black and white
mode with Sensitivity Up Mode ON (32X), 0.04 lux in black & white mode with
Sensitivity Mode OFF at lens F number 1.4
The camera shall use a pixel based dual speed CCD charged with long and
short charges, creating both standard shutter speeds and fast shutter speeds
simultaneously, on a single image field.
The camera shall automatically apply each exposure pattern to bright and
normal areas on a pixel by pixel basis. The camera shall feature a digital signal
processor for image processing of both long and short signals, for a wide
dynamic range of up to 128 times over standard CCTV cameras.
The camera shall feature an image hold capability for retaining images during
preset acquisition phase.
The camera shall have the capability of password protecting all menu settings.
The camera shall be equipped with an auto back light compensation and shall
feature mask setting and level adjust capability.
The unitized camera shall feature Automatic Tracing White Balance Adjustment
for two specific applications: Nighttime through Daylight with color temperatures
between 2700K ~ 6000K and Sodium Vapor and other Nighttime illumination
through Daylight with color temperatures between 2000K ~ 6000K. In
addition, manual white balance shall be settable in the range of 2000K ~
10,000K.
The camera shall be equipped with a built-in digital motion detector with mask
setting and level adjustment.
The camera shall also be equipped with an electronic sensitivity up feature to
enhance camera performance in extreme low light conditions.
The camera shall be equipped with image stabilization capable of electronically
stabilizing the image should the camera mounting become subject to
mechanical vibration.
The unitized surveillance device shall feature an electronic shutter adjustable
from 1/60 to 1/10,000 second.
The camera shall feature an alphanumeric title of 16 characters.
The camera unit shall include 8 privacy zones that mask areas dynamically with
gray or mosaic; the zones shall change size automatically with camera lens focal
length and camera pan/tilt position. The privacy zone shall feature a supervisor
override function.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-107/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

The Camera's zoom lens shall have a " format and a focal length of 3.8 to
114mm (30X). The zoom lens shall have an auto iris and auto focus feature that
shall allow manual override if the need arises.
The zoom lens shall provide continuous digital zoom (10X) for a total maximum
magnification of 300X. The minimum aperture throughout this range shall vary
from a minimum of f/1.4 at the wide angle setting to f/3.7 at the telephoto lens
position.
The pan-and-tilt motor shall be a high-speed unit allowing 360 endless panning
with a tilt range of -5 to +185.
The camera shall feature a direct drive motor assembly. Belt driven unitized
camera units shall not be acceptable.
The pan-and-tilt shall allow for preset sort and sequence rotation speed of
approximately 400 per second.
The camera shall use variable manual pan speed control to allow for super fine
pan control of 0.065 to 120/s. Pan speed shall be proportional to zoom
setting.
The unitized surveillance device shall feature a minimum of 256 preset
positions.
The camera shall feature a built-in digital motion detector with four areas per
scene and level adjustment capability.
The unitized camera shall be capable of automatically tracking and following a
single moving indoor target that 10 feet from the camera and occupies
approximately 10% of the field-of view, in indoor light conditions greater than 2
lux. The Auto tracking function shall not require an external video processor to
control the unitized camera. The Automatic Tracking mode shall be able to be
interrupted by manual operator control and automatically resume to its previous
tracking mode.
The camera shall be able to automatically sequence through the preset
positions in logical programming order (sequence mode) or actual position (sort
mode).
The pan-and-tilt section shall feature automatic panning mode. The Automatic
Preset Sequence or Sort mode shall be able to be interrupted by manual
operator control and automatically resume to its previous mode.
Motor driving feedback circuit shall assure pre-programmed preset position
accuracy
The camera unit shall include an autopan feature in which the camera may
rotate 360 endless panning or preprogrammed rotation angle, pausing at the
endpoints for a preprogrammed duration. The Autopan mode shall be able to
be interrupted by manual operator control and automatically resume to its
previous mode.
The dome assembly shall come pre-wired from the factory.
The camera shall use a Dual Streaming Codec with MJPEG and MPEG-4 Part 2
Video Compression.
The camera shall generate a VBS 1V p-p/75Ohm PAL composite signal through
BNC connector for local adjustment.
The camera shall be capable of generating and transmitting images to meet the
following specifications.
a. JPEG: VGA (640 x 480) QVGA (320 x 240) max 30 fps
b. MPEG-4: VGA (640 x 480) QVGA (320 x 240) max 30 fps
c. Simultaneous JPEG (5 fps) and MPEG-4 (15 fps)

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-108/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

Picture quality mode is dynamically changed by camera itself upon picture


characteristic to feed 30 fps at MPEG-4 mode.
CCD captured digital signal data is converted from serial to parallel through slip-
ring by keeping digitally transferred and the data is taken over to video encode
process
The camera shall be able to support uni-cast and multi-cast transmissions.
The camera shall have a built-in web server so that access to the IP video
stream can be obtained using Internet Explorer Version 6.0 or better. The web
browser shall permit the user to make adjustments and settings to the camera.
Up to 15 other Network Cameras shall be viewable simultaneously by the user,
when connected to the Model WV-NW960 Camera without any additional
software required.
The camera shall have full duplex two-way audio feature and be capable of
transmitting and receiving the audio stream through the same Ethernet
connection as the video. The audio shall be encoded using the G.726 or
equivalent ADPCM standard.
The camera shall provide an SD Card slot which can support a minimum of a
1Gbytes SD card that can cache images in the event of a network failure. The
camera shall provide bandwidth controls with at least the following throughput
levels. The camera shall also support manual recording to the optional SD
Memory Card
The Bandwidth Limit shall be adjustable to
64/128/256/512/1024/2048/4096kbps or frame priority mode
(4096kbps/unlimited).
The camera shall be capable of being configured to automatically transmit alarm
images transfer via FTP file transfer and/or e-mail. In addition the camera shall
support the scheduled transfer of image data via FTP to an FTP server.
Supported protocols: TCP/IP, UDP/IP, HTTP, FTP, SMTP, DHCP, DNS, DDNS,
NTP and SNMP.
The power source shall be 220V to 240V AC, 50 Hz at 90W (WV-NW960,
Heater ON), or 24V AC, 50 Hz at 85W

E. Network Video Recording

The recorder shall be capable of connecting up to 64 network cameras without


extra license fees and their images can be recorded simultaneously.
The cameras shall be equipped with a 1000GB hot plug HDD and 8 additional
hot plug HDD slots. It shall allow up to 9TB of HDD storage to be installed in the
main unit. The recorder shall have the capability of expansion up to 54TB by
adding five optional Hard Disk Extension Units, each with 9 HDD slots.
The recorder shall have Intelligent VMD search function that allow motions in a
specified area in the recorded images of the compatible i-Pro cameras* to be
quickly searched.
The recorder shall be appliance based with an embedded real-time operating
system and shall not be based on a Microsoft Windows OS. The OS must reside
completely within the hardware and not be installed on the hard disk drives.
Installed disk drives must be dedicated to recording video.
The recorder shall have MPEG-4 and JPEG multi format capabilities.
The recorder shall provide Various Recording Mode: Manual, Schedule, Event
(Pre/Post), Emergency, and External Timer. It shall have the capabilities to

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-109/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

control: Pan/Tilt, Zoom, Focus, Brightness and Preset Positions. It shall be able
to search using: Time & Date, Event Type and Camera number.
The recorder shall have eight recording programs including individual recording
mode for each camera, and 6 time schedules per day.
The recorder shall have up to 36 audio capabilities and can be recorded and
played back at G.726 (ADPCM) 32 kbps.
The recorder shall have various alarm sources to include 32x Terminal inputs,
64x Camera alarm. The alarm actions shall include Alarm recording, E-mail
notification, Alarm message, Camera positioning, FTP image transfer, Terminal
output, alarm protocol output, Buzzer and LED
The recorder shall have 2x built-in network interfaces (10Base-T / 100Base-TX /
1000Base-T) for camera recording and client access.
Quick IP Setup for i-Pro network cameras through Easy Setup Utility Tool
The recorder shall have the capabilities to transfer recorded images to FTP
server upon alarm and/or live image periodically. Images recorded in the SD
memory card in the i-Pro network cameras can be transferred to the recorder
automatically even when the recorder is in recording status
The recorder shall have User/Host authentication, 4 programmable user levels,
16 user priorities and User-Camera View/Control partitioning setup for
sophisticated user management. It shall be capable of up to 32 user
registrations.
The recorder shall have Alteration detection and recorded data encryption for
data security.
The recorder shall have RAID5/6 redundant recording for data security. The
RAID6 feature allows the recorder to recover from a two-disk failure without any
loss of data (minimum four HDDs are required). With hot plug support, drives
can be replaced without any downtime, allowing 24/7 operations. It shall have
Disk partitioning to include Normal, Event, Pre-Event and Copy for flexible
record management
The recorder shall be viewable from any properly connected PC using Microsoft
Internet Explorer version 6.0 or later
The recorder shall provide for user authentication and support different user
privileges based on logon ID. From the client the user should (with proper
authentication) be able to do the following:
Setup camera
Define live viewing, recording rates and quality settings.
Define recording programs and schedules.
View live video in either single or quad views.
Search and playback recorded video.
Download selected recorded video.
Control connected PTZ cameras
The recorder shall provide for optional viewer software that is capable of viewing
multiple cameras from multiple recorders on a single screen and provide the
following features:
Software shall be able to display live video from any camera on any connected
recorder.
Software shall be able to display 1, 2x2, 3x3 or 4x4 multiplexed video.
Software shall show registered recorders on the network as icons in a drop
down menu. Cameras will be shown as icons on the same menu, indented
under the attached recorder.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-110/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

Software shall enable user to assign any video from any recorder into any
window on the multiplexed display
Software shall permit the registration of up to 32 user registration and
passwords and provide up to 5 different levels of user privileges.
Software shall permit the remote operation of properly configured Pan, Tilt,
Zoom cameras subject to the user privilege level.
Software shall provide search capabilities for attached recorders and allow
search by Event, Mark or Motion. It must apply these search criteria across
multiple recorders.
Software shall permit the playback of up to 16 simultaneous video files.
Software must be able to run on an IBM-PC/AT compatible computer with the
following minimum specifications:
Windows XP Home SP2/ XP Professional SP2/ Vista Ultimate
Microsoft DirectX 9.0c or later
Intel Core2Duo 2.66GHz Processor
1024 x768 16 Bit Graphics Card with Video Monitor
2Gbytes or more of RAM
64Mbytes or more of VRAM
10/100 Ethernet Network Card
Internet Explorer version 6.0 or later
Mouse, Keyboard

Monitor

LCD Display 21"/42 TFT


Resolution 1280 x 1024 SXGA
Colour 16.7 M
Contrast Ratio 500 : 1
Effective Display area 337.92 x 270.34 mm
Input Signal Video (loop-thru) , S-Video (Loop-thru) and VGA

VGA Signal Analogue VGA / 15 Pin-D-Sub connector


Audio 1x Phono (loop-thru) 1 Watt max

ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

A. General

The Contractor shall supply, install and test the IP access control system specified
herein and as shown on the drawings. The access control system shall be able to
control all secured area and main entrance to insure restrictive entry. The Access
Control system should manage CCTV & AS ( Alarm System) equipments.

B. System Description

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-111/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

The purpose of the access control system is to monitor the access points to the
main entrances of staff areas shown on the drawings for 24 hours a day, 7 days a
week.

The required equipment shall operate as described below:

System Terminology & Abbreviation

A. Hardware Components

MCP Main Control Panel


DGP Data Gathering Panel
RAS Remote Arming Station
4DC Intelligent Four Door Controller
4LC Intelligent Four Lift Controller
IBC Intelligent Bank Controller
TML Time Lock DGP
SDC Single Door Controller
Wiegand Interface Converts Wiegand protocol to RS485
LED Light Emitting Diode
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
EOL End of Line resistor

B. Communications

PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network


ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network
DTMF Dual Tone Multiple Frequency
CMS Central Monitoring Station
RS485 Common Interface standard
RS232 Common Interface standard
MI bus Multiple Interface bus for communication devices
LAN Local Area Network

C. Alarm Monitoring

Area A separate partition of the system


Input or Zone EOL Supervised alarm device or contact.
Output Dry Contact relay or 50mA open collector transistor
Armed The area(s) is/are set and an intruder will activate an alarm
Disarmed The area(s) is/are unset and can be accessed
Alarm Input has been activated or there is a system alarm
Open A condition where an input is in alarm state
Closed A condition where an input is in normal state
Inhibit(ed) A condition where an input is disabled
Uninhibit(ed) A condition where an input is back in normal mode after being
inhibited

D. Access Control

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-112/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

DOTL Door Open Too Long


FD Forced Door (Door opened without card read, PIN or RTE)
Dual Custody Two users required to perform a function or access a door
Card/PIN The reader requires both a PIN and a card for access
RTE Request To Exit a door or area
Void A card is disabled
Valid A card is enabled
Proximity Technology where a card is presented in proximity without contact
Wiegand Standard output protocol for access control devices

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1. The system shall be an IP intelligent security platform that unites intrusion and
access control with smart card operations and remote communications. All of its
functions shall work together from a single control panel. The system shall be
configured using modular components to provide complete flexibility in features
and capabilities. The system shall work with existing equipment and wiring, even
interfacing with existing Wiegand-based card reader systems.

2. The system shall provide for the following features:

Use a single card action to lock/unlock doors, arm/disarm alarms and control
other operations.
Select who goes where and when, with flexible access control.
Issue ID cards and assign user privileges individually or by groups of
employees.
Assign alarm inputs to specific areas or groups of areas.
Virtually eliminate false alarms with all-in-one security control. Users shall no
longer be required to remember to disarm a security system after unlocking a
door.
Manage your security operations on-site or from remote locations.

SECURITY HARDWARE MAIN CONTROL PANEL (MCP)

General Overview

Operating Voltage and Current

The Main Control Panel shall contain an on-board switched mode power supply with
battery charger and obtain power from a 230V 50Hz/23VAC 2.0A transformer.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-113/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

Physical Enclosure Parameters

The enclosure shall be steel fabricated and powder coated beige. Two enclosures
are available:

Large: The outside dimension in the closed position shall be (475w) x (460h) x
(160d).

Standard: The outside dimension in the closed position shall be (315w) x (445h) x
(88d).

Inputs

A. Alarm Inputs. The Main Control Panel shall monitor up to sixteen (16) EOL
supervised inputs with expansion capabilities for up to two hundred and fifty six
(256) Inputs via DGPs. The option of two or four state Input monitoring may be
selected. Three EOL resistance values (4.7k, 10k and 2.2k) shall be available.

Outputs

Main Control Panel itself shall feature the following outputs:

One (1) supervised external siren output


One (1) internal siren output
One (1) flash/strobe output
One (1) programmable relay (12 VDC 2A)
Four (4) programmable Open Collector outputs
One (1) switched 12 VDC outputs (to reset latching sensors)

Output Expansion

Relay boards and Open Collector boards provide up to two hundred and fifty five
(255) programmable outputs per MCP. The relays should have a minimum rating of
12 volts 50mA, and relays on the Intelligent 4 door/elevator controller shall use
relays rated at 12 volts 10 Amps. All relay should be Form C.

Remote Arming Stations

(RAS) The Main Control Panel shall support up to sixteen (16) RAS on the RS485
data bus. At least one LCD RAS shall be connected to each MCP for programming,
control and display of system status and events. In addition, various forms of card
readers and/or PIN keypads or combinations of both may fill each additional RAS
position.

Data Gathering Panels (DGP)

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-114/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

1. The Main Control Panel shall support up to fifteen (15) DGPs on the RS485 data
bus. DGPs provide the ability to expand the number of EOLR supervised inputs
2. Maximum number of inputs using DGPs shall be two hundred and fifty six (256)
per MCP.
3. Maximum number of inputs using DGPs shall be one hundred and twenty eight
(128) per MCP.
4. Maximum number of inputs using DGPs shall be sixty four (64) per MCP.
5. Maximum number of inputs using DGPs shall be thirty two (32) per MCP.
6. Intelligent Door Controller DGPs, shall also have the ability to be used as a four
(4) door access controller (4DC) and shall have the ability to control and monitor
up to forty eight (48) intelligent doors in addition to the sixteen (16) doors
supported by the MCP. Intelligent features shall include:

Users shall be stored locally on each door controller.


Door groups shall be stored locally on each door controller.
Time zones shall be stored locally on each door controller.
Door Soft/Hard and timed Anti-pass back shall be global on all door
controllers connected to a control panel.
The ability to use a card plus PIN
The number of users per region shall be controlled.
Incorporate door interlock, such as mantraps and sally ports.
Provide door shunting until the door is closed.
Provide a door open too long alarm.
Ability to require the two-card rule.

Intelligent Lift Controller DGPs, shall also have the ability to be used as a four (4) lift
access controller (4LC) and shall have the ability to control and monitor up to sixty
four (48) floors per Lift. Intelligent features shall include:
Users shall be stored locally on each lift controller
Floor groups shall be stored locally on each lift controller.
Time zones shall be stored locally on each lift controller.
Lift Soft/Hard and timed Anti-pass back shall be global on all lift controllers
connected to a control panel.
The ability to use a card plus PIN
The number of users per region shall be controlled.
Incorporate lift interlock, such as mantraps and sally ports.
Ability to require the two-card rule.
Users shall be allowed to only access allowed floors
Users shall be stored locally on each Bank controller
Door groups shall be stored locally on each bank controller
Time zones shall be stored locally on each bank controller.
Lift Soft/Hard and timed Anti-pass back shall be global on all bank
controllers connected to a control panel.
The ability to use a card plus PIN
Ability to require the two-card rule.

Outputs

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-115/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

DGPs, excluding Wireless DGPs shall have sixteen (16) outputs, available
through Relay cards or open collector cards.

Intelligent Addressable DGPs shall have up to thirty two (32) outputs available
through IADS Output devices.

Intelligent Controllers shall have four (4) relays for switching door locks.

All DGPs with built-in power supply shall have a siren output.

Data Bus Communications

All devices on the RS485 data bus shall be polled continuously to ensure correct
operation. Should any of the bus devices fail to respond to a series of polls from
the Main Control Panel, a trouble alarm shall be generated on the system
specifying the off-line device details. The alarm shall be notified on LCD display,
keypad trouble LED and be reported to a Central Station.\

The system shall operate in real time mode and distribute processing activity to
the intelligent controllers. It shall also be capable of communicating to all remote
devices using an integrated fiber optic module.

SYSTEM MONITORING

General Overview

The Main Control Panel shall be capable of reporting all the alarm, access and
system events to a Host PC running a Management Software.

Local Host PC

It shall be possible to have a permanent direct connection between the Main Control
Panel and the Host PC using an optional Computer and Printer interface installed
onto the MCP. Connection over IP shall be provided by an optional IP interface A
10-digit password is required to allow initial connection. The number of connection
attempts is programmable from 0 (no PC connection allowed) to 255.

Temporary Remote PC

It shall also be possible to have a temporary remote connection between the Main
Control Panel and a PC via leased line, PSTN, ISDN or GSM using the built-in or an
optional plug-on digital dialler.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-116/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

1. The Main Control Panel shall be capable of allowing installers or service


providers to dial into the system from a PC running the Management Software.
There shall be two ways of dealing with a remote connection request;

An authorized user shall clear the incoming call via a LCD RAS.
The Main Control Panel shall call back the originator of the call on a pre-
programmed phone number. In both cases, a 10-digit password is required
to allow any connection and the number of connection attempts is
programmable from 0 (no PC connection allowed ) to 255.)

An authorized user shall be capable to initiate a connection to a remote PC


running the Management software either by calling a pre-programmed phone
number or by entering a new phone number through a LCD RAS.

2. Regardless of the type of connection, it shall be possible to programme the


system in such a way that any change to the system database is impossible if
any area is armed.

Permanent Remote PC

It shall be possible to have a permanent remote connection between the Main


Control Panel and a PC via the optional Computer and Printer port and an optional
IP interface.

The Main Control Panel shall be capable of allowing local operators and/or remote
operators to connect to the system from a PC running the Management Software. A
10-digit password is required to allow any connection and the number of connection
attempts is programmable from 0 (no PC connection allowed) to 255.

1. Multiple Control Panels

The Host PC and its Management Software shall be capable of monitoring up to


sixty four (64) Control Panels simultaneously. It shall be possible to have any
combination of direct and remote connections between the Host PC and the sixty
four (64) Control Panels.

If dial-up is required, the PC shall support the required number of modems.

ALARM REPORTING

General overview

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-117/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

The Main Control Panel shall be capable of reporting alarm and specified events to
commercial Central Monitoring Stations. These would be events such as:

Input(s) in alarm or in fault condition


Input(s) inhibited (report immediately or when system armed)
Areas armed or disarmed
Areas armed or disarmed out of normal hours
RAS, DGP, 4DC or SDC off line, de-polled, inhibited or in fault condition
Controllers with AC fail, low battery, fuse fail, tamper, siren fail or CPU
restart
RAS with duress code entered
Dead-man alarm
System test started, over, incomplete or completed
Service technician on-site or off-site
Remote Log-in and log-out attempts
Program mode entered and exited
Time or Date Changed o SIA and XSIA Event Codes
Contact ID Event Codes o FSK 200 baud Event Codes
VdS Event Codes A total of four Central Station shall be available, each
having a primary and backup number.

Main Control Panel Event Storage

The Main Control Panel shall be capable of holding 255 reporting events within the
buffer.

1. PSTN Connection

A PSTN connection to a CMS shall be done using the built-in digital dialer. The Main
Control Panel shall monitor the status of the PSTN line and display Report Fail on
all LCD RAS units if the line is faulty, open circuit, continually busy or there is no
answer when attempting to communicate to the Central Monitoring Station. It shall
also be capable of reporting to a backup number in case the first number fails.

PSTN shall also be available as backup to any other type of connection to a Central
Station.

2. ISDN-B or ISDN-B/D Connection. An ISDN-B or ISDN-D channel connection


to a CMS shall be done using an optional plug-on digital dialer. The Main
Control Panel shall monitor the status of the ISDN line and display Report Fail
on all LCD RAS units if the line is faulty, open circuit, continually busy or there is
no answer when attempting to communicate to the Central Monitoring Station.
It shall also be capable of reporting to a backup number in case the first number
fails.

3. ISDN-B or ISDN-D shall also be available as backup to any other type of


connection to a Central Station.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-118/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

GSM Connection

A GSM connection to a CMS shall be done using an optional plug-on digital dialer.
The Main Control Panel shall monitor the status of the GSM line and display
Report Fail on all LCD RAS units if the line is faulty, open circuit, continually busy
or there is no answer when attempting to communicate to the Central Monitoring
Station. It shall also be capable of reporting to a backup number in case the first
number fails.

GSM shall also be available as backup to any other type of connection to a Central
Station.

IP Connection

An IP connection to a CMS shall be done using an optional add-on IP Interface (in


addition to an RS232 Computer Interface) . The Main Control Panel shall monitor
the status of the IP Connection and display Report Fail on all LCD RAS units if the
connection is not capable of communicating to the Central Monitoring Station. It
shall also be capable of reporting to a backup number in case the first number fails.

IP shall also be available as backup to any other type of connection to a Central


Station.

Reporting Formats and Logic

a. Each Main Control Panel shall be capable of reporting events and alarms using a
variety of formats such as SIA (large or small), XSIA (large or small), Contact ID
(large or small), FSK 200 baud, VdS 2465 (large or small), X.25 ENAI or Voice
Reporting (with or without acknowledge)

b. The Main Control Panel shall support up to four CMS, with each CMS having two
phone numbers. This gives eight possible connections through which an event
can be reported. It shall be possible to programme different formats including
Voice Reporting, to report via each CMS. Each CMS can be used to report via
any medium (PSTN, ISDN, GSM or IP), including for backup purposes. The Main
Control Panel shall support Multiple as well as Dual Central Stations Reporting.

Multiple Central Stations Reporting is where an event will be market as reported


once it has been successfully sent to any of the CMS programmed

7. Dual Central Stations Reporting is where an event must successfully report to all
the CMS, programmed as Dual Reporting, before it is marked as reported and
removed from the queue.

8. Voice Reporting

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-119/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

Each Main Control Panel shall be capable of playing back pre-recorded voices
messages through optional module(s) connected on the MI expansion bus. It shall
be possible to connect two (2) Voice Reporting modules per MCP and there shall be
a minimum of eight (8) Messages per module; the leader message, the address
message and six alarm messages. If a second module is installed, all eight
messages for the second module will be alarm messages. The total recording time
per module shall be thirty five (35) seconds.

Voice messages shall be programmed to report on the occurrence of specific


reporting codes. Several reporting codes may have the same voice message
programmed. Reporting codes 1-11 are general alarms (BA, FA, TA), while
reporting codes 12-21 are zone specific, that is, you can link a reporting code to
specific zones. This means that any zone activation or event happening in the MCP
shall be able to trigger a voice message.

REMOTE DIAGNOSTICS FACILITY

General Overview

The Main Control Panel shall be capable of running a diagnostic session upon
request of a PC Management Software. The PC Management Software shall upload
the results of the checks. The parameters checked by the diagnostic facility shall be
in line with the EN50131 and include the measurement of analogue values like the
input resistance and the voltage supplied to each DGP and RAS on the RS485 data
bus. It shall be possible to launch a diagnostic session either locally or from a
remote location through a PSTN, ISDN or leased line connection.

Checked Parameters

The parameters to check should be the following as a minimum;

Check the firmware version on the Main Control Panel.


Control that the Time and Date difference between the Main Control Panel and
the PC running the Management Software is less than 1 minute.
Check that the system log is still accepting new entries.
Check that all the programmed RAS are on-line.
Check that all the programmed DGP are on-line.
Identify any input on soak test.
Identify any inhibited input.
Check that all the input connections are within the accepted tolerances (Ohms).
Check anti-mask of motion detectors.
Check that the frequently used detectors have been activated during the last six
(6) hours before arming.
Check the voltage and current level for all RAS and DGP (including the MCP).

The diagnostic facility shall also be able upon specific request - to activate the
sirens and flash for a period of 3 seconds and send a SIA RX test message to the
Central Monitoring Station.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-120/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

Standard memory

As standard, the Main Control Panel shall be capable of managing the following
numbers of system parameters;

50 Individual Users.
74 Alarm Groups
10 Door Group
10 Floor Groups
250 Alarm event buffer
10 Access event buffer
24 Time Zones, each with 4 periods.
64 Holidays.
365 Day real time clock with Daylight Savings facilities

Intelligent Controller Note

The memory capabilities in used in the Main Control Panel and the Intelligent
Controllers shall be equal. If the Main Control Panel is fitted with IUMs (read below),
the Intelligent Controllers need to be upgraded to have the same memory
configuration.

Software IUM

When not using IUM modules, a software solution shall be available to enable
reading any proprietary card format to a maximum of 48 bits including any parity bits
or checksums included in the card data.

Expanded 1MB memory

An optional 1 Meg Memory Expansion unit shall be fitted to the Main Control Panel
to increase the following system numbers;

11,466 Individual Users, up to 1000 with PIN codes (without Soft IUM mode
enabled)
2000 Individual Users with both Card & PIN code (with Soft IUM mode
enabled)

4MB IUM memory

An optional 4 Meg Intelligent User Module (IUM) shall be fitted to the Main Control
Panel and Intelligent Controllers to provide the above listed features in addition to
the following functions:

17,873 Individual Users.


Each User may be assigned both a Card & programmable PIN code

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-121/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

8MB IUM memory

An optional 8 Meg Intelligent User Module (IUM) shall be fitted to the Main Control
Panel and Intelligent Controllers to provide the above listed features in addition to
the following functions:

65,535 Individual Users.

DATA BUS COMMUNICATIONS

General Data Bus Parameters

The Main Control Panel shall communicate with all remote devices by using a data
bus. This network shall use RS485 data bus multi-drop protocol at a data rate of
4800bps. All devices on the data bus may be polled in a star or loop configuration.
A 470 Ohms resistance shall terminate the longest cable run to balance the
impedance.

1. The maximum distance between the Main Control Panel and any device,
whether a RAS, DGP or Intelligent controller shall be no more than 1.5Km on
approved cable.

2. The data bus shall be cabled in Belden 8723 or equivalent (shielded, twisted, 2
pair). The shield shall be connected to the common earthing point, but strictly at
one end of the cable. When the data bus stretches across different buildings, all
the DGPs with power supply should be connected to the safety earth with a
separated earth cable of no less than 2.5mm2 connected to ground at a
common point.

3. The Main Control Panel shall have the capability of monitoring and reporting all
POLL errors from remote devices. This error count shall be resetable and shall
be able to display numerically all errors per device.

Fibre Optic Capability

The Main Control Panel, or any other devices, such as RAS units, DGPs or
intelligent controllers, shall have the capability of communicating on a Fibre Optic
bus using RS485/Fibre Optic converters.

The Fibre optic units shall be capable of true signal repeating and multi-dropping to
RS485 data bus protocol within the same unit. The distance between Fibre Optic
units shall not exceed 1.5Km. Up to thirty two (32) Fibre Optic repeaters may be
connected on one data bus in daisy chain configuration.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-122/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

Leased Line Modems

When data bus device distances in excess of 1.5Km are required, or a different
media is utilized, the Main Control Panel shall be capable of communicating with
remote devices via Leased Line modems. Interfaces may be used to convert the
RS485 data bus to an RS232 protocol and vice versa.

Area Operation/Control

For each area, it shall be possible to have at least the following:

1. Assign a name to describe each area for control purposes.


2. Provide each area with individual entry and exit timers.
3. Enable some areas to be armed together with other areas but to be disarmed
independently (area link).
4. Enable all areas to be armed by any user/s
5. Enable all areas to disarmed by any user/s
6. Enable all areas to be controlled using Access Control events such as Access
Granted, Region Counting and different Badging techniques.
7. Any or all areas arm automatically via a time zone or other specific system event
8. Any or all areas disarm automatically via a time zone or other specific event
9. Areas to monitor the status of other areas and then follow suit
0. Prevent areas from being armed if inputs assigned to that area are open
11. Prevent areas from being disarmed if inputs assigned to that area are open
12. Arm or disarm any or all areas by any system condition
13. Report to Central Monitoring Station, if any area is disarmed outside a time zone
14. Activate an event/output if any area is disarmed
15. Activate an event/output if any input in the assigned area is open
16. Activate an event/output if any input in the assigned area is inhibited
17. Activate an event/output if any input in the assigned area is in alarm
18. Activate an event/output if the area is in exit time
19. Activate an event/output if the area is in entry time
20. Activate an event/output if any area is to automatically armed (as warning)
21. Activate an event/output if any duress input is in pre-alarm mode

System Area Reporting Local

The status of every area shall be shown clearly on the RAS. The Main Control Panel
shall be capable of displaying the status of individual areas on card readers, LED
RAS units as well as third party equipment such as consoles and mimic panels etc,
by using the system outputs. System area status may also be controlled and
monitored by the Host PC.

REMOTE DIAGNOSTICS FACILITY

General Overview

The Main Control Panel shall be capable of running a diagnostic session upon
request of a PC Management Software. The PC Management Software shall

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-123/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

upload the results of the checks. The parameters checked by the diagnostic facility
shall be in line with the EN50131 and include the measurement of analogue values
like the input resistance and the voltage supplied to each DGP and RAS on the
RS485 data bus. It shall be possible to launch a diagnostic session either locally or
from a remote location through a PSTN, ISDN or leased line connection.

Checked Parameters

The parameters to check should be the following as a minimum;

Check the firmware version on the Main Control Panel.


Control that the Time and Date difference between the Main Control Panel
and the PC running the Management Software is less than 1 minute.
Check that the system log is still accepting new entries.
Check that all the programmed RAS are on-line.
Check that all the programmed DGP are on-line.
Identify any input on soak test.
Identify any inhibited input.
Check that all the input connections are within the accepted tolerances
(Ohms).
Check anti-mask of motion detectors.
Check that the frequently used detectors have been activated during the last
six (6) hours before arming.
Check the voltage and current level for all RAS and DGP (including the
MCP).

The diagnostic facility shall also be able upon specific request - to activate the
sirens and flash for a period of 3 seconds and send a SIA RX test message to the
Central Monitoring Station.

Standard Memory

As standard, the Main Control Panel shall be capable of managing the following
numbers of system parameters;
50 Individual Users.
74 Alarm Groups
10 Door Group
10 Floor Groups
250 Alarm event buffer
10 Access event buffer
24 Time Zones, each with 4 periods.
64 Holidays.
365 Day real time clock with Daylight Savings facilities

Intelligent Controller Note

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-124/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

The memory capabilities in used in the Main Control Panel and the Intelligent
Controllers shall be equal. If the Main Control Panel is fitted with IUMs (read below),
the Intelligent Controllers need to be upgraded to have the same memory
configuration.

Software IUM

When not using IUM modules, a software solution shall be available to enable
reading any proprietary card format to a maximum of 48 bits including any parity bits
or checksums included in the card data.

Expanded 1MB memory

An optional 1 Meg Memory Expansion unit shall be fitted to the Main Control Panel
to increase the following system numbers;

11,466 Individual Users, up to 1000 with PIN codes (without Soft IUM
mode enabled)
2000 Individual Users with both Card & PIN code (with Soft IUM mode
enabled)

DATA BUS COMMUNICATIONS

General Data Bus Parameters

The Main Control Panel shall communicate with all remote devices by using a data
bus. This network shall use RS485 data bus multi-drop protocol at a data rate of
4800bps. All devices on the data bus may be polled in a star or loop configuration.
A 470 Ohms resistance shall terminate the longest cable run to balance the
impedance.

1. The maximum distance between the Main Control Panel and any device,
whether a RAS, DGP or Intelligent controller shall be no more than 1.5Km on
approved cable.

2. The data bus shall be cabled in Belden 8723 or equivalent (shielded, twisted, 2
pair). The shield shall be connected to the common earthing point, but strictly at
one end of the cable. When the data bus stretches across different buildings, all
the DGPs with power supply should be connected to the safety earth with a
separated earth cable of no less than 2.5mm2 connected to ground at a
common point.
3. The Main Control Panel shall have the capability of monitoring and reporting all
POLL errors from remote devices. This error count shall be resetable and shall
be able to display numerically all errors per device.

Fibre Optic Capability

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-125/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

The Main Control Panel, or any other devices, such as RAS units, DGPs or
intelligent controllers, shall have the capability of communicating on a Fibre Optic
bus using RS485/Fibre Optic converters.

The Fibre optic units shall be capable of true signal repeating and multi-dropping to
RS485 data bus protocol within the same unit. The distance between Fibre Optic
units shall not exceed 1.5Km. Up to thirty two (32) Fibre Optic repeaters may be
connected on one data bus in daisy chain configuration.

Leased Line Modems

When data bus device distances in excess of 1.5Km are required, or a different
media is utilized, the Main Control Panel shall be capable of communicating with
remote devices via Leased Line modems. Interfaces may be used to convert the
RS485 data bus to an RS232 protocol and vice versa.

Area Operation/Control

For each area, it shall be possible to have at least the following:

1. Assign a name to describe each area for control purposes


2. Provide each area with individual entry and exit timers
3. Enable some areas to be armed together with other areas but to be
disarmed independently (area link).
4. Enable all areas to be armed by any user/s
5. Enable all areas to disarmed by any user/s
6. Enable all areas to be controlled using Access Control events such as
Access Granted, Region Counting and different Badging techniques.
7. Any or all areas arm automatically via a time zone or other specific system
event
8. Any or all areas disarm automatically via a time zone or other specific event
9. Areas to monitor the status of other areas and then follow suit
10. Prevent areas from being armed if inputs assigned to that area are open
11. Prevent areas from being disarmed if inputs assigned to that area are open
12. Arm or disarm any or all areas by any system condition
13. Report to Central Monitoring Station, if any area is disarmed outside a time
zone
14. Activate an event/output if any area is disarmed
15. Activate an event/output if any input in the assigned area is open
16. Activate an event/output if any input in the assigned area is inhibited
17. Activate an event/output if any input in the assigned area is in alarm
18. Activate an event/output if the area is in exit time
19. Activate an event/output if the area is in entry time
20. Activate an event/output if any area is to automatically armed (as warning)
21. Activate an event/output if any duress input is in pre-alarm mode

System Area Reporting Local

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-126/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

The status of every area shall be shown clearly on the RAS. The Main Control Panel
shall be capable of displaying the status of individual areas on card readers, LED
RAS units as well as third party equipment such as consoles and mimic panels etc,
by using the system outputs. System area status may also be controlled and
monitored by the Host PC.

Biometric Reader

Keypad finger biometric reader

The biometric key pad reader should integrate easily into access control systems.
The fingerprint must be enrolled and stored on contactless smart card or directly on
the reader and this can be done through the software included with the reader or
through an Administrator Mode accessible through the keypad and display. Once a
fingerprint is enrolled, authentication may be performed any number of times.
Authentication may be initiated either through the keypad (if a template is stored
directly on the reader) or by presenting a smart card to the reader. After
authentication, the smart card biometric shall send a Wiegand string to the Access
Control System or other host equipment for appropriate action.

Fingerprint Template Capacity

The unit shall support an unlimited number of users since the fingerprint template
file is stored on the smart card itself rather than on the readers local memory. A
maximum of two fingerprint templates may be stored per contactless smart card. If
templates are stored on the readers local memory, whereby the verification is
initiated by providing an ID number via keypad entry, the unit shall store up to 3550
fingerprint templates.

Supported Cards

The Unit shall support the following contactless smart cards: HID Corp. iCLASS
16kbits (2kBytes) 2-Application Area cards HID Corp. iCLASS 16kbits (2kBytes) 16-
Application Area cards Honeywell Access Systems 16kbits (2kBytes) OmniSmart
cards

Memory

The reader shall utilize non-volatile flash memory to store all templates and data
configurations and shall therefore not lose any templates or configuration
information if the reader is powered down.
The SiteKey shall be stored within the internal memory of the reader and shall be
encrypted and stored on the smart card itself. For security purposes, the SiteKey
shall not be stored within the Admin software or PC, and may NOT be retrieved by
the reader.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-127/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

Admin Management Software

The Software supports Windows 98/NT4.0/ME/2000/XP.

IT Manages a network of biometric readers Secure smart cards with a SiteKey.

Configure biometric smart card reader security settings Read/Write the fingerprint
template information to a smart card Enroll new user fingerprint templates Edit
existing user fingerprint templates Delete user fingerprint templates Distribute the
user templates from the reader or PC to other readers in the installation Adjust the
parameters (communications, biometrics, Wiegand, line trigger, etc.) of an individual
reader or all readers connected on a network Configure the operation of the
biometric top LED Create user access, holiday, and biometric schedules Download
the reader transaction log Upload alternate menu prompts (i.e., Arabic menu
prompt) Perform firmware upgrades

Other Supported Formats

The Unit shall support the following Pre-Defined Wiegand formats:

Standard 26-bit
Apollo 44-bit
Northern 34-bit
Northern 34-bit (no parity)
Andover 37-bit*
Generic 64-bit*
Ademco 34-bit
HID Corporate 1000 35-bit
HID 37-bit
Wiegand 4002 40-bit*
Generic 34-bit*

Custom Pre-Defined Formats

The reader shall support the use of a Custom Wiegand Format.

Pass-Thru Formats

The reader shall support a Pass-Thru mode. In this mode, critical information about
the format is provided to the biometric unit, which shall allow the reader to correctly
generate the card ID required to send to the Access Control System. To support
your proprietary Wiegand format in a Pass-Thru mode.
Smart Card

Features:

13.56 MHz read/write contactless smart card and 125 kHz technology
provides high-speed, reliable communications with high data integrity.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-128/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

iCLASS technology ensures high security with mutual authentication,


encrypted data transfer, and 64-bit diversified keys for read/write capabilities.
Any existing HID format can be factory or field programmed into the secure
HID access control application area.
Available in 2k bit (256 Byte) or 16k bit (2k Byte) configurations.
Meets ISO standards for thickness for use with all direct image and thermal
transfer printers.
Add a magnetic stripe, barcode, anti-counterfeiting, or photo ID.

All 2k bit (256 Byte) iCLASS credentials have the following features:

Available in two application area configuration only.


Provides the HID standard access control application area and one other
application area for user customization.
Meets ISO 15693 standard for contactless communications.
Provides a cost effective way to improve the security of your access control
installation.

All 16k bit (2k Byte) iCLASS credentials have the following features:

Sufficient read/write memory to store multiple biometric templates.


Available in a two or sixteen application area configuration.
Multiple securely separated files enable numerous applications, including the
HID standard access control application, and support future growth.
Meets ISO 15693 and 14443B for contactless communications.

Smart Card Reader

Features

Security 64-bit authentication keys are extremely secure.

All RF data transmission between the card and reader should be encrypted, using a
secure algorithm.

Typical Maximum Read Range

2.5-4.5 (6.3-11.4 cm) with smart Card

Indoor/Outdoor Design

Rugged, weatherized polycarbonate enclosure, designed to withstand harsh


environments, provides reliable performance and resistance to vandalism.
Permanent magnet built into housing facilitates tamper alarm when used with a
magnetic reed switch.

Parking Reader

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-129/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

Specifications

Operating frequency Europe: 2.400 2.482 GHz US: 2.438 2.457 GHz

Housing with ABS cover Protection IP65 [approx. NEMA4x]

Detection range Up to 10 meters [33 ft] , 2 TO 3 m for the proposing


system

Range check Acoustic by built-in beeper

Operating temperature -30+60C [-22+140F]


Object speed UP to 200 km/h [125 mph] at appropriate distance
Power Europe: 230 VAC +10%, 100 mA, 50-60 Hz / 2230 VDC, max 1A US:
22..30 VDC, max. 1A
Power consumption <25VA (on AC), <20 Watt (on DC)
Frequency offset 138 channels [US 32 channels] channel spacing 600
kHz to avoid interference, to be used when TRANSIT readers are installed in close
vicinity of each other
Polarisation Circular (LHC) Input 1 dry contact or TTL Relay output
1 relay output (NO, common, NC), 24 VDC 2A, 120 VAC 1A

Output Barcode 39, Wiegand 26-bit, Wiegand 32-bit,


Wiegand 37-bit, FF56 and Omron ISO 7811/2
Antenna connection Optional 1 external inductive antenna connection
Antenna output 120 kHz
Interfaces RS232, RS422, 20mA CL, Profibus DP, Multidrop and
TCP/IP

Communication protocols CR/LF, DC2/DC4, TCP/IP, Profibus DP and various


OEM protocols (for more information see firmware manuals)

Mounting : Wall mounting set included Pole mounting set and weather proof
protection hood optional available

Certifications

European Directive for EMC 89/336/EEC, EN50081-1, EN50082-1 and EN50082-2.


ETS0908

Barrier

3.0 Mt. Maximum arm length or two nos. for more width entry and exit , opeing time
approximately 3 seconds

2mm thickness A 1 quality steel cabinet

Need to fix in 20cm in concrete

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-130/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

A Microprocessor controlled electronics, A high torque continuous two way


operation AC motor is utilized in the barrier.

Door Locks

Holding force 550kg


Voltage DC12v
Power 12v/240mA

Necessary L&Z Brackets need to provided for the access doors.

Emergency exit should be provide at all the exits

Walk Through Metal Detectors

Metal detectors shall have the following features and conform to the specified
performance approvals and certifications.

1. FEATURES

a. Pin-Point targets on the left/right/center from head to toe using LED


indicators on both columns.
b. Multiple zones can be independently adjusted from base sensitivity level.
c. Multiple target pinpointing with 33 distinct detection zones.
d. Eye level pacing lights using international symbols for wait ( ) and proceed
( ).
e. Count number of patrons, number of alarms, and calculate an alarm
percentage.
f. Simple to use touchpad controls using LCD displays and LED indicators.
g. Physical key lock and software access levels.
h. Physical key locked overhead cabinets housing all cables, connectors, and
circuit boards.
i. Multiple units able to operate in close proximity.
j. Multiple discrimination programs to meet all application requirements
including TSA EMD.
k. Ability to alter multiple coil combinations through program adjustments.
l. Manufactured by ISO 9001 Certified company.

2. PERFORMANCE

a. Meets or exceeds all international regulation performance requirements,


including:
1. TSA EMD Transportation Security Administration Enhanced Metal
Detection System.
2. FAA Federal Aviation Administration.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-131/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

3. CE Approved.
4. CSA Approved.
5. CB Certified.
6. Safe for Medical Implants, Pregnant Women, and all Magnetic Media.
b. Multi-Dimensional Coil Design able to detect guns, knives, and other flat and
rod shaped weapons.
c. Field Uniformity providing equal detection capabilities for floor level
screening.
d. External Interference Cancellation using Digital Signal Processing
technology (DSP).
e. Target Detection is independent of pass-through speed.

3. OPTIONS

a. Networking capabilities for local connections, across LAN/WAN, or Internet.


b. Battery Back up capability for inadvertent power loss
c. Portable wheel system for frequent relocation
d. Capability to fasten to all types of floors without damage

Test on Site

1. The Contractor shall supply all necessary equipment and labor for the
in site testing of heads and sensors of all types.

2. A set of shorting plugs with connectors shall be supplied for checking


the wiring to sensor and automatic station sockets.

3. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to supply all necessary test


bench equipment for checking and calibration of all items of the
system.

21.2.24 STANDBY DIESEL ALTERNATOR SET

a. General

Provide all labour, materials, and equipment to furnish, install, and place in
operation the power generation system in accordance with the contract documents
and manufacturer's drawings and installation instructions. These specifications also
describe requirements for the design, fabrication, and testing of the power system.

The installation of the power generation system shall include the following:

1. Engine-driven generator set.


2. Control system.
3. Cooling system.
4. Fuel supply and storage system.
5. Generator set accessories.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-132/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

6. Mounting system.
7. System control and switchgear.

b. Related Works

Refer to the following Tender Specification sections for related mechanical and
electrical considerations.

c. System Description

Generator sets shall be of the Prime Power rating for standby application and these
ratings shall be as indicated upon the drawings.

Prime Power rating is defined as 10% overload for 1 hour duration in any 12 hours
period of continuous operation at full-load.

d. System Loads

The diesel generator set(s) shall be sized to accept a minimum of 50% the full-load
rating upon starting and the voltage transient shall remain within 10% of nominal
output voltage.

e. System Function

The generator set(s) shall include the all the necessary controls and equipment to
automatically control the optimum generator set operation. After starting, the unit(s)
shall automatically attain rated speed and voltage, and accept the rated load. The
engine governor shall control generator set speed, while generator output voltage
regulation shall be a function of the generator automatic voltage regulator. Facilities
for the manual adjustment of the generator speed and voltage shall also be
provided.

f. Daily Fuel Tank and Fuel Lift Pump

A daily fuel tank with sufficient fuel capacity for at least 8 hours duty on full load
shall be provided, in a suitable location in the room. A dial type fuel gauge, fuel
filter inlet and outlet connections, drain plug and all feed and return fuel pipes
shall be fitted to the tank complete with hose for filling purposes.

An electrical or manual fuel lift pump shall be supplied and installed near the daily
fuel tank to lift fuel automatically or manually from the bulk storage tank with
capacity at least 48 hours duty on full load to the daily storage tank. Necessary
float switches to operate lift pump shall be provided.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-133/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

All full tanks must be as per Woqood specification and the contractor shall obtain
approval from Woqood before any installation for generator full tank, full network &
fill point location and size.

g. Performance

The power generating system shall meet the performance criteria that follow:

1. Rating - Engine brake horsepower shall be sufficient to deliver full rated


generator set kW / kVA when operated at rated rpm and equipped with all
engine-mounted auxiliary and external loads such as radiator fans etc.

2. Conditions - The rating shall be based on ISO 3046/1 standard conditions of


100 kPa and 27oC (29.53 in Hg, 81F); BS 5514, DIN 6271, SAE J1349 and
API 7B-11C also apply.

3. Fuel - Diesel engines shall be able to deliver rated power when operating on
Type 2 diesel fuel having 35 o API (16C, 60F) specific gravity.

4. Fuel Consumption - Diesel fuel rates shall be based on fuel having a low
heating value (LHV) of 42,780 kJ/kg (18,390 Btu/lb.) when used at 29 oC
(85oF) and weight 838.9 g/l (7.001 lbs. / U.S. gal).

5. Start Time & Load Acceptance - Engines shall start, achieve rated voltage
and frequency, and be capable of accepting full-load within 10 seconds
when properly equipped and maintained.

6. Block Load Acceptance - Transient response shall conform to ISO 8528


requirements.

7. Power Delivery - Prime rating with 10% overload capability for a duration of 1
hour in any 12 hour period of operation at the rated full-load.

8. Frequency - 50 Hz

9. Voltage Phase to phase = 415 V & phase to neutral = 240 V.

10. Allowable maximum Voltage Dip - upon the application of 50% of full-load
power rating Within 10%.

11. Average Power Factor - 0.80 lag.

12. Steady State Speed Tolerance - +/- 0.50 %.

h. Build Quality

The complete power generation system, including engine, alternator and control
panel shall be supplied by same manufacturer and the authorized dealer who has
been regularly engaged in the supply and support of complete diesel generator
power system products. All components shall be designed to achieve optimum

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-134/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

components and performance compatibility and prototype tested to prove integrated


the design capability. The complete system shall have been factory fabricated,
assembled, and production tested. The naming of a specific manufacturer does not
waive any requirements of this specification. Any exceptions or variations must be
individually and separately listed as part of compliance statement.

i. Responsibility

The responsibility for performance to this specification shall not be divided among
individual component manufacturers, but must be assumed solely by the primary
system supplier. This includes generating system design, manufacture, test, and
having a local supplier responsible for service, parts, and warranty for the total
system.

j. Sub-Assembly & Packaging

Generator set mounted sub-assemblies such as cooling system, base, air intake
system, exhaust outlet fittings, and the generator set mounted controls shall be
designed, built, and assembled as a complete unit by the engine - generator
manufacturer.

k. Production Tests

The system manufacturer shall perform post production tests on the generator set
supplied. A certified report of these tests shall be made available when requested
and shall also be included in the O&M Manual.

l. Drawings

All installation drawings and wiring diagrams for the generator set, controls, and
switch gear must conform to a common and approved format.

m. Submittals

Submittals for approval shall be made in accordance with CSI Division 1.


Submittals shall include but not be limited to the following:

1. Component List - A breakdown of all components and options including


switchgear.

2. Technical Data - Manufacturer produced generator set specification or data


sheet identifying make and model of engine and generator, and including
relevant component design and performance data.

Engine:

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-135/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

Type, aspiration, compression ratio, and combustion cycle


Bore, stroke, displacement, and number of cylinders
Engine lubricating oil capacity
Engine coolant capacity without radiator
Engine coolant capacity with radiator
Coolant pump external resistance (maximum)
Coolant pump flow at maximum resistance

Alternator:

Model
Frame
Insulation class
Number of leads
Weight, total
Weight, rotor
Airflow
Efficiency at 0.8 power factor for - 50% / 75% / 100% load.
Time constants; short circuit transient (T'D).
Time constants, armature short circuit (TA).
Reactance, sub transient - direct axis (XD).
Reactance, transient - saturated (XD).
Reactance, synchronous - direct axis (XD).
Reactance, negative sequence (X2).
Reactance, zero sequence (X0).
Fault current, 3 phase symmetrical.
Decrement curve.

Radiator:

Model
Type
Fan drive ratio
Coolant capacity, radiator.
Coolant capacity, radiator & engine.
Weight both, dry & wet.

System:

Dimensions - length x width x height. Weight, both dry & wet.


Performance - Based on SAE J1349 standard conditions of 100 kPa
(29.61 in Hg) and 25oC (77F); also at conditions of ISO 3046/1, DIN
6271 and BS 5514. Fuel rates are based on ISO 3046 and on fuel oil
of 35o API (16oC or 60oF) gravity, having a LHV of 42780 kJ/kg
(18,390 Btu/lb.) when used at 29 oC-(85oF) and weighing 838.9 g/l
(7.001 lbs./U.S. gal).
Power rating at 0.8 power factor.
kVA rating.
Fuel consumption at standard conditions for:

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-136/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

o 50 % load.
o 75 % load.
o 100% load.
Combustion air inlet flow rate.
Exhaust gas, flow rate.
Stack temperature.
Exhaust system backpressure (maximum).
Heat rejection to:
o coolant
o after cooler
o exhaust
o atmosphere from engine
o atmosphere from generator

Auxiliary Equipment

Specification or data sheets, including switchgear, transfer switch,


vibration isolators, and day tank.

Drawings General arrangements & dimensions drawings showing


overall generator set measurements, mounting location, and
interconnect points for load leads, fuel, exhaust, cooling & drain lines.

Wiring Diagrams

Wiring diagrams, schematics & control panel outline drawings


published by the manufacturer in Joint Industrial Council (JIC) format
for controls & switchgear showing interconnected points and logic
diagrams for use by contractor & owner.

Warranty Statements

Warranty verification published by the manufacturer.

Service

Location & description of supplier's parts & service facility including


parts inventory and number of qualified generator set service
personnel.

n. Service and Warranty Qualifications

The manufacturer shall have a local authorized dealer who can provide factory-
trained servicemen, the required stock of replacement parts, technical assistance,
and warranty administration.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-137/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

The manufacturer's authorized dealer shall have a local parts and service facility,
preferably near to the jobsite.

The manufacturer's authorized dealer shall be capable of administering the


manufacturer and dealer's warranty for all components supplied by the selling
dealer (who may or may not be the same as the servicing dealer).

The manufacturer's and dealer's warranty shall in no event be for a period of less
than one year from date of hand-over to the Client.

The generator set supplier shall have factory trained service representatives and all
the tooling necessary to install, test, maintain, and repair all provided equipment.

The generator set supplier shall have sufficient parts inventory to maintain over the
counter availability of at least 90% of the component parts.

The generator set supplier shall provide a scheduled oil sampling service to monitor
the engine condition on an ongoing and regular basis.

The oil samples shall be analyzed at the generator set supplier's facility by factory
trained personnel.

o. Component Requirements

The engine shall be stationary, Jacket water after cooler, 1500 RPM, four cycle
design with DRY exhaust manifolds. It shall be manufactured in the United States,
Western Europe or in Japan. It shall not be manufactured with any Class I ozone
depleting substances (ODS) as defined by Federal Register Vol 5, No. 86.

The engine shall be equipped with air filters, fuel filters and pressure gauge,
lubricating oil cooler, filters, and pressure gauge, water pump and temperature
gauge, service hour meter, flywheel, and flywheel housing when applicable.

The lubrication oil pump shall be a positive displacement type that is integral with
the engine and gear driven from the engine gear train. The system shall
incorporate full flow filtration with bypass valve to continue lubrication in the event of
filter clogging.

The bypass valve must be integral with the engine filter base or receptacle.
Systems where bypass valves are located in the replaceable oil filter are not
acceptable. Pistons shall be oil cooled by continuous jet spray to the underside or
inside of the crown and piston pin.

The filter shall incorporate a self-lubricating, free rotating seal and have a
nonmetallic core sufficiently rigid to minimize movement or shifting of the filtration
media.

The fuel system shall be integral with the engine. It shall consist of fuel filter,
transfer pump, injection pumps, lines, and nozzles. The transfer pump shall deliver
fuel under low pressure to individual injection pumps - one for each cylinder.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-138/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

The injection pumps shall be driven from the camshaft and simultaneously
controlled by a rack and pinion assembly that is hydraulically actuated by signals
from the engine governor. The pumps shall be of a variable displacement type to
alter the volume of fuel delivered to the spray nozzles according to load demand.

The nozzles shall inject fuel directly into the cylinder in the optimum spray pattern
for efficient combustion.

In addition to the standard filter, the fuel system shall include a primary fuel filter
between the fuel tank and transfer pump to screen large contaminants.

A fuel/water separator shall protect the fuel system from water damage.

A manual fuel-priming pump shall facilitate priming and bleeding air from the
system.

Flexible fuel lines between engine and fuel supply shall be installed to isolate
vibration.

A Free floor standing tank with capacity for 8-hour full-load operation shall be
provided. The tank shall incorporate threaded pipe connections; float switches, fuel
gauge, and a high fuel level alarm contact. A manual shutoff valve on the fuel line
to the engine and a tank drain valve shall also be included.

The engine governor shall be Electronic type and transient load response within
commercial and ISO 8528 tolerances. It will be selected, installed, and tested by
the generator set manufacturer to meet step load starting kVA requirement specified
within this document.

The engine control shall be of Electronic Programmable type. The control will
monitor all significant engine parameters,

The engine control shall be configured to avoid interruption of power whenever


possible. Engine Control system shall be provided with a programmable relay to
activate in case the load exceeds predefined level to shut down a non-essential
load. It shall display real time and historical data to allow user to optimize operation
and provide accurate service information in the event of a malfunction. Information
shall be accessible through a data link for remote monitoring, or through an RS 232
port. A data link failure shall not cause an interruption of engine operation.

The engine Jacket water-cooling system shall be a closed circuit design with
provision for filling, expansion and de-aeration. The cooling pump shall be driven
by the engine. Coolant temperature shall be internally regulated to disconnect
external cooling systems until operating temperature is achieved.

Heat rejected to the engine jacket water shall be discharged to the atmosphere
through a close-coupled radiator. The radiator shall be sized to cool the engine
continuously while operating at full rated load and at site conditions. It shall be a
folded core design consisting of individually replaceable core assemblies sealed
between the top and bottom tank and which can be replaced individually at the job
site.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-139/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

The radiator-cooling fan shall be a blower type driven from the engine. Air shall be
drawn from the engine side and exhausted through the radiator core.

The engine air cleaner shall be engine mounted with dry element requiring
replacement no more frequently than 500 operating hours or once each year. If
external ducting is required, maximum restriction to the combustion air inlet shall be
6.7 kPa (27 in H2O) with airflow of 932 cfm.

Turbochargers shall be of the axial turbine type driven by engine exhaust gases and
direct - connected to a compressor supplying engine combustion air.

The engine exhaust system shall be installed to discharge combustion gases


quickly and silently with minimum restriction. System including silencer shall be
designed for minimum restriction, and in no case shall backpressure exceed 6.7
kPa (27 in H2O).

Piping shall be supported and braced to prevent weight or thermal growth being
transferred to the engine and flexible expansion fittings provided to accommodate
thermal growth. Support dampers and springs shall be included where necessary to
isolate vibration.

Long runs of pipe shall be pitched away from the engine and water traps installed at
the lowest point. Exhaust stacks shall be extended to avoid nuisance fumes and
odors, and outlets cut at 45 to minimize noise.

Exhaust piping shall be insulated and clad with aluminium to limit the surface
temperature within 65oC.

The exhaust silencer shall be at minimum of the Residential grade (25 dBA) quality
to provide extreme noise attenuation for environments with low background noise.

An exhaust thimble shall be installed at the point where the exhaust pipe penetrates
the building.

The engine starting system shall include 24 volt DC starting motor(s), starter relay,
and automatic reset circuit breaker to protect against butt engagement. Batteries
shall be maintenance free, lead acid types mounted near the starting motor. A
corrosion resistant or coated steel battery rack shall be located to avoid spillage
from servicing of fuel and oil filters. Required cables will be furnished and sized to
satisfy circuit requirements. The system shall be capable of starting a properly
equipped engine within 10 seconds at ambient temperatures greater than 22 oC
(70oF).

Batteries for starting and control shall be selected and supplied by the generator set
manufacturer. They shall be a heavy-duty NiCad type with thru-partition
connectors, and housed in a hard rubber or polypropylene case with provision for
venting.

Batteries shall be located as close to the starting motor as practical, away from
spark sources, in a relatively cool ambient, and permit easy inspection and
maintenance. Battery warranty shall be the responsibility of the generator set
manufacturer.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-140/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

The alternator(s) shall be Prime rated for Standby Application 415 V, three phase, 4
wire, 50 Hz, 0.8 1500 rpm.

The alternator(s) shall be capable of withstanding a three-phase load of 300% rated


current for 10 seconds, and sustaining 150% of continuous load current for 2
minutes with field set for normal rated load excitation. It shall exhibit less than 5%
waveform deviation at no load.

Alternator to be suitable for Motor Starting duty of 50% of Generator set rating and
maximum 10% voltage dip.

Alternator to be driven by a synchronous driver.

Alternator is to be hot, equivalent to the stabilized temperature band between the


alternator's 75% and 100% and 110 % of the nominal rated output of one hour
continuous load rating.

Alternator efficiencies shall be calculated according to IEC 34-2 Section 4, with all
I2R losses corrected to 115 oC.

As a minimum the alternator shall be designed, manufactured to meet following


specification.

1. Rating - 415V, 3 phase, 50Hz, 0.8 pf.


2. Insulation Class - Class H.
3. Number of Poles 4.
4. Excitation -Permanent Magnetic

The revolving field coils shall be precision wet layer wound with epoxy-based
material applied to each layer of magnet wire. Alternator pitch shall optimize
efficiency and minimize total harmonic distortion. The field shall be prototyped
tested for two hours at 150% of rated speed at 70 oC, and production tested at 125%
of rated speed. It shall be dynamically balanced to 0.5 mil peak-to-peak.

The alternator shall be of class IP 22 designed to operate in a sheltered drip-proof


environment.

Alternator(s) shall be equipped with 240 V ac single-phase space heaters to


minimize condensation while the alternator set is idle. The heaters shall be capable
of easily mounting in the assembled alternator.

The alternator exciter shall be brushless with the circuit consisting of a three-phase
armature and a three-phase full wave bridge rectifier mounted on the rotor shaft.
Surge suppressors shall be included to protect the rotating diodes from voltage
spikes.

The permanent magnet excitation system shall derive excitation current from a pilot
exciter mounted on the rotor shaft. It shall enable the alternator to sustain 300% of
rated current for ten seconds during a fault condition.

Voltage regulator shall be Digital Programmable type. As installed, the voltage

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-141/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

regulator shall meet the applicable sections of the following standards:

1. Canadian Standards Association (CSA).


2. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC).
3. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).
4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

The digital voltage regulator shall be microprocessor based with fully programmable
operating and protection characteristics. The regulator shall maintain generator
output voltage within +/- 0.25% for any constant load between no load and full-load.
The regulator shall be capable of sensing true RMS in three phases of alternator
output voltage, or operating in single phase sensing mode. The voltage regulator
shall include a VAr / Pf control feature as standard. The regulator shall provide an
adjustable dual slope regulation characteristic in order to optimize voltage and
frequency response for site conditions. The voltage regulator shall include standard
the capability to provide generator paralleling with reactive droop compensation and
reactive differential compensation.

The voltage regulator shall communicate with the Generator Control Panel via a
J1939 communication network with generator voltage adjustments made via the
controller keypad. Additionally, the controller shall allow system parameter setup
and monitoring, and provide fault alarm and shutdown information through the
controller. A PC-based user interface shall be available to allow viewing and
modifying operating parameters in a windows compatible environment.

The engine and generator shall be assembled to a common base by the engine-
generator manufacturer. The generator set base shall be designed and built by the
engine-generator manufacturer to resist deflection, maintain alignment, and
minimize resonant linear vibration.

The base mounting frame shall be original diesel generator set manufacturers
design.

Linear vibration isolators shall be provided for installation below the Generator set
skid.

Fuel storage facilities shall conform to the requirements of Qatar Petroleum


Company Specification and other relevant local regulations.

The bulk fuel store shall be a steel tank with a capacity of 1 day full-load operation.
It shall be in accordance with local code requirements. The tank shall be equipped
with the necessary openings including fill, vent, sounding, gauges, suction and
return openings set within a 600 mm x 600 mm manhole.

Submittals - Shop drawings shall be submitted showing all dimensions, supports


and connections.

The tank shall be buried below grade in accordance with the drawings provided by
the Structural Engineers.
The daily service fuel storage shall be separate from the diesel generator set and
located within the Generator Room as shown upon the drawings. All the necessary
fuel transfer pumps & pipe work to transfer fuel from the bulk storage tank to the

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-142/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

daily service tank and then to the diesel generator set shall be provided by the
Contractor. The tanks shall incorporate pipe connections, fuel transfer pump, float
switch, fuel gauge, and a high fuel level alarm contacts wired to an indicating light
on the generator set control cubicle. A manual shut-off valve on the engine supply
line and a drain valve shall be included.

The controls, protection and monitoring systems necessary for the generator set
and its operation shall be the responsibility of the generator set manufacturer. All
sub-system components, interfaces and logic shall be compatible with the engine-
mounted devices.

Provide a fully solid-state, microprocessor based, generator set control. The control
panel shall be designed and built by the engine manufacturer. The control shall
provide all operating, monitoring, and control functions for the generator set. The
control panel shall provide real time digital communications to all engine and
regulator controls via SAE J1939.

The generator set control shall be tested and certified to the following environmental
conditions:

1. Ambient temperature - 40C to +70C Operating Range.


2. 95% humidity non-condensing at 30C to 60C.
3. IP22 protection.
4. 4. 5% salt spray 48 hours, +38C, 36.8V system voltage.
5. Sinusoidal vibration 4.3G's RMS, 24-1000Hz.
6. Electromagnetic Capability (89/336/EEC, 91/368/EEC, 93/44/EEC,
93/68/EEC, BS EN 50081-2, 50082-2).
7. Shock: withstand 15G.

Functionality shall be integral to the control panel as follows:

1. The controls shall include a minimum 64 x 240 pixel, 28mm x 100mm, white
backlit graphical display with text based alarm / event descriptions.
2. The controls shall include as minimum a 3-line data display.
3. Audible horn for alarm and shut-down with horn silence switch.
4. Standard ISO labeling.
5. Multiple language capability.
6. Remote start / stop controls.
7. Local run/off/auto controls integral to system microprocessor.
8. Cool down timer.
9. Speed adjustment.
10. Lamps test.
11. Push button emergency stop button.
12. Voltage adjustment.
13. Voltage regulator V/Hz slope adjustable.
14. Password protected system programming.

The controls shall provide digital read outs for the engine and generator and the
readings shall be indicated in either metric or imperial units based upon selection.
The indications shall be as follows:

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-143/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

Engine

1. Engine oil pressure.


2. Engine oil temperature.
3. Engine coolant temperature.
4. Engine RPM.
5. Battery volts.
6. Engine hours run.
7. Engine crank attempt counter.
8. Engine successful start counter.
9. Service maintenance interval count down.
10. Real time clock.
11. Oil filter differential pressure.
12. Fuel temperature.
13. Fuel pressure.
14. Fuel filter differential pressure.
15. Fuel consumption rate.
16. Total fuel consumed.
17. Engine intake manifold temperature.
18. Engine intake manifold pressure.
19. Engine crankcase pressure.
20. Air filter differential pressure.
21. Boost pressure.
22. Oil filter differential pressure.
23. Engine exhaust stack temperature (if using optional RTD/TC Module).

Generator

1. Generator ac volts (Line to Line, Line to Neutral and Average).


2. Generator ac current (Average and Per Phase).
3. Generator ac Frequency.
4. Generator kW (Total & Per Phase).
5. Generator kVA (Total & Per Phase).
6. Generator kVAr (Total & Per Phase).
7. Power Factor (Average & Per Phase).
8. Total kW-hr.
9. Total kVAR-hr.
10. % kW.
11. % kVA.
12. % kVAR.
13. Generator stator winding temperature.

Voltage Regulation

1. Excitation voltage.
2. Excitation current.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-144/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

The control shall monitor and provide alarm indication and subsequent automatic
shut-down for the specified conditions. All alarms and shut-downs shall be assigned
a time, date, and engine hours run tag that to be stored by the control panel for
both the first and last occurrences. The alarm monitoring and shut-downs shall
include the following:

Engine Alarm / Shut-down

1. Low oil pressure alarm / shut-down.


2. High coolant temperature alarm / shut-down.
3. Loss of coolant shut-down.
4. Over speed shut-down.
5. Over crank shut-down.
6. High intake manifold temperature alarm / shut-down.
7. High exhaust manifold temperature alarm / shut-down.
8. High crankcase pressure alarm / shut-down.
9. High air inlet temperature alarm / shut-down.
10. Emergency stop actuation shut-down.
11. Low coolant temperature alarm.
12. Low battery voltage alarm.
13. High battery voltage alarm.
14. Control switch not in auto position alarm.
15. Battery charger failure alarm.

Generator Alarm / Shut-down

1. Generator over voltage.


2. Generator under voltage.
3. Generator over frequency.
4. Generator under frequency.
5. Generator reverse power.
6. Generator over current.

Voltage Regulator Alarm / Shut-down

1. Loss of excitation alarm / shut-down.


2. Instantaneous over excitation alarm / shut-down.
3. Timed over excitation alarm / shut-down.
4. Rotating diode failure.
5. Loss of sensing.
6. Loss of PMG.

The Controller shall include the ability to accept 18 programmable digital input
signals. The signals may be programmed for either high or low activation using
programmable normally open or normally closed contacts.

The control shall include the ability to operate 14 programmable relay output
signals, which shall integral to the controller. The output relays shall be rated for 2A

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-145/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

@ 30 V DC and consist of 6 Form A (Normally Open) contacts and 2 Form C


(Normally Open & Normally Closed) contacts.

The control shall include the ability to operate 2 discrete outputs, integral to the
controller, which are capable of sinking up to 300 mA.

All engine, voltage regulator, control panel and accessory units shall be accessible
through a single electronic service tool. The following maintenance functionality
shall be integral to the generator set control:

1. Engine run hours display.


2. Service maintenance interval (running hours or calendar days).
3. Engine crank attempt counter.
4. Engine successful starts counter.
5. 20 events are stored in control panel memory
6. Programmable cycle timer that starts and runs the generator for a
predetermined time. The timer shall use 14 user-programmable sequences
that are repeated in a 7-day cycle. Each sequence shall have the following
programmable set points:

a. Day of week.
b. Time of day to start.
c. Duration of cycle.

The controls shall include Modbus RTU communications as standard via RS-485
half duplex with configurable baud rates from 2.4k to 57.6k.

Monitoring Software shall also be provided with the functionality that follows:

1. Provide access to all date and events on generator set communications


network.
2. Provide remote control capability for the generator set.
3. Ability to monitor up to 12 generator sets.
4. Ability to communicate via Modbus RTU or remote modem.

The Contractor shall also provide a local control panel mounted annunciator to meet
the requirements of NFPA 110, Level 1 as follows:

1. Annunciators shall be networked directly to the generator set controls.


2. The local annunciator shall include a lamp test push button, alarm horn and
alarm acknowledgment push button.
3. Individual lamp indications for protection and diagnostics as follows:

a. Over crank.
b. Low coolant temperature.
c. High coolant temperature warning.
d. High coolant temperature shut-down.
e. Low oil pressure warning.
f. Low oil pressure shut-down.
g. Over speed.
h. Low coolant level.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-146/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

i. EPS supplying load.


j. Control switch not in auto.
k. High battery voltage.
l. Low battery voltage.
m. Battery charger AC failure.
n. Emergency stop.
o. Spare.
p. Spare.

The Contractor shall provide a remote annunciator to meet the requirements of


NFPA 110, Level 1 as follows:

1. The annunciator shall provide remote indications of all the points listed
above and shall incorporate ring-back capability so that after silencing the
initial alarm, any subsequent alarms will sound the horn.
2. Ability to be located up to 250 m from the generator set

An 18 A battery charger shall be provided to accept a 240V volt ac single phase


input and the output shall be 24 volt DC. The ac input and DC output shall be
protected by fuses and incorporate current limiting circuitry to avoid the need for a
crank disconnect relay. An ac voltage power switch shall be mounted on the face of
the charger and shielded from accidental switching. The charger shall include an
AC ammeter and voltmeter, failure / malfunction alarm for ac failure and DC level
low voltage and be housed in an enclosure suitable for wall mounting.

The following articles and paragraphs are intended to define acceptable procedures
and practices of inspecting, installing, and testing the generator set and associated
equipment.

A pre-delivery inspection must be performed by the system manufacturers' local


dealer at the dealer's facility to insure no damage occurred in transit and all the
diesel generator set components, controls, and switchgear are included as specified
here-in.

Prior to delivery and acceptance, the generator set shall be tested to show it is free
of any defects and will start automatically and carry full-load. This testing shall be
performed at the facility of the system manufacturer's authorized local dealer.

The testing shall be done on dry type, resistive load banks capable of definite and
precise incremental loading. Salt water brine tanks or load banks requiring water as
a source of cooling will not be allowed.

Load bank testing shall be done in the presence of the owner's engineer or his
appointed representative. Testing shall be for a minimum of four hours under full-
load.

The bidder shall furnish all consumables necessary for testing. Any defects, which
become evident during the test shall be corrected by the bidder at his own expense
prior to shipment to the jobsite.

Delivery shall be made to the project construction site by the system manufacturer's
authorized dealer.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-147/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

The installation shall be performed in accordance with shop drawings,


specifications, and the manufacturer's instructions.

The complete installation shall be checked for procedural and operational


compliance by a representative of the system manufacturer's authorized local
dealer. The engine lubricating oil and antifreeze, as recommended by the system
manufacturer, shall be provided by the generator set dealer. If different
manufacturers furnish switchgear and generator sets, technical representatives of
both manufacturers' authorized dealers shall verify the installation meets
requirements. Any deficiencies shall be noted and corrected by the Contractor.

The system manufacturer's dealer representative shall be present to assist the


Contractor during start-up, systems check, adjusting, and any site testing required
after the installation is complete.

Following installation, the tests shall be performed by the system manufacturer's


local dealer representative(s) in the presence of the owner's engineer or designated
appointee all as follows:

Pre-Start Checks:

1. Oil level.
2. Water level.
3. Day tank fuel level.
4. Battery connection and charge condition.
5. Air start supply pressure (if so equipped).
6. Engine to control interconnects.
7. Engine generator intake / exhaust obstructions.
8. Engine room ventilation obstructions.
9. Removal of all packing materials.

Operational Tests:

1. Load test performed with resistive load bank 25% / 15 minutes.


2. Load test performed with resistive load bank 50% / 30 minutes.
3. Load test performed with resistive load bank 75% / 30 minutes.
4. Load test performed with resistive load bank 100% / 240 minutes.
5. Load test performed with resistive load bank 110% / 60 minutes.

For the duration of each load test the engine and generator parameters shall be
recorded at 15 minute intervals as follows:

1. Date / Time.
2. KW, Voltage & Amperage (3 phase), frequency.
3. Fuel pressure, oil pressure and water temperature.
4. Exhaust gas temperature at engine exhaust outlet.
5. Generator Winding & Bearing Temperature.
6. Ambient temperature

The correct operation of controls, engine shutdown, and safety devices shall also be

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-148/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

demonstrated and recorded as witnessed and verified.

The manufacturer's representative shall provide the necessary resistive load banks
to test the diesel generator set for all the prescribed load tests at no additional cost
to the contract.

Should these tests indicate that the equipment does not meet the specified
performance requirements, then the cost of all corrective measures and re-testing
shall be borne by the manufacturer's representative.

The system manufacturer's authorized dealer shall provide a complete orientation


for the owner's engineering and maintenance personnel. Orientation shall include
both classroom and hands-on instruction. Topics covered shall include controls
operation, schematics, wiring diagrams, meters, indicators, warning lights, shutdown
system and routine maintenance.

p. Operating and Maintenance Manuals

The system manufacturer's authorized local dealer shall furnish six hard and soft
copies of each of the manuals and books listed below for each unit provided under
this contract:

1. Operating Instructions - with description and illustration of all switchgear


controls and indicators and engine and generator controls.

2. Parts Books - which illustrate and list all assemblies, subassemblies and
components, except standard fastening hardware (nuts, bolts, washers,
etc.).

3. Preventative Maintenance Instructions - on the complete system that cover


daily, weekly, monthly, biannual , and annual maintenance requirements and
include a complete lubrication chart.

4. Routine Test Instructions - for all electronic and electrical circuits and for the
main AC generator.

5. Troubleshooting Flowcharts - covering the complete generator set showing


description of trouble, probable cause, and suggested remedy.

6. Recommended Spare Part Lists - showing all consumables anticipated to be


required during routine maintenance and test.

7. Wiring Diagrams & Schematics - showing function of all electrical


components.

All manuals and books described above shall be contained in rigid plastic pouches.

q. Information

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-149/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

The Contractor shall furnish certified performance data and curves as a part of his
proposal and a description of his quality control program. The Manufacturer shall
ascertain that his equipment withstands the starting kW and kVA requirements of
the connected loads as shown on the drawings.

The Contractor shall furnish an outline drawing showing principal dimensions,


space requirements and the location of the connections to the equipment quoted,
mainly for starting, cooling, fuel and lubricating systems plus the ventilation
requirements.

The Contractor shall provide a basic tool kit, engine maintenance handbook, spare
parts manual and generating set instruction handbook.

The Contractor shall itemize all sight flow indications, temperature sensing
devices, and pressure gauges and indications which will be furnished for local
indication of the critical items as recommended. If these indicators are provided as
standard with the equipment, it shall be so indicated.

The Contractor shall furnish comprehensive information and catalogues along with
schematic and detailed diagrams showing all equipment furnished and shall include
the control system and shall clearly describe the operation, manufacturing and
types of all instruments and control items.

All literature and catalogues shall be in English.

r. Safety Considerations

All external electrical and mechanical connections shall be with flexible end
connections to allow free movement of the diesel generator set on resilient
mountings. All exposed rotating parts shall be fully guarded to prevent contact by
personnel. Guards shall comply with BS 5304, and shall be removable for
maintenance purposes.

A permanently fixed warning notice with 6 mm white lettering on a red background


shall be fixed to the set in a prominent position.

The warning shall be as follows:

"THE GENERATING SET IS UNDER AUTOMATIC CONTROL AND MAY START


AT ANY TIME WITHOUT WARNING"

s. Manufacturers

The diesel generator set manufacturer shall preferably also be the manufacturer of
either the alternator and shall be responsible for the assembly. The diesel
generator set manufacturer shall have a reliable local representative of good
repute, keeping adequate stocks of spare parts and providing efficient after sales
services.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-150/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

The Contractor shall submit for approval shop drawings for the diesel generator set
including all necessary civil work details, such as trenches, concrete bases, etc.,
generator starting characteristics and manufacturers approval for the generator's
correct selection as to connected load, de-rating factors, etc., wiring diagrams and
description of operation.

A copy of these shop drawings shall also be sent to the local power authorities for
approval (if needed).

Any modifications to the drawings required by the Engineer or the Local Power
Authorities to allow the equipment to comply with the codes, standards and
specifications called for here-in shall be carried out with no extra cost to the
contract.

t. Spare Parts

The Contractor shall at the time of tender furnish a comprehensive priced list of
recommended spare parts for 2 years and 5 years service. (over and above the
one year defect liability period achieving a total of 3 years and 5 years of extended
operating maintenance).

The Client / Engineer reserves the right to accept or reject the same either in full or
in part and the contractor shall supply the spare parts as per the final approved list,
at the time of handing over/ taking over of the Project.

Spare parts shall be packed in suitable containers or boxes bearing labels, clearly
designating the contents and the particular of equipment for which they are
intended.

The Contractor shall securely store and protect the spare parts until the completion
of the works and deliver the same to the Client's stores.

u. Applicable Standards

1. General Requirements for Rotating Electrical Machines - BS 4999.


2. Fuel oils for non-marine use BS 2869.
3. Code of Practice for the Safety of machinery.
4. Radio Frequency Interference suppression BS EN 55014 & BS 1597.
5. Reciprocating Internal Combustion Engines Performance - BS 5514.

a. Fuel Oil Consumption - BS 5514 Part 1:1987.


b. Speed Governing - BS 5514 Part 4:1984.
c. Torsional Vibrations - BS 5514 Part 5:1984.
d. Over speed Protection - BS 5514 Part 6:1992.

v. Automatic Transfer Switch

Automatic transfer switches complete with all accessories shall be provided as


indicated upon the drawings.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-151/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

They shall be rated for continuous operation at the prevailing ambient temperature.
They shall be rated for all classes of load both inductive and resistive. They shall
be able to close on an in-rush current up to and including 10 times the continuous
rating of the switch and be capable of enduring 6000 cycles of operation at the
rated current and a rate of 6 cycles per minute without failure. The automatic
transfer switch shall be interlocked to positively prevent the load from being
simultaneously energized by normal and emergency power. ATSs shall comprise a
set of two mechanically and electrically interlocked motorized air circuit breakers if
current for rating in excess of 630 A. For ratings of 630 A and below then two
electrically and mechanically AC3 duty contactors may be utilized instead.

Voltage sensors and time-delay relays of 5 minutes or less shall be of the solid
state, plug-in type devices. The control relays shall be modular dust protected,
plug-in devices. These control accessories shall mount on a dead-front, swing-out
control accessory panel to avoid shock hazard while adjusting control functions, but
will swing- out exposing the wiring to facilitate servicing. A controls disconnect plug
shall be provided to de-energize the control circuits when the panel is in the open,
swing-out position. Indicating lamps and meters shall be set in a front mounted
meter panel to be visible without the opening covers.

Control accessories shall be provided for the following:

1. Monitor each un-grounded line with calibrated dial adjustable voltage, solid
state sensors to sense a decrease of voltage below a set point, or a loss of
voltage on any phase of the normal power source. Voltage sensors shall be
temperature compensated for 2% maximum deviation over the temperature
range - 25F (-32C) to 175 F (+ 79C).

2. Signal the engine of the generator sets to start in the event of a power
interruption (or as selected by ATS). A solid-state time-delay (adjustable
from 0.5 to 10 seconds) relay shall provide this signal to avoid nuisance
start-ups on momentary voltage dips or power outages.

3. Transfer the load to the diesel generator set after it reaches the correct
voltage and frequency. A solid-state time-delay (adjustable form 0.5 to 10
seconds) shall also delay this transfer to allow the engine-generator to
stabilize.

4. Automatic return of the load to the mains supply after normal power
restoration. A time-delay (adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes) shall delay this
transfer to avoid connection to an unstable mains supply.

5. Automatic transfer of the load from diesel alternator set to normal mains
source in the event the diesel generator set output fails and the mains
supply is available.

6. A signal for the engine of the diesel generator set to stop after the load is
transferred to the mains supply. A solid-state time-delay on stop (adjustable
from 0.5 to 5 minutes) shall permit the engine to run unloaded to cool down
before shutdown (or as selected by ATS).

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-152/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

7. Provide a switch to select with load or without load to test or exercise as


follows:

a. Without Load the generating set runs unloaded.

b. With Load the automatic transfer switch transfers load to


generating set, after a time-delay, the same as it would for a normal
source interruption.

8. Provide a device to electrically disconnect the control section from the


transfer switch for maintenance and service during normal operation.

Indicating meters and lamps shall be front mounted for easy reference without the
need to open covers. Meter and lamp combinations shall be provided as follows:

1. Green (normal) and red (emergency) lamps to indicate which source is


supplying power to the load.

2. AC Voltmeter to measure generator output voltage.

3. Frequency meter with pointer indicator and run-time meter to monitor the
electric generating set

The bypass / isolation switch shall be provided to comply with the requirements of
standards applicable to the type of emergency and stand-by power system plus the
applicable safety codes.

The switch shall be a manual operation type arranged to select and connect either
the source of power directly to the load, isolating the transfer switch from the load
plus both the power sources.

The switch shall include the features that follow:

1. A means to lock the switch in the position that isolates the transfer switch,
with an arrangement that permits complete electrical testing of the transfer
switch while isolated. While isolated, interlocks shall prevent transfer switch
operation except for testing or maintenance.

2. Draw-out arrangement for the transfer switch, provides physical separation


from live parts for testing and maintenance operations.

3. Current voltage, Closing, and short Withstand ratings: Equal or greater than
that of the associated ATS, with the same phase arrangement and number
of poles.

4. The contact temperatures of the switch shall not exceed those of ATS
contacts when they are carrying the rated load.

5. Operability: Constructed so that the load bypass and transfer switch isolation
can be performed by a single person in no more than two operations in 15
seconds or less.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-153/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

6. Legend: A manufacturer's standard legend for control labels and instruction


signs giving clear and detailed operating instructions.

7. Maintainability: Fabricate the switch to allow easy and convenient removal of


major components from the front without removal of other parts or the main
power conductors and terminations.

21.2.25 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM

a. General

The Contractor shall provide Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) systems as shown
upon the drawings. The UPS units shall be of a high efficiency type with low noise
(acoustic) output.

The Contractor shall ensure the capacity, voltage, performance and the output
wave form are compatible with the connected equipment and shall submit his offer
subject to the approval of the Consultant.

Each UPS shall consist of two parallel-connected units in an active redundancy


configuration. The arrangement shall compose mainly of a rectifier-charger,
inverter, battery racks, batteries, electro-mechanical and static by pass, rectifier by
pass, digital monitoring and alarm system, remote control and signaling cabinet and
filters and wave shapers to suit the equipment. The batteries shall have the
capacity to run the full connected load for at least 30 minutes.

The storage batteries shall be installed on special racks and within cabinets as
shown on drawings.

The UPS and Rectifier shall have the following specification.

b. Rectifier

1. Three phase input voltage: 415/240V, 50 Hz.


2. Voltage Tolerance: 10 %.
3. Frequency Deviation: 5 %.
4. Output Voltage Fluctuation: 1 %.
5. Efficiency at Rated Load: 96 - 98 %.

c. Inverter

1. Three phase input voltage: 415/240V, 50 Hz.


2. Voltage Tolerances: Fixed load steady state: 0.5 % from no Load to full-
load.
3. Dynamic output voltage regulation: +10 % - 8 % with a load variation of
50%.
4. Recovery time of the steady: < 20 ms for ^ U 1 %.
5. Steady State value: < 40 ms for ^ U 0.5 %.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-154/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

6. Output Frequency: 50 Hz, tolerance +/- 0.5 % no matter what the load
variation.
7. Phase Displacement: 3% (^ P 30 %).
8. Harmonic Content: < 4 %.

d. Efficiency

The efficiency of the whole system at full-load shall not be less than 20%.

e. Batteries

1. The battery system shall consist of gas recombination, valve regulated,


lead acid cells, compliant with IEC 60896 Parts 21 and 22. Flame
retardant batteries shall be provided.

2. For each UPS system the battery system shall consist of a minimum of 2
parallel strings of multiple cells. Each individual parallel string shall have
its own dedicated means of electrical protection. The batteries shall be
configured so that in the event of a battery malfunction the affected string
is automatically isolated from the system thereby ensuring battery
autonomy is retained.

3. Battery racks shall be floor mounted with RAW Bolt fixings into concrete
structure.

4. Battery racks and shall be earthed directly back to Mains Earth Facility.

5. Battery system / racks shall be provided with Battery MCCBs of adequate


size and type, which shall be suitably located within the battery room such
that it is accessible from the door opening at a height where climbing aids
are not needed. The battery MCCBs shall be labelled as to their purpose.

6. Batteries shall have a 10 year life and shall be provided such that the
system shall be capable of providing its full autonomy at full load at that
time.

7. A fully discharged battery system shall be capable of being recharged to


80% of the UPS output capacity within a maximum period of 10 times the
normal total discharge time period, and to 90% of the UPS output capacity
within a maximum period of 4 hours.

f. Visual Indications

The visual indications shall be provided for the following:

1. Rectifier ON.
2. Rectifier Fault.
3. Battery Operation.
4. Inverter Fault.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-155/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

5. Static Switch Locked.


6. Acoustic Alarm.
7. Stop Imminent.
8. Inverter ON.
9. Inverter OFF.
10. Inverter In Use.
11. General Alarm Cancel.
12. Load OFF.
13. Rectifier Output Voltage - Display.
14. Rectifier Output Current - Ditto.
15. Inverter Output Voltages - Ditto.
16. Inverter Output Currents - Ditto.
17. Inverter Mains Failure.
18. Rectifier Temperature.
19. Inverter Temperature.
20. Transformer Temperature.
21. Static Switch Temperature.
22. Absence of Mains By- Pass.
23. Mains Frequency Outside Tolerances.
24. By-pass Lock.
25. Inverter / Mains Supply Out of Phase.
26. Switch to Mains by Static Switch.
27. Transfer to Mains Supply by Static Switch.
28. Overload.

g. Warranties

The Contractor shall guarantee the UPS and its installation for 24 months during
which period the Contractor shall maintain and repair any defects due to either
manufacture, or workmanship, at no extra cost to owner.

h. Standards

The manufacturer shall provide proof of a stringent Quality Assurance program. In


particular, the main equipment manufacturing stages shall be sanctioned by
appropriate tests such as:

1. Incoming components inspection.


2. Discrete sub-assembly testing and complete functional checks on the
final product.

The UPS unit shall undergo an on-load burn-in before leaving the factory. Final
inspection and adjustments shall be documented in a report drawn up by the
suppliers quality inspection department.

The UPS shall comply with the standards that follow:

1. Safety: EN 50091-1
2. Design / Manufacturing: ISO 9001

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-156/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

3. EMC: EN 50091-2

All the above specifications and standards shall be certified, for each proposed
UPS, by an independent approved laboratory.

21.2.26 EARTHING AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION

a. Earthing

Earthing shall fully comply with the KAHRAMAA Regulations and BS 7430:1998.

The MV panels connected from the transformers shall have an earth bar of
minimum cross-sectional area of 300 mm2 run the full length of the panels.
Removable neutral to earth test links shall be provided in the MV Panels which shall
be of a minimum cross sectional area of 300 mm2.

The earth bar in the MV Panels shall be connected to the earth provided by
KAHRAMAA or with independent earth station specially provided for this as shown
upon the drawings.

In the case of multi-core armoured cables then the steel wire armour shall be
bonded to earth at all terminations. However, the armour shall not be utilized as the
circuit protective conductor but instead a separate single core pvc insulated
stranded copper earthing cable shall be run alongside and used for this purpose.
The size of this conductor shall not be less than half the csa of the associated
phase conductors.

The outer copper sheath of mineral insulated copper clad cables may be used as
the earth conductor and all cables shall have a PVC over sheath. This type of cable
shall never be buried direct in the ground but instead drawn into PVC or MDPE
ducting.

In case of wiring within steel trunkings and conduits, a separate circuit protective
conductor for every circuit shall be provided and shall have the same csa as the
associated phase conductors.

For ring main circuits, the earth conductor shall also be wiring as a complete the
ring.

Where a means of earthing has not been provided by KAHRAMAA, the consumer's
earthing terminal shall be connected by the earthing lead to an effective earth
electrode or electrodes, such as copper strip or rod, which shall be buried in the
ground at a position as near as practicable to the consumer's earthing terminal.
Each electrode shall be driven to a depth such that it penetrates the summer water
table by a minimum of 2 metres.

Every connection of an earthing lead to an earth electrode shall be made in a pit


measuring a minimum of 300 mm x 300 mm. The connection shall be either welded
or clamped. The pit shall be filled with sand and a removable cover placed on each
pit.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-157/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

b. Bonding

Where metal work other than current carrying conductors may be liable to become
charged with electricity in such a manner as to create a danger, (if damage to the
insulation of a conductor should occur in any apparatus / cable) then precautionary
measures shall be enacted as follows:

i. The metal work shall be effectively and securely bonded to earth in such a
manner as will ensure an immediate electrical discharge to earth that will trip
the circuit breaker concerned and clear the fault. Also the voltage upon the
metalwork with respect to earth must not exceed 50 V and the circuit breaker
must trip within 5 seconds for fixed equipment and within 0.4 second for all
circuits that supply portable equipment.

In situations that may normally be wet or damp, where electrical apparatus is


present and might give rise to danger and where there are substantial exposed
metallic parts of other services (such as gas and water pipes, sinks and baths), the
earth continuity conductor of the electrical installation shall be effectively connected,
electrically and mechanically to all such metal parts and to any exposed metal work
of the electrical apparatus.

A separate green / yellow stripe PVC insulated copper bonding lead shall be
connected from the earthing terminal of the water heater and bonded to the metal
pipe work on both sides of the pump.

Where water pumps are installed a bonding lead shall be taken from the earthing
terminal of the local isolator and bonded to the metal pipe work on both sides of the
pump.

The size of bonding lead shall be the same as the earth continuity conductor of the
circuit subject to a minimum size of 4.0 mm2.

LIGHTNING PROTECTION

General

The Lightning Protection shall be carried out in accordance with B.S. 62305:2006.

Air Terminations

The type and location of the air terminations shall be as indicated in the drawings;
where indicated, metal framed or metal clad roofs or all of an air termination shall be
bonded across joints between constituent parts. The bonding may be carried out by
the specialist roofing contractor but where this is not the case the bonds shall be
made as indicated; no drilling of roofing or coping shall be done without the
approval of the consultant.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-158/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

Metalwork of structure, ductwork pipes, cowling, air-conditioning equipments, plant


handrails and similar components of the building that are exposed at or above the
roof level shall be bonded to the nearest air termination.

Signal, SMATV aerial is mounted on the structure it shall be bonded to the nearest
air termination.

Down Conductors

The type and location of the of the down conductors shall be as indicated in the
drawings. Conductors connecting between a test clamp on the outside of a building
and an earth electrode, and conductors interconnecting pipe electrodes, shall be
sheathed; but conductors interconnecting copper electrodes may be left bare.
Conductors in other locations shall be sheathed. Sheaths shall be of PVC extruded,
shrunk on or similarly applied; the colour shall be approved by the consultant.

Where the profile of the building consists of an overhang or re-entrant loop to be


formed in a down conductor the consultant shall be informed.

Metalwork, including pipe work, ductwork and armoured cables, adjacent to down
conductors shall be bonded to them unless the distance between them provides
adequate isolation.

Where reinforcement bars of the concrete structure forms the down conductors,
welding of the reinforcement shall be carried out by the building contractor. The
electrical continuity of the welded reinforcing bars shall be tested prior and after
each pour of concrete is completed.

Connection from the down conductors formed by reinforcement steel or the building
contractor shall make concrete clad steel frames. They shall comprise stainless
steel tape of not less than 25 x 3 mm, welded on to the steelwork. To determine and
coordinate the length of the tail to be left for subsequent connection.

Joints

Joints in conductors shall be kept to a minimum. All contact surfaces shall be


thoroughly cleaned and coated with an anti-corrosive electrical jointing compound
suitable for the conductor material. For bi-metallic joints a separate abrasive shall
be used to clean the metal surfaces.

Joints between conductors of same Metal, other than at test points, shall be made
by thermal welding process or by riveting and sweating. Overlap of conductors shall
not be less than 100mm.

Where an aluminium conductor is joined to a copper conductor, one of the


following methods shall be used :

a. Bi-metal connector formed by friction welding of high purity copper and


aluminium.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-159/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

b. The copper conductor shall be completely sheathed for at least 100 mm of its
length with metal strip electrically compatible and aluminium, and then clamped
to the aluminium conductor.

Bi-metal joints shall not be made at test points nor between the test point and earth
electrode.

A test clamp shall be provided for each down conductor, it shall be located 1.2
meter above the finished ground level unless otherwise indicated. Test clamps shall
be of cast gunmetal.

Bonding connections to other metal parts of the building shall be electrolytically


compatible with those metal parts. Screws and rivets shall be phosphor bronze or
naval brass or high tensile manganese brass for copper conductors.

Joint connections shall be protected by a coating which will form a seal and exclude
moisture in all weather conditions. At connections to earth electrodes the coating
shall cover all exposed conductors and, in case of earth pipes, the top surface of
the flanges. The Protective coatings shall be of waterproof, inert, tenacious
materials and of one of the following forms:

Solvent cutback thixotrodic corrosion preventative forming a film of resilient


matt petroleum wax.
A fast drying durable rubberized sprayed coating.
A heat shrink clear sheathing.

Conductors

Earthing conductors, main earthing bars and main bonding conductors shall be of
the type, size and conductor materials as detailed in the drawings or approved by
the consultant.

Tapes shall comply with B.S. 1432 where used to interconnect copper electrodes.
The tape may be bare, but for interconnecting pipe electrodes and for all other
purposes the tape shall have an extruded PVC sheath.

Main earthing bars shall comply with B.S. 1433 and shall be bare.

Cables shall comply with B.S. 6004, Table 1, without sheath, unless specified
otherwise.

Earth Electrodes

The type and number of earth electrodes shall be as indicated in the drawings.

Unless otherwise indicated, earth rods shall be 15mm normal diameter extensible
copper clad high tensile steel rods connected together. Copper cladding shall be
molecularly bonded to the steel and shall be not less than 0.25mm thick. Driving
heads shall be of high tensile steel. Screwed joints shall connect rods by one of the
following methods.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-160/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

Threads shall be roll-formed with a minimum thickness of 0.05 mm copper in the


roots of the thread; couplers shall be of high strength silicon aluminium bronze alloy
and threads shall be counter bored at the ends so that the couplers completely
enclose the threads on the rods.

The ends of the rods shall be internally threaded; couplers shall comprise a copper
ferrule with the phosphor bronze coupler screw; a corrosion inhibiting paste shall be
applied to the threads on rods and couplers.

Pipe electrodes shall be flanged pipe complying with B.S. 2035 or B.S 4622,
150mm bore and 3000 mm long. Pipe to B.S 2035 shall be shot blasted to remove
the scale and rust.

Where the earth electrodes are formed with tape shall be to B.S. 1432, of the size,
length depth below ground level and layout as indicted in the drawings.

Fixing

The consultants approval of the tape clips, saddles and holdfasts used shall be
obtained before the work is started. The maximum spacings of fixings shall not
exceed 600mm. No fixing shall be made into joints in masonry.

Saddles and holdfasts shall be of the following materials :

For copper conductors, gunmetal, aluminium -- Silicon bronze or naval


brass.
For aluminium conductors -- aluminium and aluminium alloy or Stainless
steel.

Clips either shall be of metal as above or of outdoor grade polycarbonate or


polypropylene with snap-on lids which can not be inadvertently removed. Clips and
saddles shall have rounded edges and countersunk screws. Brass components
shall not be used.

For general areas inside the building screws and nuts shall be of cadmium
electroplated steel or stainless steel; outside the building, in plant rooms or other
locations they shall be of stainless steel.

No shot firing shall be used and no drilling or welding of structural steelwork shall be
carried out without the approval of the consultant. Drilling and cutting of the outside
fabric of the building shall be carried out only after the consultant has given
approval.

Inspection Pits

Unless otherwise indicated, connection between an earth conductor and its


associated earth electrode system shall be in an enclosure.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-161/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

Lightweight Inspection pit rated to 5000kg shall be manufactured from high


performance polymer, UV stabilized, chemically resistant and with lockable lid.
Every connection of an earthing lead to an earth electrode shall be made in an
inspection pit measuring 300 x 300 mm and the connections shall be either welded
or clamped. Waterproof earth electrode seal shall be used with suitably sized
compression rings and seals. Installation of the earth pit shall be properly co-
coordinated with the specialist manufacturer to satisfy the project requirement.
Integral earth bar shall be used. The enclosure shall be flush with finished floor
level.

Installation

Backfills immediately surrounding electrodes shall have, low specific resistivity and
good water retention properties and it shall be well compacted and watered.

Where earth electrodes are to be installed through the base slabs of a building,
electrode seals shall be provided. As indicated, either the rods shall be driven and
the seals fitted before the concrete is poured or the seals handed over to the
building contractor for him to incorporate them in the slab and the rods driven at a
later date. Harmful ingress of water shall be avoided when driving the rods.

Pipe electrodes shall be installed with the flange at the top, in 500 mm diameter
bored boles. Electrodes shall be installed vertically in an excavated hole, with a
minimum depth of 2000mm below ground level; and 10 ohms ground resistivity.

21.2.27 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM

The Contractor shall provide a complete lighting control system as shown upon the
drawings. The system shall allow for the automatic and scheduled ON-OFF control
of lighting installations as indicated upon the drawings.

The extra low voltage programmable lighting control System shall be designed and
developed in accordance with European installation bus technology to cover
building control requirements such as lighting control (On/Off and dimming), and
load management based on one or more applications such as motion, presence,
time, daylight & brightness, manual switches, etc.

A two-wire bus cable shall link in parallel all sensors (low voltage push button
switches, brightness sensors, motion sensors, timers, etc.) and actuators (on/off
controllers.) to each other. The bus cable shall be a twisted pair, screened &
shielded with solid conductors and shall be capable of handling information
exchange and supplying power to the bus devices. Separate power supply to any
of the sensors and actuators shall not be acceptable. The bus cable shall be laid in
the building in the form of a linear, star or tree structure similar to the power mains.
Systems requiring fixed wiring configurations shall not be acceptable.

The system shall be completely de-centralized and programmable. The


programming shall be implemented via a PC or notebook computer located
anywhere in the system and having access level passwords. Programming via local
system switches or with no password security shall not be acceptable. Any device

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-162/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

in the system shall be accessed for programming from the PC location without
having to manipulate the device locally.

Each device in the system shall be addressable via a software programmable


physical address. Any device in the system shall communicate with any other
device via software programmable group addresses (telegrams). Each individual
device will respond to only those group addresses for which they are programmed
to do so. There shall be an EEPROM storing the physical address, group
addresses & other software parameters for every device, thus making it intelligent.
No centralized processors or centralized memory storage devices shall be
permitted.

It shall be possible to program any of the devices on-line at the working site without
affecting any of the system devices or the system operation as well as off-line prior
to dispatch of the material to site.

The entire system shall consist of bus lines each consisting of up to 64 devices.
Two consecutive lines shall be connected to each other via line couplers that act as
network filters and also provide communication between devices in different lines.
In the event of failure of a device in one line, only the control functions controlled by
that device shall be affected and all other devices shall continue to operate as
normal. Any system with routers / couplers that require separate power supply shall
not be acceptable.

The power supply module feeding power to the network shall consist of a built in
back-up power to compensate short voltage interruptions of up to 200 ms. This
back-up power shall enable the system to put all actuators in a fail-safe position
(either on or off or as it is) in the event of power failure.

The diagnostic modules shall scan the system for any faults in the bus wiring and
display an alarm LED in the event of faults in the wiring.

Each of the devices shall have a built-in push button along with a LED. The LED
shall lit in the event the push button is pressed and if there is power to the device,
thus depicting that the device is communicating in the system.

In the event of power failure or bus wiring failure each of the system devices
(switching modules and dimming controllersetc.) shall be programmed to attain a
fail safe position (controlled circuits to become On, Off or As it is, Last status)

All devices in the system should conform to CE standards and should be


manufactured in accordance with the EMC guidelines and the low voltage
guidelines.

The Lighting control System shall be interfaced with the Building Management
System so as to monitor and control the required circuits from the BMS workstation.

The programmable lighting and control system shall consist of two levels of control
as follows:

1. Lighting Control PC based graphics software for time based control and
manual override by the operator. The software shall consist of graphics

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-163/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

based overview of the entire building, floors and going up to the individual
rooms. It shall have the necessary timer modules to control the circuits in the
form of various groups. It shall be possible to pre-program the time channels
in advance with special holiday programs, weekly programs, etc. The lighting
control PC shall be located as shown upon the drawings.

2. In the event the PC is not operational or is switched Off, a second level of


standalone operation shall continue without the need for intervention via
local controller modules capable of being programmed with switching times
locally without the need to connect a PC. A 100-channel controller capable
of being programmed with multiple time schedules / lighting scenarios shall
be provided for the lighting and control system.

There shall be a dedicated Lighting Control Panel (LCP) for each lighting circuits
distribution board. The LCP shall house the system devices and the related control
equipment depending on the number of circuits to be controlled. This is necessary
to ensure the power wiring between the DBs and the control modules inside the
LCPs is kept to a minimum. The LCPs shall be surface mounted IP65 polycarbonate
enclosures together with built-in DIN-rails for easy installation of the control
equipment.

All lighting shall be controlled such that unnecessary lights shall be automatically
switched OFF based on occupancy as mentioned below. Also lights redundant
due to sufficient daylight shall be switched OFF based on light sensors and time
schedules.

The lighting main circulation areas shall be switched ON/OFF based on occupancy-
movement. Wall mounted Motion detectors shall be strategically located within the
circulation areas so as to provide the necessary coverage. Lights shall be switched
Off during the day to reduce consumption when no movement is detected. During
evening as per pre-programmed times, alternate circuits or as decided at the time of
commissioning shall remain On while the others shall continue to be controlled
based on movement. The movement sensors shall have a built-in lux sensor with an
adjustable set point so as not to switch On circuits even after detecting movement
due to sufficient natural light. There shall also be an adjustable Off delay on the
movement sensor from 1 sec to 16 min. to ensure that circuits are not switched Off
immediately. Further, the movement sensors shall incorporate an On-Auto-Off
switch for maintenance and local override purposes.

A Controller device consisting of at least 50 timer channels (groups) in the form of


lighting scenarios shall control circuits (such as switching lighting on/off, etc.) on a
particular network group (line) to have local standalone operation. It shall be
possible to send signals from one controller channel in one network to circuits in
another network if programmed to do so. This is to ensure that all timer channels
are available for control of all circuits in the system. Each controller shall be capable
of being programmed locally with timer programs for any of the 100 channels
combined together, without the need to connect a PC. Each of the channels shall
have a manual operation function to over-ride the channel to On or Off
irrespective of the time programs. The controller shall have a built-in EEPROM to
ensure that the timer programs and control groups are retained even in the event of
power failure. This controller device shall be in addition to the BMS PC based

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-164/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

software time schedules to ensure uninterrupted stand-alone operation of the


system at all times.

External Lighting circuits shall be switched On/Off based on available daylight. A


light sensitive switch capable of switching up to three lighting groups, where each
individual channel has a separate switching set point shall be used. The brightness
range of the set points shall be adjustable from 100 to 2000 Lux as agreed with the
consultant/client at the time of commissioning.

Lighting control modules for ON/OFF switching shall be DIN rail mounted consisting
of either four (4) or eight (8) individually programmable integral relays (contactors)
and comprise of the following:

1. Each of these contactors shall be rated for 16 A, AC1 switching duty together
with an in-rush current carrying capacity of 50 A suitable for switching loads
with high switch-on peaks. The contactors should also have a capacitive load
rating of at least 200 microfarads.

2. The output states of each of these contactors shall be displayed on the front.
The contactors shall have latching contacts (latch closed) with manual
operation (override) possible even without power to the system and without
having to remove the cover of the control module.

3. In the event of either a power, controls bus, control module failure, each of
the contactors shall attain a pre-programmed fail-safe position (On, Off or
last status).

4. The control modules shall be capable of being programmed with different


applications to suit site requirements for e.g. staircase lighting function that
switches Off the relays after a preprogrammed time from the time it has
switched On. The application for which a relay has been programmed shall
apply irrespective of the signal from which it is controlled.

5. Each of the contactors shall be capable of being programmed with its own
On and Off delays that shall be applicable irrespective of the signal from
which the relays are controlled.

6. The control modules shall receive an operational power supply from the
controls bus cable without the need for any other power supply. It shall not
operate on any 220/240 V AC supply to avoid possible fire hazards.

7. Each of the control modules shall an individual address and shall be capable
of being programmed from the central PC for the purpose of changing
parameters without the need to access the module locally.

The Occupancy Sensors

Occupancy sensors Passive Infrared (PIR) are passive designed to detect the
movement of heat-emitting bodies. They are installed to monitor areas where there
are no physical obstruction to block the sensors field of view. The sensor detects
the motion as a change in infrared background and responds by switching on area

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-165/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

lights. After the field of view is unoccupied for user- defined delayed off time, the
sensor will automatically turn off the lights.

PIR sensors use a semiconductor detector to sense the movement of infrared


emitted from the human body. They require an unobstructed line-of-sight for
accurate detection.

Locate PIR sensors with a clear line-of-view of area to be covered. Place the sensor
perpendicular to likely movement as a person is most easily detected when crossing
the boundary between one Fresnel lens element and another.

Minimum Features

1. 360 Ceiling Mount PIR Detector


2. Range: Maximum 20m x 15m ellipse and adjustable to less ranges
3. PIR activation indicator
4. Adjustable Pulse Count & Sensitivity
5. Manual delayed off-time setting of 30 second to 30 minutes
6. Non-volatile memory preserves all automatic and manual setting during
power outages.
7. Ambient light override prevents light from turning on when there is ample
natural light.
8. Color to be match ID ceiling color
9. CUL/US Certified
10. Meet ASHRAE standard 90.1requirement.
11. Backed by a five year warranty

21.2.28 MASTER ANTENNA AND SATELLITE RECEPTION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special


Conditions (General requirements), apply to work of this section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and


tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation master antenna
television system in the building in accordance with Drawings and
specifications.
B. The system shall consist of a complete installation including Aerials, aerial
mounting, head end equipment, dishes, multi switches splitters, coaxial
Cables, tap offs, outlets, and all necessary accessories required for
complete installation.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-166/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture


of master antenna and satellite reception system of types, and capacities
required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for
not less than 5 years.

B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes,


DIN/VDE, IEC.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data : Submit manufacturers data and installation instructions for the
master antenna television system

B. Shop Drawings : Submit dimensional layout on architectural background


drawings.

C. Riser diagram: Submit riser diagram for the master antenna and satellite
reception system indicating type of different components in the system and
also the calculations of the signal level at each outlet.

D. Compliance list: submit a detailed point by point compliance statement with


this specification. Where the proposed system does not comply or accomplish
the stated function or specification in a manner different from that described
and specified, a full description of the deviation shall be provided.

1.5 EQUIPMENT WARRANTY

A. Guarantee equipment furnished under these specifications against defective


parts and workmanship under terms of the manufacturers and dealers
standard warranties for a period of not less than one year from date of initial
start-up and Engineer acceptance of the system and include labor and travel
time for necessary repairs at the job site.

PART2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INTRODUCTION

A. The contractors shall provide, install, test and commission master antenna and
satellite reception system utilizing the multi-switch technology to distribute the IF
signals from 3 satellite dishes in addition to RF signal from VHF/UHF antenna.
B. The Contractor shall show evidence of having successfully completed at least
three similar projects of a comparable quality and magnitude.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-167/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

C. The contractor shall show evidence that he maintains a fully equipped service
organization capable of furnishing adequate maintenance of the installed
system.

D. After the system is installed the contractor shall furnish a complete set of
operating instructions, technical information and system drawings necessary for
the proper operation and maintenance of the system.
The drawings shall include signal levels throughout the system as they were on
the acceptance date of the system.

E. The contractor shall provide and install, all the required cable and wiring for the
systems specified. He shall pull cable into conduit and boxes, install all system
equipment and make all necessary connections. He shall also make necessary
tests and adjustments and put the entire systems in satisfactory operation.

F. The contractor shall investigate the electrical power standards of the local area
and the specific premises in which the equipment is to be installed. All
equipment shall be compatible with the local power supply, voltage and
frequency.

G. All major items of equipment shall be the product of one manufacturer, where
practicable, to ensure a uniform quality and compatible styling and appearance.

H. The system shall be rated and capable of continuous twenty-four (24) hour
operation.

I. TV sockets shall be provided from the same manufacturer of lighting switches


and sockets, TV socket shall support the SAT. Frequency.

2.2 STANDARDS, REGULATIONS AND WORKMANSHIP

A. The master antenna television system installed shall comply with all applicable,
International standards and code of practice and Qatari Standards.

B. It is the contractors responsibility to ensure compatibility of systems with


domestic television and radio equipment available in Qatar.

C. The master antenna television system shall be designed and installed by


competent personnel specializing in this type of work. Installation shall be
carried out to the highest standards of workmanship.

2.3 SYSTEM CRITERIA

A. The contractor shall supply the master antenna television system for satellite
reception television, for the distribution to outlet points as shown on the
drawings.

B. The system shall be based on the multi switching technology.

C. The Contractor shall install the dish farm on the building roof.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-168/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

D. Each TV/outlet shall have IF&RF socket.

E. Wiring shall be carried out using the appropriate size of super low loss coaxial
cables. Coaxial cables shall be installed strictly in accordance with the cable
manufacturer's recommendations.

F. The contractor shall install master antenna television system outlets as


indicated on the drawings.

G. The contractor shall provide and install all power supplies necessary for the
correct operation of the system.

H. Subjective evaluation of the picture quality on a standard television receiver /


satellite receiver connected to any outlet in the system shall be utilized. No
visible components of cross channels inter-modulation, ghosting, or beat
interference shall appear when the receiver is tuned to each and every
distribution signal.

I. Objective proof of the capability of the system to meet the performance


specifications in this section will be required of the contractor during the
acceptance tests. The contractor shall furnish all test equipment for these tests.

2.4 MASTER AERIAL T.V

A. Aerials suitable for receiving terrestrial broadcast shall be installed on the roof of
the building, with special amplifiers and/or filters. The aerial array would be of
the best quality and optimum type for the highest possible standard of
reception.

B. The aerial shall be fitted to a mast mounted on the roof of the building.

C. All materials used in the fabrication of the aerials and their mountings shall be
protected against corrosion by heavy anodic coating, hot galvanizing or
corrosion resistant compound.

D. Aerials shall be constructed of light aluminum alloy with positive locking of all
elements in position. Square boom constructed is preferred.

E. Nuts, bolts, locking washers etc. shall be of such material or so treated that no
galvanic action can take place.

F. All aerials shall be supplied with a completely weather proof cased transformer
to provide the standard impedance of the system (75 ohm) and weather proof
glands with strain relieving properties shall be provided for the coaxial outlet
cable.

G. The feeders connecting the aerials to the multi-switch shall be of the highest
quality, the optimum type for the particular installation, and must be installed in
accordance with the current issue of international standard code of practice.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-169/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

H. All radio-frequency levels in this section are to be construed as referred to one


microvolt across 75 ohms.

I. One standard radio-frequency distribution impedance shall be used in the


system. This shall be 75 ohms and no other impedance shall be used without
the express permission of the Engineer.

J. The signal as measured at each or any correctly terminated outlet shall be


between + 50 dB to + 60 dB for IF frequencies and between + 68 dB to 85 dB
for RF frequencies.

K. Color performance on 625-line PAL system shall be at least to normal


commercial standards, in particular the following shall be observed.

Chrominance signal phase : IQ cross view less than 10%.


Dependent level phase : 3 degrees.
Luminance/chrominance ratio : 2 dB.

L. The entire installation shall be designed for minimum voltage standing wave
ratio and the return loss shall be not less than 20 dB at any point of the system.

M. Isolation between any two outlets shall be at least 22 dB.

N. The system shall be such that the short circuiting or open circuiting of any outlet
socket shall not significantly affect signals at other outlets.

O. Spurious radiation shall be within the limits laid down by international


regulations.

P. The system shall be capable of continuous operation in an ambient temperature


of 45 degrees Celsius and with voltage variations of 10% from the nominal
240 V, 50 Hz. LV supply.

Q. MATV system risers shall all be of the super low loss 75 ohms, cu-core coaxial
type (attenuation at 800 MHz not exceeding 8 dB/100 Mt.), run inside the mast
and securely clamped against vibration and whipping. Where run through roof
or side walls the appropriate tubing with U-shaped-ending shall be used to
prevent ingress of moisture and sealing shall be ensured at the outer extremity
only by use of appropriate sealing compound.

2.5 LIGHTNING AND OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION

A. Each aerial shall have its own integral spark gap and together with its co-axial
down-lead and the mast be bonded to a down-lead of at least 25x3mm. mm
cross section, terminating in a main earth.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-170/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

2.6 MAST OF SATELLITE DISH

The mast constructed of galvanized steel with a minimum diameter of 4 inches (10
cm).

The satellite dishes mast shall be protected against lightning damage by grounding
to the nearest approved system.

The satellite dish shall be grounded a common grounding points. The mast shall be
adequately supported on the reinforced concrete pad to withstand wind and other
environmental conditions, prevalent at this location.

All satellite dishes down-lead cables shall be fully shielded 75 Ohm coaxial type. All
cable fittings to the dish shall be covered with weather sealing devices and sealed
with silicone compound.

2.7 SATELLITE DISHES AND EQUIPMENT

Four fixed parabolic dishes. The dishes shall be of the symmetrical parabolic type
and 2.4 m diameter. The components specification shall be as follow:

- Frequency range : 10.95 - 12.75 GHz.


- Gain : not less than 44 dB
- Half power beam width : not greater than 1
- Material : Aluminum.

2.8 FEED SYSTEM

To fulfill the requirements of DIN/VDE 0855 part 12.

- Completely mounted on the reflector.


- Power supply through down lead.
- Frequency range : 10.95-12.75 GHz.
- Gain : not less than 47 dB.
- Output impedance : 75 ohm.
- Polarization decoupling : 40 dB (min.)

The feed system shall comprise a band pass filter for suppression of out band
distributing signals according to DIN/VDE 0855, part 12.

2.9. Distribution System

A. Multi Switch Unit

1. The building master antenna television system shall utilize Cascadeable


multi-switches (Active / Passive) with 16 SAT. Inputs, one RF Input and 8
subscriber Outputs, at the end of each riser section, Standalone (not

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-171/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

cascadable) Multi-switch shall be used, Standalone Multi-switch shall have


16 SAT. Inputs, one RF Input and 16 subscriber Outputs

The contractor shall add in his offer all needed amplifiers to obtain RF signal
strength 68-85 dB and IF signal strength 50-60dB at each outlet.

B. Tap off units

1. Tap-off units shall have 75 Ohm back matched units. Isolation and insertion
loss shall be chosen for each location to enable the total system
performance specification to be met.

2. Tap-off isolation network shall be directional coupler hybrid design. The


contractor shall adjust the head end to provide frequency tilt to compensate
for the frequency discriminative characteristics of the system cable.

C. Riser and Horizontal coaxial cables

1. The system riser coaxial cable shall be 75 Ohm impedance with an


attenuation of 8 dB/100 meters ( at 800 MHz ). It shall be sweep tested by
the manufacturer and certification shall be available on request.

2. Acceptable Cable constructions are as follows :

- Center conductor :Solid copper or copper clad.

- Dielectric insulation : Solid of foam polyethylene.

- Shield :100% coverage with aluminized mylar


or polyester foil plus copper or
aluminum wire braid. (wire braid only
shield will not be acceptable).

- Jacket :Polyvinyl chloride.

3. For horizontal coaxial cables, the attenuation shall be 12db/100m (at 800
MHz). These cables shall be used to connect between the TV outlets and
nearest multi switch unit.

2.17 TESTS ON SITE

A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide test equipment so that


tests can be carried on site and in the presence of the consultant in order to
ascertain that the installation meets all the specified performance criteria.

B. The following tests shall be carried out using a pattern generator with facilities
for all aspects of video and audio performance including:

1. Color Performance.

AEB-1179-15-REV.00 S-21-172/209
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
AL ERKYAH RESIDENTIAL BUILDING
(R-03, R-17, R-46, R-15, R-05, R-43 AND MU-P04)
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VOLUME 03 SECTION 21

2. Ghosting.
3. Resolution.
4. Synchronization performance, and any other measurements that
Engineer may which to perform.
5. System Performance.
6. System Recording.

The generator shall provide crystal controlled carries at all channel frequencies
in bands I and III modulated with 1000 Hz. audio and appropriate video signal.
Output shall be variable between at least + 20 dB and +100 dB. The raw video
and audio signals shall also be available.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which master antenna and satellite
reception systems are to be installed and notify in writing of conditions
detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install master antenna television system equipments, including associated


control devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions, requirements of applicable standards, and in accordance with
recognized code of practices to ensure that installation complies with
requirements and serves intended function.

B. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance


with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment
connectors. Where manufacturer's torque requirements are not indicated,
tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in
UL Standards 486A and B.

C. Anchor mountin